Author: Nik Ranger

Best Warzone Swiss K31 class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Setup ActivisionIn Warzone Season 4 Reloaded, Sniper Rifles have been buffed, and we have the best Swiss K31 loadout to make it a top weapon once more. Raven clamped down on Sniper Rifles in Warzone Pacific Season 3 bringing to an end the tyranny of the Kar98K and Swiss K31. However, the Season 4 Reloaded buffs and nerfs have changed the meta again, making the Swiss more viable than it has been previously. The rapid Sniper Rifle is no longer as dangerous as it once was thanks to nerfs, but players still tend to favor it for its speed and precision capabilities. In order to truly get the most out of this deadly rifle, you’ll want to pick the right attachments. Check below for a complete overview of our ultimate Swiss K31 loadout for Warzone Season 4 Reloaded. Contents Best Swiss K31 loadout for Warzone – Best Swiss K31 setup (Perks & equipment) – How to unlock the Swiss K31 in Warzone – Best Swiss K31 loadout Warzone tips – Alternative to the Swiss K31 loadout – Best Swiss K31 loadout for Warzone Attachments Muzzle: GRU Suppressor – Barrel: 24.9” Combat Recon – Laser: SWAT 5mw Laser Sight – Stock: SAS Combat Stock – Rear Grip: Serpent Wrap – As with any Sniper Rifle in the game, you need to be running the GRU Suppressor Muzzle. This attachment offers extra Bullet Velocity and damage range making it a must for those that wish to increase the Swiss K31’s kill potential at a distance. If that wasn’t enough, the added sound suppression will help keep you from being easily located when firing. See the latest Call Of Duty deals here The 24.9” Combat Recon barrel is also another vital attachment that should be prioritized. This barrel increases the Swiss K31’s bullet velocity, which enables hitting mid to long-range enemies much easier – an area that is incredibly important if you wish to claim more kills. Next up is the SWAT 5mw Laser Sight and Serpent Wrap. Both these attachments drastically speed up the K31’s aim down sight time, making it even easier to quickly zap onto your target’s heads for those all-important cranium-crushing kills. Lastly, while most players opt to take the Bruiser Grip, we suggest you try the SAS Combat Stock for Aim Walking Movement Speed and ADS Firing Movement Speed. This allows you to peak enemy snipers and gain the advantage in gunfights as long as you land your first shot. Best Swiss K31 setup (Perks & equipment) Perks and Equipment Perk 1: E.O.D. – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Secondary: MP40 – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Heartbeat Sensor – Our Swiss K31 class utilizes the EOD and Amped Perks. EOD greatly reduces the damage from non-killstreak explosives and fire, whilst Amped gives you faster weapon swap and equipment speeds. The Overkill perk enables the use of our MP40 loadout, which remains one of the best SMGs in Warzone Pacific. If that doesn’t fit your playstyle, consider running the Owen Gun or even the classic MAC-10. While Overkill keeps you competitive across all engagement ranges, you’ll still want to pick up Ghost as soon as you can. Lastly, both the Semtex and Heartbeat Sensor help track down nearby enemies and give you the tools needed to flush out nearby campers. How to unlock the Swiss K31 in Warzone In order to unlock the Swiss K31, you must complete the following challenge: Using Sniper Rifles, get 2 Headshot kills in 15 different completed matches. Those that enjoy using the Kar98k Marksman Rifle will definitely want to add this Swiss sniper to their arsenal. Simply grind out either Warzone or Black Ops Cold War multiplayer matches to add it to your arsenal. Best Swiss K31 loadout Warzone tips If you wish to take full of advantage of this weapon in Warzone, here are some tips you should know: Running this weapon without a capable secondary weapon is dangerous. While it covers you at medium to long ranges, you will be vulnerable up-close. To complete this loadout, be sure to run either an SMG like the PPSh-41 or a strong close-ranged Assault Rifle. – The use of the perk Amped allows you to swap between weapons faster. In the event you need a different weapon in a sticky scenario, this will help you immensely. – Alternative to the Swiss K31 loadout If you’re looking for an alternative to the Swiss K31, then consider using this Kar98k loadout. While it may not be classified as a Sniper, this iconic WWII Marksman Rifle really packs a punch. The Kar98k also has a similar playstyle as it has a high rate of fire, fast rechambering animation, and decent damage range. This makes it the perfect pick for those that enjoy the playstyle of the Swiss K31 but want a little more speed. Or, you could run other more ‘meta’ Sniper Rifles in the HDR or ZRG 20mm. Make sure to check out our other Warzone guides and lists such as: Best streamer loadouts | Most popular Warzone weapons| Best Sniper Rifles | All Warzone bunker codes | MAC-10 loadout | FFAR Warzone class | Top 20 highest-earning players | Best Warzone weapons: Ultimate tier list with meta loadouts | Best Warzone landing spots on Caldera map If you click on a product link on this page we may earn a small affiliate commission.

Best Warzone Streetsweeper class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Setup ActivisionThe Streetsweeper shotgun is available in Call of Duty: Warzone, and can be a monster up close with the right attachments. Here’s our recommended loadout, complete with perks, attachments and more. Despite dropping in Black Ops Cold War as a secondary weapon, the Streetsweeper shotgun is available in Warzone as a primary. While it has some clear weaknesses – namely its range and recoil – it can be a great suppressive weapon if used sensibly and in close quarters. As a shotgun, it seems unlikely that it will ever reach the popularity of the most sought-after weapons in Warzone, which are almost all SMGs, ARs or sniper rifles. However, it can be used in conjunction with a longer-range weapon (an AR is probably best) if you equip Overkill. Best Streetsweeper loadout for Warzone For starters, you’ll want to increase the gun’s magazine size. As it’s fully auto, it’s a great suppressive weapon, and more shots will enable you to keep enemies under fire for longer. Because of this, our first recommendation is the STANAG 18 RND magazine which, as the name suggests, gives you 18 shots before you have to reload. Read More: Best Warzone landing spots in Season 3 – Next up is the Agency Choke, which is an essential addition to any BOCW weapon in Warzone. It will ensure players remain undetectable while firing, as well as improving hipfire accuracy and ADS spread. While there is a small penalty to damage range, this will be negated somewhat by the 13.3″ Reinforced Heavy barrel, which will improve range and fire rate. Finally, the SWAT 5mw Laser Sight will improve hip fire accuracy (important with any shotgun), and the marathon stock will improve sprint to fire time. There’s no need for Optics given the range you’ll be using the Streetsweeper at. Best Streetsweeper setup (Perks & equipment) As previously mentioned, you’ll want to use Overkill. Dropping in with just an automatic shotgun will get you a one-way ticket to the Gulag. Perk 1: E.O.D. – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Secondary: Kilo 141 – Lethal: Frag Grenade – Tactical: Heartbeat Sensor – The other perks are more open to change, but the Heartbeat Sensor will ensure no enemy can sneak up on you unaware. The Kilo 141, too, will allow you to dominate at medium to longer ranges, with the Streetsweeper in your back pocket. If you’re struggling for other weapons too, check out our overall top 10 Warzone loadouts.

Best Warzone loadouts used by streamers: Aydan, Swagg, JGOD, more NRG / Andbox / Twitter, @SymfuhnyCall of Duty: Warzone’s best players and content creators grind to discover the best weapon classes. Here are the best loadouts from some of your favorite streamers in Warzone. During Warzone Season 3, the game is enjoying a bountiful meta full of diverse weapon classes. Should you want to try out a new loadout, this is the perfect time, and the perfect inspiration comes from the game’s hardest workers, who run Caldera and Rebirth Island like a full-time job. Here is every weapon class and loadout from some of Warzone’s finest players. Contents Aydan loadouts – JGOD loadouts – HusKerrs loadouts – Swagg loadouts – Tommey loadouts – Jukeyz loadouts – JoeWo loadouts – Aydan’s best Warzone loadouts One of the highest earners in Warzone history, Aydan is wildly popular and has the ability to boot. Here are some of Aydan’s best meta loadouts in Warzone Season 3: JGOD’s best Warzone loadouts JGOD is almost universally recognized as the Warzone expert. He extensively studies every single weapon and attachment in the game and can reel off any statistic to prove why one gun is better than another. That’s why paying attention to his loadouts is so important. Here are his key weapons he recommends using in Season 3. HusKerrs’ best Warzone loadouts Husk is widely considered to be among the best mouse and keyboard players in the world. Here are his preferred loadouts in Warzone Season 3: Swagg’s best Warzone loadouts FaZe Swagg is consistently one of the most-watched Warzone streamers every month, and it’s easy to see why when you see his high-kill gameplay. Here are some of Swagg’s best Warzone loadouts: Tommey’s best Warzone loadouts Tommey is Warzone’s highest earner and an absolute demon on the competitive side of the game, winning almost everything available to him. Here are his preferred loadouts for Warzone Season 3: Jukeyz’ best Warzone loadouts The UK’s finest, Jukeyz has made a habit of dominating his North American opponents despite having to play from halfway across the world. Here’s what he’s running: JoeWo’s best Warzone loadouts Movement king JoeWo might be best known for his ability to out-maneuver any enemy that comes near him, but he’s also got a diverse range of great loadouts, both meta and off-meta, that he likes to use. With weapon tuning updates, these classes are all subject to change. Each streamer updates their loadouts at a different pace, so feel free to check into their stream to make sure they’ve listed their most up-to-date classes. We will make sure to update these lists as the seasons progress in Warzone — all the way up to Warzone 2.

Best Warzone stock attachment: stats reveal strongest stock on each weapon ActivisionNew stats from Warzone guru TrueGameData make deciding on a stock incredibly simple, with there being a clear strongest option depending on the weapon class being used. Modern Warfare’s Gunsmith (and the weapon customization in games that has followed) means that Warzone players have plenty of choices when it comes to weapon stocks – attachments that bridge the gap between weapon and shoulder. In previous Call of Duty games, a stock generally allowed players to move faster while aiming down sights, but their benefits have varied since Modern Warfare introduced multiple variations of the attachment. An October 16 YouTube video from Warzone stats guru TrueGameData revealed exactly which stock to use depending on your loadout. Thankfully, it’s very simple to figure out. On ARs, the 6th stock option (the final one players unlock) will be the best option. This gives players a 39% movement speed boost while ADS, and an 11% increase to ADS firing movement speed. This is compared 39% and 5% with the 5th stock option (the penultimate one players unlock). For SMGs, on the other hand, players will always want to use the 5th stock option. This brings a 15% boost to ADS movement speed, 7% to ADS movement speed while firing, and 6% when firing not ADS. The 6th stock, though, will only bring a 10% boost to ADS movement speed and a 6% boost to ADS movement while firing. TGD did caveat this by explaining that some open bolt weapons may benefit from stock 6, but the majority of SMGs are best run with the 5th stock option. In terms of other weapon categories, TGD explained that LMGs and Tactical Rifles vary too much to offer a general consensus, while sniper rifles will largely benefit from stock 5 if players opt for this attachment. Obviously, there will be some variation in your chosen stock depending on your play style, but TGD’s stats make the benefits of his tips undeniable.

Best Warzone Sniper Rifle class loadouts: Attachments, Setup, Perks Infinity WardThere are so many choices when it comes to Sniper Rifles in the original Warzone, but some are simply better than others. We came up with a list of the best meta sniper rifle loadouts in Warzone Caldera. Warzone still remains one of the greatest battle royales when it comes to weapon diversity, each weapon has its own character. Sadly, the nerfs in Season 3 made it so only a handful of the battle royale’s sniper rifles can still one-shot opponents. To help you find the best sniper in Warzone, we’ve covered all the top-tier loadouts and attachments that maximize their efficiency. Whether you’re looking to increase your lethality or just wish to claim more long-range kills, then you can’t go wrong with these picks. Remember, if you’re ready to dive into Warzone 2 and want to know which top-tier weapons to use, be sure to check out our list of the best Sniper Rifles to use in Warzone 2. Contents What is the best sniper in Warzone? The best Sniper Rifle in Warzone is the Gorenko Anti-Tank Rifle. Currently, this sniper has the highest KD ratio and win rate out of all the rifles in the game and it’s easy to see why. The Gorenko offers unmatched damage at long-range and while the 3 Line Rifle is a close contender, the Gorenko comes out on top thanks to its raw firepower. 12. Best Type 99 loadout Attachments Muzzle: Mercury Silencer – Barrel: Shiraishi 712mm Sniper – Optic: 1913 Variable 4-8x – Stock: Sakura CVR Custom – Underbarrel: M1930 Strife Angled – Magazine: 5.6mm 8 Round Mags – Ammunition: FMJ Rounds – Rear Grip: Leather Grip – Perk 1: Discard – Perk 2: Deep Breath – While the Type 99 may not be the most popular Sniper Rifle in Warzone, it’s still a pretty fun gun to use. Closer to the Kar98 and Swiss than some of the other options, the Type 99 is a relatively versatile sniper with good range and speed. If you’re bored of the better options, check this Type 99 class out. But, if you find it underwhelming (which you probably will), then swap to something deadlier — like the other snipers on this list. 11. Best M82 loadout Attachments Muzzle: Infantry Stabilizer – Barrel: 22.6″ Combat Recon – Stock: Tactical Stock – Magazine: STANAG 9 Rnd – Rear Grip: Airborne Elastic Wrap – The M82 is a perfectly viable option in Warzone and we believe its power is nothing to scoff at. It may lack mobility compared to the higher-ranked Sniper Rifles on this list, but that isn’t to say the M82 isn’t worth taking out onto the battlefield. Give it a go, and make sure to consult our detailed setup for the M82. 10. Best AX-50 loadout Attachments Muzzle: Monolithic Suppressor – Barrel: 32.0″ Factory Barrel – Laser: Tac Laser – Stock: Singuard Arms Assassin – Rear Grip: Stippled Grip Tape – A tried and tested fan-favorite over the years, the AX-50 is a solid choice but falls short compared to the other meta options in Season 5 Reloaded. While it can’t down people across the map quite as easily as the HDR and Gorenko, it’s a much more versatile option given its mobility, aim-down-sight (ADS), and firing rate advantages. This AX-50 class maintains enough bullet velocity and accuracy to prove lethal from range, while still enjoying some mobility. You can be fairly comfortable pulling it out for a quick down during a gunfight before pushing with an AR or SMG. Making this gun even more mobile to use is the Tac Laser, Singuard Arms Assassin Stock, and Stippled Grip Tape. The gun is quite versatile as Swagg was even able to turn it into the Intervention from Modern Warfare 2. Make sure to check out our full breakdown of the best AX-50 loadout in Warzone right here. 9. Best Tundra loadout Attachments Barrel: 29.1″ Combat Recon – Laser: Ember Sighting Point – Optic: Ultrazoom Custom – Underbarrel: Patrol Grip – Magazine: Vandal Speed Loader – Despite receiving a set of hefty buffs back in the Season 5 patch, the LW3 Tundra is still sitting outside of the meta top 5. However, it’s still a powerful choice in the right players’ hands, and with the increase in damage range, it’s in a better state than ever before. Our Tundra loadout above has great kill potential and even though it isn’t the most popular Sniper Rifle currently in Warzone, it definitely packs a punch. 8. Best Swiss K31 loadout Attachments Muzzle: GRU Suppressor – Barrel: 24.9” Combat Recon – Laser: SWAT 5mw Laser Sight – Underbarrel: Bruiser Grip – Rear Grip: Serpent Grip – A victim of Raven’s Season 3 nerfs, the Swiss is no longer a guaranteed one-shot down to the head anymore, stunting some of its use. Although no longer dominant as it once was, the Swiss is still fast, has a clean default scope and reticle, and it downs enemies quite efficiently. Like the Kar98k, the Swiss is all about fast ADS, quick shots, and precision. For a full, detailed breakdown of the best Swiss K31 loadout in Warzone, check out our dedicated class guide. 7. Best Pelington 703 loadout Attachments Muzzle: Stabilizer .308 – Barrel: 25″ Extended – Stock: Duster Stock – Magazine: Vandal Speed Loader – Rear Grip: Field Tape – The Pelington 703 is a good Sniper Rifle for aggressive Warzone players who prefer to take quick shots. While the weapon definitely won’t do as much damage as the Gorenko or 3-Line Rifle, it does provide you with more mobility and a reduced ADS speed. Also, with Raven buffing the Pellington’s damage in Season 5 Reloaded, it’s brilliant when paired up with a meta SMG or AR. It’s worth noting that to knock an opponent with the Pelington, you’ll need to land headshots. So, if you’ve got a sharp aim and prefer a less stationary playstyle, consider picking up the Pelington and trying this loadout. 6. Best HDR loadout Attachments Muzzle: Monolithic Suppressor – Barrel: 26.9” HDR Pro – Laser: Tac Laser – Optic: Variable Zoom Scope – Stock: FTAC Champion – Following on from the Warzone Sniper weapon nerfs in Season 3, the HDR once again became a viable option thanks to its overwhelming firepower. If you’ve ever been downed from hundreds of yards away out of nowhere, then it was probably the HDR. While this gun is heavy and slow-moving, both are entirely negligible, especially given its incredible kill potential. This is the best HDR loadout for those who want to claim a bounty of long-range kills. It’s not about moving around, downing an enemy, and rushing in with a numbers advantage. It’s about sitting back, taking out enemies from afar, and trying to claim cross-map headshots. Make sure to check out our full breakdown of the best HDR loadout in Warzone right here. 5. Best Kar98k loadout (Modern Warfare) Attachments Muzzle: Monolithic Suppressor – Barrel: Singuard Custom 27.6″ – Optic: Sniper Scope – Laser: Tac Laser – Perk: FTAC Sport Comb – For what seemed like an eternity, this gun was deemed to be the best sniper in Warzone by many pros and content creators alike. It took a long, long time, but the Kar98k is no longer the king of Warzone. The fastest ADS and mobility of the gun means it’s still a great gun to use, although its one-shot ability has been greatly tamed. The only question mark about this Kar98 loadout is the Sleight of Hand usage, which is great for reload speed and gun swapping but can be sacrificed if you’re struggling to hit shots. If that’s the case, you can consider the Precision or the FTAC Sport Comb instead. Make sure to check out our full breakdown of the best Kar98k loadout in Warzone right here. 4. Best Kar98k loadout (Vanguard) Attachments Muzzle: Scout Silencer – Barrel: VDD RE02K – Stock: Short Stock – Underbarrel: SMLE Pistol Grip – Magazine: 8MM Klauser 5 Round Fast Mag – Ammunition: FMJ Rounds – Rear Grip: Leather Grip – Perk: Fleet – Perk 2: Fully Loaded – With absolutely insane ADS speeds and a one-shot kill of up to 100 meters, the Vanguard Kar98k is ideal for aggressive Warzone players. While you will need to be a sharpshooter with a solid aim to make this gun shine, it’s deadly in the hands of players who can quick scope their opponents from a distance. Although the gun won’t be eliminating enemies in a single shot from massively long distances, it makes up for this shortcoming with its absurd ADS speeds and mobility. 3. Best ZRG 20mm loadout Attachments Muzzle: Wrapped Suppressor – Barrel: 43.9″ Combat Recon – Laser: SWAT 5mw Laser Sight – Stock: 5 Rnd – Rear Grip: Serpent Grip – Taking the third spot is none other than the ZRG 20mm Sniper Rifle from Black Ops Cold War. Again, significant shifts in the game’s meta have allowed some underrated guns to flourish. None more so than the ZRG 20mm, which did enjoy some success when it first came out, but it has quickly become a fan favorite. While it can’t quite contend with the 3-Line Rifle and Gorenko, its fantastic speed and great bullet velocity do make it much easier to use. Even Call of Duty streamer IceManIsaac has singled out one of the best Warzone sniper loadouts to try for the unstoppable ZRG 20mm Sniper Rifle. Check out our own top ZRG 20mm loadout too. 2. Best 3-Line Rifle loadout Attachments Muzzle: Mercury Silencer – Barrel: Kovalevskaya 820mm R1MN – Optic: 1913 Variable 4-8x – Stock: ZAC Custom MZ – Underbarrel: Mark VI Skeletal – Magazine: .30-06 20 Round Mags – Ammunition: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Leather Grip – Perk 1: Silent Focus – Perk 2: On-Hand – The 3 Line-Rifle was ignored for a long time by a lot of Warzone players but a hefty set of buffs in Season 5 finally brought the gun into the fold. Since then the rifle has been a dominant pick on Caldera that deals lethal amounts of damage. Which is why this is one of the best Warzone sniper loadouts out there. Not only that, it’s currently the most popular rifle in the game and players are seeing a lot of success with the weapon, so don’t hesitate to make the most of this powerful sniper. To make sure it’s the best it can be, we have a complete guide to the best 3-Line Rifle loadout here. 1. Gorenko Anti-Tank Rifle Attachments Muzzle: Mercury Silencer – Barrel: 420mm Empress – Optic: 1913 Variable 4-8x – Stock: Reinforced Stock – Underbarrel: GF-59 Flashlight – Magazine: 13mm AM 10 Round Mags – Ammunition: FMJ Rounds – Rear Grip: Leather Grip – Perk: Focus – Perk 2: On-Hand – The Gorenko burst into the meta in Season 5, establishing itself as one of the best Warzone sniper rifle and loadout after the one-shot nerfs to the Kar98k and Swiss. Now, the gun reigns as the top sniper in Warzone thanks to its lethality at long-range which makes it perfect for picking off opponents. While it did get hit with a bullet velocity nerf in Season 5 Reloaded, this wasn’t enough to knock it off the top spot. It remains a devastating sniper option in the right players’ hands and offers a huge amount of damage at long range. Best Warzone sniper support weapons Once you’ve decided on the best Warzone sniper loadout for your individual playstyle, it’s then important you pick a solid secondary or support weapon. Seeing as Sniper Rifles are ideal at long range, your best bet will be to find a weapon that is good at close and medium-range engagements, leaning toward whichever suits you best. We’ve listed three separate weapon loadouts that are perfect when paired with any of the sniper loadouts above. 1. Best Armguerra Warzone loadout Muzzle: Recoil Booster – Barrel: Botti 315mm CII – Optic: Slate Reflector – Stock: Imerito SA Folding – Underbarrel: Mark VI Skeletal – Magazine: 9mm 60 Round Mags – Ammo Type: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Polymer Grip – Perk: Hardscope – Perk2: On-Hand – 2. Best XM4 loadout Muzzle: Agency Suppressor – Barrel: 13.5″ Task Force – Optic: Axial Arms 3x – Ammunition: STANAG 60 Round – Underbarrel: Field Agent Grip – 3. Best MP40 loadout Muzzle: Recoil Booster – Barrel: Krausnick 317mm 04B – Optic: Slate Reflector – Stock: Krausnick 33M Folding – Underbarrel: m1941 Hand Stop – Magazine: 7.62 Gorenko 45 Round Mags – Ammo Type: Hollow Point – Rear Grip: Polymer Grip – Proficiency: Steady – Kit: Quick – While many support weapons complement a sniper loadout in Warzone, if you’re struggling to find that perfect fit, these three should prove to be successful in the BR. Looking for more of the best Warzone loadouts and tips? Check out our list of guides below: Best Warzone settings to increase FPS on PC | Most popular Warzone weapons | Best Warzone loadouts | Call of Duty Warzone Mobile: Everything we know | What is Sabotage Contract in Warzone? | How to level up Vanguard weapons fast for Warzone If you click on a product link on this page we may earn a small affiliate commission.

Best Warzone SMG class loadouts: Attachments, Setup, Perks ActivisionThe original Warzone bolsters an impressive arsenal of weapons spanning multiple categories, SMGs are no exception. So if you’re looking for the best SMGs to use in it then this is the place to be. In this guide, we ranked every Warzone SMG and picked out the strongest meta loadouts for each one. Warzone Caldera’s close range encounters are dominated by weapons from the SMG category. But every weapon has it’s weakness, so keep an Assault Rifle in the second weapons slot for those medium range engagements. This hyper-aggressive playstyle may not be for every player, but having an SMG you can rely on in Warzone is incredibly important. Unlike the AR class, the SMG category is not that varied, and many players often gravitate towards only a couple of picks. Of course, that hasn’t stopped certain loadouts from cropping up. To help you increase your win rate in Warzone, we’ve ranked all the best Warzone SMGs and the attachments you should be using with them. Remember, if you’re ready to dive into Warzone 2 and want to check out the best SMGs in the sequel to dominate Al Mazrah, be sure to check out our list of the best meta SMGs to use in Warzone 2. What is the best SMG in Warzone? The best SMG in Warzone right now is the Armaguerra 43. This efficient gun has an extremely fast TTK and also has incredible mobility making it a top-tier pick on Caldera, Rebirth Island, and Fortune’s Keep. See the latest Call Of Duty deals here 26. M1912 Best M1912 Warzone loadout Muzzle: Recoil Booster – Barrel: CBC 12″ Cooling – Optic: Slate Reflector – Stock: CGC S Adjustable – Magazine: 9mm 50 Round Drums – Underbarrel: M1941 Hand Stop – Ammunition: Hollow Point – Rear Grip: Polymer Grip – Perk1: Fleet – Perk2: Quick – The M1912 SMG, also known as the Tommy Gun, in Warzone arrived as a part of the Vanguard integration, and it didn’t disappoint. This weapon boasts an especially fast fire rate, which will be favored among many long-time Warzone players. This loadout simply increases this weapon’s accuracy, mobility, and recoil control. If you’re a fan of an aggressive playstyle, this SMG is a must-pick. 25. PP19 Bizon Best Bizon Warzone loadout Muzzle: Monolithic Suppressor – Barrel: 8.7” Steel – Laser: Tac Laser – Stock: Corvus Skeleton Stock – Rear Grip: Stippled Grip Tape – The PP19 Bizon became a common sight across Verdansk when it was introduced as floor loot back in Season 4. Since then, this SMG has taken a dive in the popularity rankings. Off meta guns aren’t exactly known for their competitive nature, however, a damage buff in the Season 2 Reloaded patch made the community start experimenting with the Bizon. Our loadout focuses on maximizing the weapon’s damage while retaining plenty of mobility, making it a great non-meta pick for fans of Fortune’s Keep. 24. P90 Best P90 Warzone loadout Muzzle: Monolithic Suppressor – Barrel: FORGE TAC Retribution – Optic: PBX Holo 7 Sight – Stock: FORGE TAC CQB Comb – Rear Grip: Rubberized Grip Tape – Unlike the other SMGs on the list, the P90 is actually capable of taking down mid-range targets. Its high rate of fire and minimal recoil will keep your shots accurate, while also keeping you competitive in close-quarter environments. The P90 remains an underrated gun that rarely sees play in Warzone However, if you’re willing to try out another SMG, then you might find some luck with this classic Modern Warfare SMG. 23. LAPA Best LAPA Warzone loadout Muzzle: Agency Suppressor – Ammunition: Salvo 45 Round Fast Mag – Laser: Tiger Team Spotlight – Optic: Microflex LED – Stock: SAS Combat Stock – While the LAPA goes under the radar for a lot of players, this weapon did previously make a good sniper support weapon. This is partly down to its high ADS speed and overall mobility. Unfortunately, it simply can’t compete with a lot of the meta options that offer a better TTK. However, if you’re looking for a gun to pair with your 3-Line Rifle or Gorenko, this could be the perfect solution that can effectively take out enemies at close to medium range. 22. Fennec Best Fennec Warzone loadout Barrel: ZLR 18″ Deadfall – Laser: Tac Laser – Perk: Slight of Hand – Underbarrel: Operator Foregrip – Ammunition: 40 Round Drum Mags – Featuring a vast array of features that makes this gun a decent choice for a non-meta run, the Fennec is a fun SMG to utilize in your Warzone Season 5 Reloaded loadouts. The Fennec’s easy-to-manage recoil pattern, high rate of fire, and exceptional hip-fire will see you through many sticky situations. These attachments will push this Modern Warfare gun to its very limits. 21. AUG Best AUG Warzone loadout Muzzle: Monolithic Suppressor – Laser: Tac Laser – Stock: FORGE TAC CQB Comb – Rear Grip: FORGE TAC CQB Comb – Ammunition: 5.56 NATO 60-Round Drums – While Modern Warfare’s AUG had a brief stint in the meta spotlight, it was quickly overshadowed by Warzone’s best Assault Rifles. Despite this, the reliable SMG boasts decent accuracy and range, making it an incredibly versatile option. The Modern Warfare version performs very differently when compared to its Cold War cousin. There are no burst fire rounds to be found here – instead, this variant enables players to go full-auto. If you’re after a highly mobile SMG, then you will be disappointed, but the range and accuracy do make it an underrated option. 20. AK-74u Best AK-74u Warzone loadout Muzzle: GRU Suppressor – Barrel: 10.3″ Task Force – Stock: Spetsnaz PKM Stock – Underbarrel: Spetsnaz Grip – Ammunition: 40 Rnd Drum – The AK-74u has always been a reliable choice among SMG enthusiasts. This deadly weapon rewards hyper-aggressive plays, while also giving players tremendous amounts of accuracy. To make matters even better, the AK-74u also has a fairly decent damage range. The AK-47’s sibling may have dropped a few places over time, but don’t be surprised if you see this build occasionally crop up across Warzone Season 5 Reloaded. 19. LC10 Best LC10 Warzone loadout Muzzle: Agency Suppressor – Barrel: 13.9” Task Force – Laser: Tiger Team Spotlight – Stock: Raider Stock – Ammunition: STANAG 55 Rnd – The LC10 features fantastic accuracy, great mobility, decent close-quarters damage, and a high fire rate. To top things off this pint-sized SMG also has fantastic handling, which makes gunning for those all-important headshots a breeze. Having an SMG that also has little extra range damage can also help secure more kills when you’re low on AR ammo or scrambling for your primary. 18. Sten Best Sten Warzone loadout Muzzle: Recoil Booster – Barrel: Hockenson 348mm B13S – Optic: Slate Reflector – Stock: Gawain Para – Underbarrel: M1941 Hand Stop – Magazine:7.62 Gorenko 36 Round Mags – Ammunition: Hollow Point – Rear Grip: Taped Grip – Perk1: Acrobatic – Perk2: Quick – The Sten in Warzone is an SMG that boasts a fast fire rate, moderate damage, and easily controllable recoil — perfect for players who prefer aggression and racking up close-quarter kills. Our loadout helps to improve this weapon’s accuracy and mobility even further, while also giving you more bullets in the mag to potentially take out more opponents and claim victory in Warzone Season 5 Reloaded. 17. Cold War PPSH Best PPSH Warzone loadout Muzzle: GRU Suppressor – Barrel: 15.7″ Task Force – Stock: Raider Stock – Underbarrel: Spetsnaz Grip – Ammunition: 55 Rnd Drum – Warzone and Cold War’s Season 3 update brought with it the PPSH. This iconic WWII SMG comes packed with an incredible rate of fire and has barely any recoil when kitted out with the best attachments. While the gun’s damage per shot may be on the low side, its rapid-fire and large ammo capacity enable players to quickly chew through many a foe. Simply attach the Gru Suppressor, Spetsnaz Grip, and 55 Rnd Drum and you have an SMG that is capable of some truly devastating things. It’s certainly not hard to see why the PPSH has quickly risen through the rankings. 16. MAC-10 Best MAC-10 Warzone loadout Muzzle: Agency Suppressor – Barrel: 5.9” Task Force – Laser: Tiger Team Spotlight – Stock: Raider Stock – Underbarrel: Field Agent Grip – The MAC-10 is no longer the powerhouse it used to be, but it can still hold its own with the correct build. Although small in stature, this weapon is an absolute beast, featuring an incredible rate of fire, good damage, and staggeringly accurate hip fire. Our loadout above increases the MAC-10’s attributes even further, streamlining the spray-and-pray-type recoil with the Field Agent Grip and Agency Suppressor. 15. OTs 9 Best OTs 9 loadout Muzzle: GRU Suppressor – Barrel: 8.1” Task Force – Laser: Tiger Team Spotlight – Stock: KGB Skeletal Stock – Ammunition: VDV 40 Rnd Fast Mag – This lightning-fast SMG may no longer be the most popular, but that hasn’t stopped it from being used by both casual and competitive players alike. With its incredible accuracy and added damage range, it’s not hard to see why this SMG continues to get ever-close to the top 10. 14. Bullfrog Best Bullfrog Warzone loadout Muzzle: GRU Suppressor – Barrel: 7.4” Task Force – Laser: Tiger Team Spotlight – Stock: KGB Skeletal Stock – Underbarrel: Bruiser Grip – The Bullfrog’s massive magazine and decent range damage make this Cold War SMG incredibly viable. This deadly gun has proven itself in many close and medium-range scenarios, making it a highly versatile SMG pick in Warzone. After all, having to constantly reload can lead to some rather frustrating deaths. Fortunately, the Bullfrog gives you enough rounds to down multiple foes in just a single magazine. Simply hold down the trigger in close-quarter fights and watch the bullets fly. 13. MP7 Best MP7 Warzone loadout Muzzle: Monolithic Suppressor – Barrel: FSS Recon – Laser: Tac Laser – Underbarrel: Merc Foregrip – Ammunition 60 Round Mags – You will find the odd MP7 loadout here and there in Warzone and while it may not deal as much damage as the MP5, it is still a worthy choice. Unlike most guns in Modern Warfare, the MP7 delivers highly accurate hip fire, making it great for those moments when you don’t have time to ADS. Whether you’re tired of using any of the top three SMGs or just want to melt squads with the hip fire, then the MP7 is a great choice. 12. Owen Gun Best Owen Gun Warzone loadout Muzzle: Recoil Booster – Barrel: Gawain 188mm Shrouded – Optic: Slate Reflector – Stock: Removed Stock – Underbarrel: M1941 Hand Stop – Magazine: 7.62 Gorenko 72 Round Drums – Ammunition: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Fabric Grip – Perk1: Acrobatic – Perk2: Quick – The Owen Gun used to be an absolute meta melter, but now the SMG is no longer a top pick in Warzone Season 5 Reloaded. This lethal Vanguard SMG may not have the fastest fire rate, but its reliable TTK and effectiveness at both short to medium range make it the perfect pick on Caldera, Rebirth, and Fortune’s Keep. 11. Milano 821 Best Milano Warzone loadout Muzzle: Agency Suppressor – Optic: Microflex LED – Stock: Marathon Stock – Underbarrel: Bruiser Grip – Ammunition: 45 Rnd Drum – Top Warzone players like Aydan showcased just how deadly this pint-sized SMG can be and despite the odd nerf it’s still pretty good. Not only are there several builds that favor close-quarter engagements, but there are several loadouts that also dish out great damage in mid-range firefights. This makes the Italian SMG more versatile than most weapons in its class. 10. Welgun Best Welgun Warzone loadout Muzzle: Recoil Booster – Barrel: 320mm SA Shrouded – Optic: Slate Reflector – Stock: Removed Stock – Underbarrel: M1941 Hand Stop – Magazine: 7.62 Gorenko 40 Round Drums – Ammunition: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Polymer Grip – Perk1: Acrobatic – Perk2: Quick – Since arriving in the Warzone Pacific Season 1 Reloaded update, the Welgun has been a popular pick that does devastating damage to foes at close quarters. It’s well worth experimenting with this fast-firing weapon and allocating it to one of your loadout slots to see if it can still do the business for you. The loadout above focuses on maximizing the Welgun’s TTK without sacrificing too much mobility, allowing you to outmaneuver your opponents. 9. MP5 (Modern Warfare) Best MP5 Warzone loadout Barrel: Monolithic Integral Suppressor – Laser: 5mW Laser – Stock: FTAC Collapsible – Underbarrel: Merc Foregrip – Ammunition: 45 Round Mags – It should come as no surprise that the MP5 is one of the top picks. In fact, this snappy SMG has remained popular since Warzone’s launch. Its high fire rate and incredible damage make it a great choice for close-quarters firefights. This loadout is one the fastest in the entire game, allowing players to quickly sweep corners and flush out any pesky campers. Consider using this loadout to supplement your favorite Assault Rifle class to ensure you’re dealing as much damage as possible. 8. Cold War MP5 Best Cold War MP5 loadout Muzzle: Agency Suppressor – Laser: Tiger Team Spotlight – Stock: Raider Stock – Underbarrel: Brusier Grip – Ammunition: STANAG 50 Rnd – The Cold War MP5 plays very similarly to its Modern Warfare counterpart. However, it does come packed with a higher rate of fire, meaning you can absolutely melt foes in close-quarter firefights. This current build is purely focused on making the MP5 as quick and reactive as possible. After all, mobility is imperative in Warzone, particularly when you wish to aggressively rush your foes and eliminate them in late-game rounds. 7. PPSh-41 (Vanguard) Best PPSh-41 Warzone loadout Muzzle: Recoil Booster – Barrel: Kovalevskaya 230mm B03P – Optic: Slate Reflector – Stock: Removed Stock – Underbarrel: Carver Foregrip – Magazine: 7.62mm Gorenko 71 Round Mags – Ammo Type: Hollow Point – Rear Grip: Pine Tar Grip – Perk1: Tight Grip – Perk2: Quick – The PPSh-41 SMG is perfect for aggressive players who prefer a run-and-gun playstyle. The main strength of this weapon lies in its insanely fast fire rate, which allows players to down enemies extremely quickly in close-range engagements. As a result, this loadout aims to focus on further improving this weapon’s mobility and fire rate. 6. CX-9 Best CX-9 Warzone loadout Muzzle: Monolithic Suppressor – Underbarrel: Commando Foregrip – Stock: CX-FR – Perk: Sleight of Hand – Ammunition: 50 Rnd Drum – This punchy SMG offers great mobility, lightning-fast fire rate, fantastic close-quarters damage, and an insanely quick reload. The CX-9 was originally meant to be released in Modern Warfare, but the gun was never officially added to the game until later on. While the CX-9 may not be as competitive as the MP40 and Armaguerra, this punchy SMG is great fun to use. In fact, several streamers like FaZe Swagg have demonstrated just how deadly it can be when kitted out with the best attachments. 5. Type 100 Best Type 100 Warzone loadout Muzzle: Recoil Booster – Barrel: Warubachi 134mm Rapid – Optic: Slate Reflector – Stock: Warubachi Grip Folding – Underbarrel: M1941 Hand Stop – Magazine: 30 Russian Short 36 Round Mags – Ammo Type: Hollow Point – Rear Grip: Polymer Grip – Perk1: Acrobatic – Perk2: Quick – The Type 100 is an SMG that boasts a rapid-fire rate resulting in a quick time to kill and is finally getting the attention it deserves in Season 5 Reloaded. If you wish to increase this weapon’s potential further, the loadout listed above does a perfect job of increasing range, accuracy, and damage. 4. MP40 Best MP40 Warzone loadout Muzzle: Recoil Booster – Barrel: VDD 189mm Short – Optic: Slate Reflector – Stock: Krausnick 33M Folding – Underbarrel:M1941 Hand Stop – Magazine: 7.62 Gorenko 45 Round Mags – Ammo Type: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Polymer Grip – Perk 1: Brace – Perk 2: Quick – Since the Pacific update, the MP40 has risen through the ranks, cementing itself as one of the best SMGs in Warzone’s current meta. The gun offers a great TTK as well as exceptional mobility, which are all characteristics of an effective SMG in CoD Warzone. The loadout listed above is essential as it increases this weapon’s fire rate, aids in recoil, and further boosts its mobility. If you’ve been looking for a solid all-rounded SMG to use in Warzone, then look no further than the MP40. 3. H4 Blixen Best H4 Blixen Warzone Loadout Muzzle: Recoil Booster – Barrel:Bergström 17″ F3 – Optic: Slate Reflector – Stock: Removed Stock – Underbarrel:SG98 Compact – Magazine: 7.62 Gorenko 54 Round Mags – Rear Grip: Taped Grip – Ammunition: Lengthened – Perk 1: Fleet – Perk 2: Quick – Since arriving in the Season 3 Reloaded patch, the H4 Blixen has been a popular pick in Warzone’s SMG category. While it also got hit with nerfs in Season 4 Reloaded, it’s overtaken the PPSh-41 in terms of pick rate and stolen the third spot on our list thanks to its overwhelming power in close-quarter gunfights. With impressive accuracy and reliable damage, the H4 Blixen has quickly established itself as a strong choice on Caldera and Fortune’s Keep, especially when used alongside the Cooper Carbine or the STG44. The build above maximizes the SMG’s damage but also maintains a huge amount of mobility, allowing you to outmaneuver your opponents. 2. Marco 5 Best Marco 5 Warzone loadout Muzzle: F8 Stabilizer – Barrel: Imerito 342mm 04P – Optic: Slate Reflector – Stock: Perfetto Esatta – Underbarrel: Mark VI Skeletal – Magazine: 8mm Nambu 64 Round Drums – Ammo Type: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Taped grip – Perk 1: Frenzy – Perk 2: Quick – The Marco 5 has secured the second spot despite being hit with a set of nerfs in Warzone Pacific Season 4 Reloaded. Despite this, it’s still an immensely powerful pick and the build above enables players to greatly enhance mobility – allowing you to effortlessly run rings around your foes. However, it’s not just the Marco 5’s incredible speed that makes it potent, the gun also delivers huge amounts of damage. 1. Armaguerra 43 Best Armaguerra 43 Warzone loadout Muzzle: Recoil Booster – Barrel:Imerito 550mm 03P – Optic: Slate Reflector – Stock: Botti DA – Underbarrel:M1941 Hand Stop – Magazine: 9mm 60 Round Mags – Ammo Type: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Polymer Grip – Perk: Hardscope – Perk2: Quick – The Armaguerra 43 has had a significant impact on the meta and even though it dropped off for a while, the king has returned to reclaim its throne as the ruler of the lands. As you would expect, our loadout above focuses on maximizing the gun’s damage and providing plenty of ammunition to gun down multiple foes – which it inevitably will do with very little fuss. So, there you have it, the best SMGs in Warzone ranked. We’ll be updating this list over time, so be sure to check back here for all the latest updates. If you’re looking for more of the best Warzone loadouts and tips? Check out our list of guides below: C58 | Grau 5.56 | Kilo 141 | Krig 6 | CR-56 AMAX | FFAR 1 | Mac 10 | MP5 | Kar98k | HDR | Best controller settings | Top 10 best class setups and loadouts | Best streamer loadouts | Most popular Warzone weapons| Best Sniper Rifles | All Warzone bunker codes | Mac-10 loadout | FFAR Warzone class | Best Warzone Weapons | Bren Loadout | Cooper Carbine Loadout If you click on a product link on this page we may earn a small affiliate commission.

Best Warzone SMG loadouts in Season 5 Reloaded ActivisionWhen it comes to close-range duels, SMGs dominate Warzone’s meta. For this reason, using a powerful submachine gun equipped with the best loadout possible is a must to win more games. While assault rifles and LMGs are great options for long-range gunfights, SMGs are far superior up close. Not only do they kill faster, but they also offer better mobility and handling for getting the jump on enemy players. Both MW3 and Warzone provide plenty of SMGs to choose from, but it can be hard to figure out which are the best. This is especially true with all the buffs and nerfs in Season 5 Reloaded that saw the meta shift yet again. Using a weak SMG will leave you outgunned by others with faster TTKs, better handling, and less recoil. In contrast, the best SMG loadouts will help you rack up kills with ease and win more Warzone matches. Best SMG loadouts These are the five best SMG loadouts to run in Season 5 Reloaded to make sure that you are using the strongest builds possible: 1. Static-HV Best Static-HV Warzone Loadout Muzzle: Quartermaster Suppressor – Barrel: Garrote-8 Long Barrel – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Stock: Spry 34 Light Stock – Underbarrel: DR-6 Handstop – After dominating the first half of Season 5, the Static-HV was given several nerfs targeted at its damage output. These have weakened the meta SMG, but it started in such a strong position that it is still the best option even after the changes. Its TTK is no longer anything special, but this gun offers plenty to make up for that, including swift handling, great bullet velocity, high range, and a fast reload. 2. Striker Best Striker Warzone Loadout Muzzle: Quartermaster Suppressor – Barrel: Striker Recon Long Barrel – Underbarrel: Paracord Grip – Ammunition: .45 Auto High Grain Rounds – Magazine: 48 Round Mag – Season 5 Reloaded’s buffs have transformed the Striker into a true meta contender. It was already a strong option, but a big boost to its damage ranges means it is now the most versatile SMG in the game. It offers great recoil control, incredible range, as well as solid mobility and handling. There’s nothing this gun can’t do, so it’s no surprise it’s quickly become one of Warzone’s most popular guns. 3. Superi 46 Best Superi 46 Warzone Loadout Muzzle: Quartermaster Suppressor – Barrel: Lux 30 Heavy Barrel – Stock: Rescue-9 Stock – Underbarrel: DR-6 Handstop – Magazine: 40 Round Mag – The Superi 46 has yet again avoided nerfs in Season 5 Reloaded, maintaining its incredible mobility. This SMG is perfect for rushing around the map and pushing other teams, making it a great option for high-skill players trying to rack up kills. This gun doesn’t offer quite the same effective range as some other entries on this list, but it remains a top option for close-quarters gunfights. 4. WSP-9 Best WSP-9 Warzone Loadout Muzzle: Quartermaster Suppressor – Barrel: WSP Reckless-90 Long Barrel – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Underbarrel: Paracord Grip – Magazine: 50 Round Mag – The WSP-9 isn’t the most lethal weapon up close, but its excellent damage range makes it one of the best SMG-AR hybrids in Warzone. Its impressive versatility ensures that it is a good pick regardless of your preferred map or mode. This rendition of the Uzi is also an excellent sniper support weapon, with it excelling when partnered with the Kar98k, KATT-AMR, or MORS. 5. FJX Horus Best FJX Horus Warzone Loadout Muzzle: Quartermaster Suppressor – Barrel: Syn9 Long Barrel – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Stock: Ripper Light Stock – Magazine: 60 Round Drum – The FJX Horus received the largest buff of any weapon back in Season 4, having both its damage range and damage multipliers increased across the board. These changes hastened its TTK and made it incredibly strong up close. In Season 5 Reloaded, it remains a good option, but changes in the meta and the arrival of the Static-HV have seen this SMG’s popularity decline. All Warzone SMGs ranked There are currently 23 SMGs in Warzone, with the latest addition being the Static-HV, which has quickly established itself as one of the best close-range weapons in Season 5 Reloaded, even after its nerfs. Here’s every SMG ranked from best to worst, with these rankings assuming you use the best loadout possible for each weapon: Static-HV – Striker – Superi 46 – WSP-9 – FJX Horus – Lachmann Shroud – Striker 9 – WSP Swarm – RAM-9 – AMR9 – HRM-9 – Vaznev-9K – MX9 – Fennec 45 – Rival-9 – BAS-P – Lachmann Sub – VEL 46 – FSS Hurricane – PDSW 528 – ISO 9MM – ISO 45 – Minibak – Looking for a gun to partner with your SMG loadout? Check out the best one-shot snipers and which weapons are most popular right now. You’ll also want to make sure that you’re using the best console settings or PC settings, as well as optimized controller settings to get the smoothest experience possible.

Best Warzone shotguns and loadouts to use for them ActivisionCoD Warzone’s Shotgun loadouts are some of the most brutal to use in the game, they’re game-winners, and they’re guaranteed to help you get more kills. With the Warzone meta continuously evolving, we’ve seen several weapons become “must-haves” in the Call of Duty battle royale. Shotguns have had their time in the spotlight, dominating various seasons throughout the game’s duration and even today the close-range weapons are still a force to be reckoned with if you’ve got the right loadout. Whether you’re still uninitiated to the Shotgun club, or looking to see what your other options are, they’re all pretty solid. Let’s take a look at which Shotgun loadouts are best and how they pair with the strongest Assault Rifles as this combination will make you lethal across all ranges and gunfights. 6. Streetsweeper Best Streetsweeper loadout in Warzone Muzzle: Agency Choke – Barrel: 14.4” Task Force – Laser: SWAT 5mw Laser Sight – Stock: Marathon Stock – Ammunition: STANAG 18 RND – At one time in Warzone, the Streetsweeper was an absolute howitzer of a weapon that would simply destroy an opponent if they got too close. The key feature of the Streetsweeper is that it’s a full-auto Shotgun. This means you can just hold down the trigger and pump shell after shell in no time at all. Obviously, this comes at a cost, as you’ll definitely want to add a bigger magazine attachment to reduce the gun’s pretty severe reload speeds. That’s not to say it’s not a viable option as with the right setup this Shotgun is still a worthy addition to any good loadout. 5. Origin 12 Best Origin 12 loadout in Warzone Muzzle: Choke – Barrel: FORCE Tac Impaler – Laser: 5mW Laser – Stock: No Stock – Ammunition: 12 Round Mags – If you’re looking for a non-Dragon’s Breath ammo shotgun, this Origin loadout is still a pretty good one to go for. It’s got a great amount of damage behind it and can easily take enemies out in 3-4 shots, just simply aim straight and spam the trigger. It was nerfed as time went on but that shouldn’t deter you if you’re looking for something different to try. If you’re looking for a standard Shotgun without a fiery flair, you can’t look past the Origin on your way to some huge Warzone victories. 4. Best R9-0 loadout in Warzone Best R9-0 loadout in Warzone Muzzle: Choke – Barrel: FORGE TAC Sentry – Laser: 5mW Laser – Underbarrel: Merc Foregrip – Ammunition: Dragon’s Breath Rounds – The R9-0 was arguably the most effective shotgun in Warzone for a long time and it packs one hell of a punch and comes with an extremely fast fire rate. However, one of its strongest features comes through as an ammo attachment. Dragon’s Breath Rounds deal more damage than the usual ammunition, lighting enemies on fire and causing a burn effect over time. Despite heavy nerfs, it’s still a great go-to option when it comes to Shotgun loadouts. 3. JAK-12 Best JAK-12 Warzone loadout Muzzle: FORGE TAC Marauder – Barrel: ZLR J-3600 TORRENT – Laser: 5mW Laser – Underbarrel: Merc Foregrip – Ammunition: 8-R Dragon’s Breath – The infamous AA-12 dominated players back in Modern Warfare 2, so it makes sense that this iconic Shotgun is a decent pick in Warzone. After all, having a shotgun with decent range is always going to be a bonus for any player looking to increase their kill potential. This punchy loadout is all about maxing out the Shotgun’s range, allowing you to take out squads outside of traditional close-quarter fights. The fully-automatic shots will also enable you to quickly shred through even the tankiest foes. 2. Gallo SA12 Best Gallo SA12 loadout for Warzone Barrel: 21.4” Reinforced Heavy – Muzzle: Duckbill Choke – Body: SWAT 5MW Laser Sight – Magazine: STANAG 12 Round Tube – Stock: Wire Stock – If played much of Black Ops Cold War at all, you’ll know that its Shotgun options weren’t quite as powerful or varied as the original Modern Warfare selections. However, it is still worth your time to level up the Gallo SA12 in Cold War because of the Warzone integration. It’s undeniably one of the stronger options in the battle royale today, the clear frontrunner, for now, providing one of the most well-rounded options in the Shotgun category. 1. Model 680 Best Model 680 Warzone loadout Muzzle: FORGE TAC Marauder – Barrel: XRK 30.0″ Sport – Laser: 5mW Laser – Stock: No Stock – Ammunition: Dragon’s Breath Rounds – The pump-action nature of the Model 680 and its avoidance of nerfs over the last few years have secretly made it the best Shotgun option to use and one of the best weapons in CoD Warzone. If you do wish to give this Shotgun a go, then you’ll absolutely want to utilize this loadout as it’ll turn it into an undisputed beast. Not only does it bolster your movement speed, but it also increases the gun’s damage range and overall effectiveness – making it the best Shotgun in Warzone. So there you have it, our top recommendations for Shotguns in Warzone. With these extremely powerful setups, you’ll be dropping foes in the blink of an eye at close range. Also, check out the most popular ones that you can currently equip in the game.

Best Warzone settings on PC to increase FPS ActivisionOne thing that can give you a big advantage Warzone multiplayer is having the best possible graphics settings for FPS. If you’re still grinding the original Warzone, these are the best PC settings to use to increase FPS in Warzone. If you’re looking for the best PC settings to use in Warzone 2, we have a separate guide for that, as there are some new settings to look out for too. Performances issues can, unfortunately, be common with action-packed shooters, even when using a high-spec computer – and there’s nothing more frustrating than losing a gunfight over a drop in frames. FPS drops in particular are a PC player’s worst nightmare they’re immersed in a fast-paced title like the Call of Duty Battle Royale. Running the optimal settings, however, can often alleviate any issues and have your game up and running smoothly after just a few small changes. Here are the best settings to get Warzone running with higher FPS. See the latest Call of Duty deals here. Contents Best Warzone Settings for better FPS on PC For starters, it’s key you have the latest graphics card driver installed on your PC. This is a tip that’s mentioned over and over again, but you’d be surprised how much of a difference updating your drivers can have. Updating graphics drivers for the best FPS in Warzone Whether your PC has an AMD or NVIDIA card, it’s relatively easy to make sure everything is up to date. To do this, follow these steps: Updating your AMD driver Right-click on your desktop. – Select ‘AMD Radeon Settings‘. – From here, click ‘Home‘. – At the bottom left, you’ll see ‘New Updates‘. Click that. – Select the ‘check for update‘ option. – Continue to follow the information displayed on your screen to download the update. – Updating your NVIDIA driver Open the GeForce Experience. You can download it here. – At the top left of the application, click the ‘Drivers‘ button. – Towards the top right of the tab, you’ll see ‘Check for Updates‘. Click that. – You may also see that a driver is already listed for download. If that’s the case, click ‘Express Installation‘. – A window will probably pop up asking if you’d like to proceed. Click ‘Allow‘. – The update will now install, and you’re ready to go! – NVIDIA DLSS in Warzone The must-have DLSS setting made its way into Warzone during Season 3 Reloaded. If you own an NVIDIA RTX graphics card, you can get some of the best performance out of your game to help land those kills. With DLSS, ‘Ultra Performance’ is your go-to choice if you want to sacrifice as much visual fidelity as possible for those boosts in in-game stability. Let’s check out the best in-game settings you should be running in Warzone to maximize your FPS: As well as the above settings, you can also further improve your FPS by making changes to the following graphical settings below, which are known to be really taxing on your machine. Using all of the settings listed above will help alleviate any drops in frames, and your game will run as smooth as butter. Of course, the Caldera landscape will certainly not look as pretty as it did before, but a consistent framerate is guaranteed to improve your gameplay experience. There you have it, that’s everything you need to know about how to get the best Warzone settings for FPS on PC. Make sure to check out our other Warzone guides below, and head over to our Call of Duty page for all the latest updates. Best Warzone controller settings | How to fix Warzone server disconnect error | The best Warzone loadouts | The most popular Warzone weapons | Warzone best Assault Rifles | The best Fennec loadout for Warzone | The best Mac-10 loadout | The best STG44 Warzone loadout | The best Type 100 Warzone loadout

Best Warzone SA87 class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Setup Treyarch/ActivisionThe SA87 is one of the strongest LMGs in Warzone, so here’s a loadout that maximizes the gun’s damage and makes it effective in medium to long-range gunfights. When it comes to building the perfect Warzone loadout, the majority of players opt to use an AR or an SMG. While there’s plenty of effective and powerful guns in these categories, there’s one LMG that deserves to be used a lot more in the current meta, and that’s the SA87. Despite being labeled the most underrated weapon in Warzone by JGOD, there’s still a lot of players that are yet to give the gun a try. Its impressive TTK and magazine size make it a solid choice on Verdansk, and with a steady recoil pattern, it’s relatively easy to control. In order to help you get the most out of the SA87, we’ve put together the best loadout that you can use to get the upper hand over your opponents. Best SA87 loadout in Warzone Attachments Muzzle: Monolithic Suppressor – Laser: Tac Laser – Stock: FORGE TAC CQB Comb – Underbarrel: Commando Foregrip – Ammunition: 50 Rounds Mag – Perks E.O.D – Overkill – Amped – Equipment Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Heartbeat – Secondary: MAC-10 – For starters, you’ll want to equip the Monolithic Suppressor to increase the SA87’s bullet velocity and damage range. On top of this, the attachments prevent your gun from showing up on the radar, which is essential in the final stages of a match. Next, make sure you go for the Tac Laser and the FORGE TAC CQB Comb as both of these attachments significantly decrease the gun’s ADS time. This means you’re more likely to get the first shot off on your opponents and give yourself a better chance of coming out on top. After that, it’s important that you run the Commando Foregrip as it helps to control the SA87’s recoil and makes it a laser beam at medium to long-range. Finally, take the 50 Rounds Mag in the ammunition slot to ensure you never run out of bullets and can take out a whole squad in a single clip. Keep in mind, the SA87 doesn’t perform very well in close-range engagements, so it’s recommended you take an SMG alongside it so you’re ready for any encounter. So, there you have it, that’s the best SA87 loadout in Warzone’s current meta. Don’t forget to check out our Call of Duty homepage for all the latest news, guides, and leaks.

Best Warzone QBZ-83 class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Setup Treyarch/ActivisionThe QBZ-83 isn’t the most popular weapon in Warzone, but with the correct attachments, it can be a deadly weapon with a lethal TTK. Warzone’s Season 4 Reloaded patch introduced a series of buffs & nerfs to a variety of weapons, completely shaking up the game’s meta. While the FARA 83, Krig 6, and C58 are considered the best ARs in Warzone, the update has allowed a lot of previously forgotten guns to make a resurgence. One of which is the QBZ-83, a weapon that JGOD even included in his top 10 loadouts following the latest patch. In order to help you get the most out of the QBZ-83, we’ve put together the best loadout that you can use to get the upper hand over your opponents. Best QBZ-83 loadout for Warzone Attachments Muzzle: Agency Suppressor – Barrel: 13.7″ Ultralight – Stock: SAS Combat Stock – Rear Grip: Serpent Grip – Ammunition: 45 Rnd Drum – Perks Perk 1: EOD – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Equipment Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Heartbeat Sensor – First up you’ll want to equip the Agency Suppressor to aid the weapon’s vertical recoil as well as keep your gunfire off enemy radars. While this isn’t very important in Cold War Multiplayer, staying off the map in Warzone is extremely important. Next, you’ll want to improve the QBZ-83’s Strafe Speed even further with the 13.7″ Ultralight barrel. The gun’s strength has always been its mobility, so increasing it further makes you incredibly difficult to pin down in gunfights. After that, it’s key you attach the Serpent Grip for increased speed while shooting and the SAS Combat Stock to decrease your ADS time. Finally, round off the loadout with the 45 Rnd Drum to ensure you never run out of bullets and can take out multiple opponents in a single mag. How to unlock the QBZ-83 in Warzone Luckily, the QBZ-83 is incredibly easy to unlock and doesn’t require you to complete any difficult challenges. All you have to do is reach level 31 in-game which won’t take you too long to achieve. If you want to speed up the process, hop into Plunder or head into Cold War multiplayer. So, there you have it, that’s the best QBZ-83 loadout in Warzone’s current meta. Don’t forget to check out our Call of Duty homepage for all the latest news, guides, and leaks.

Best PPSh Warzone class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Setup Activision/TreyarchThe PPSh is a great SMG pick in Warzone Season 5, so find out which attachments you should be using to increase your kills in Verdansk. While Warzone’s Season 5 Reloaded update brought with it the four new weapons, additional Operators, and exciting modes – many CoD fans will still be looking for the best PPSh loadout to use. This iconic WWII is a great close-quarters choice, especially when it’s kitted out with the correct attachments. In fact, the PPSh comes packed with a lightning-fast rate of fire and decent clip size, making it one of the game’s most powerful SMGs to use. With Call of Duty: Vanguard on the horizon, the PPSh is one SMG that you’ll want to get accustomed to. Contents Best PPSh loadout for Warzone – Best PPSh setup (Perks & equipment) – How to unlock the PPSh in Warzone – Alternative PPSh loadout – Best PPSh loadout for Warzone Attachments Muzzle: GRU Suppressor – Barrel: 15.7″ Task Force – Laser: Tiger Team Spotlight – Stock: Spetsnaz PKM Stock – Ammunition: 55 Rnd Drum – The PPSh’s vertical recoil can make this SMG pretty unwieldy. As a result, our build isn’t here to try and minimize recoil – instead, it’s best to lean into the innate flaws of the gun and buff its close-range potential. Therefore, we’ve gone with the GRU Suppressor and the 15.7″ Task Force barrel to boost Bullet Velocity and Maximum Range as much as possible. This will have you beaming down targets quicker than any other possible PPSh setup. Read More: Best OTs 9 Warzone class loadout – Meanwhile, the Tiger Team Spotlight and Spetsnaz PKM Stock will speed up your movement speed, ADS strafe speed, and shooting movement speed – meaning you’ll be able to remain highly mobile without having to sacrifice any kill potential. This is a great attachment for those that enjoy aggressively pushing their foes or going for those sneaky flanks. Lastly, the 55 Rnd Drum gives you plenty of ammunition to gun down multiple foes without having to constantly reload. The PPSh can quickly chew through rounds thanks to its high rate of fire, so having a decent mag size is a must for any kill-hungry player. Best PPSh setup (Perks & equipment) Perk 1: E.O.D. – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Secondary: CR-56 AMAX – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Heartbeat Sensor – Just like most meta Warzone loadouts in Season 4, our PPSh class utilizes both EOD and Amped. Not only does this EOD help keep you safe from any explosive blasts, but Amped also enables you to quickly swap to your secondary weapon. After all, reloading mid-fight can often lead to some incredibly frustrating deaths. Meanwhile, the Overkill perk enables the use of the extremely deadly Krig 6 loadout, which still remains one of the best Assault Rifles in Warzone Season 5. While Overkill keeps you competitive across all engagement ranges, you’ll still want to pick up Ghost as soon as you can. Lastly, both the Semtex and Heartbeat Sensor help track down nearby enemies and flush out pesky campers. Simply locate your target, throw in a Semtex, and rush in with your PPSh to claim another kill for your prize. How to unlock the PPSh in Warzone The PPSh is unlocked by getting 3 kills immediately after sprinting in 15 different matches, using SMGs. We recommend playing Rebirth Island or heading over to multiplayer as the smaller maps will make getting SMG kills easier. Read More: Best Warzone weapons – Of course, now you’ve got the weapon, you’ll need to kit it out with the best PPSh attachments to push it to its limits. Fortunately, the PPSh loadout above will send your enemies back to the Gulag. Alternative PPSh loadout If you’re looking for an alternative loadout to the PPSh, check out our best Bullfrog Warzone loadout. This pint-sized SMG has dominated the competition since its release thanks to its high rate of fire, minimal recoil, incredible hipfire accuracy, and ludicrous close-quarters damage. Read More: Best Stoner 63 Warzone class loadout – Unlike the PPSh, the Bullfrog comes packed with a huge magazine and is even capable of killing enemies outside of close-quarter scenarios. This makes it extremely useful when you find yourself needing to take down multiple foes. Looking for more of the best Warzone loadouts and tips? Check out our list of guides below: C58 | Grau 5.56 | Kilo 141 | Krig 6 | CR-56 AMAX | FFAR 1 | Mac 10 | MP5 | Kar98k | HDR | Best controller settings | Top 10 best class setups and loadouts | Top highest-earning Warzone players

Best Warzone players of 2021: Top 5 ranked Activision / DiazBiffle / 100 Thieves / ANDBOXIn Call of Duty: Warzone’s second year, competition hit new levels. A new top earner was crowned, tournaments shifted to Customs, and we got the first taste of LAN. Emerging from it all, here are the five best players of 2021. There’s no easy, uniform way to define talent and success in the Warzone scene. The shift to Customs did raise the level of competition, but it simultaneously removed our ability to track player statistics. So we’re left with two principal metrics of judgment: Tournament placement and the eye test. The former correlates directly with prize money and clutch factor, the latter with raw mechanical skill. A new map, players crossing the $300,000 earnings threshold, and a glimpse at LAN – Warzone’s second year was a big one. And, amidst a number of perfectly reasonable candidates for the top five, these pros were undeniable. You can also check out our rankings for the best League of Legends players, best Call of Duty players, and best Valorant players here. 5. Almond This @Almxnd_ sequence is ridiculous 😵💫pic.twitter.com/B57pfQv1BJ — Dexerto Esports (@DexertoEsports) December 21, 2021 A mix of talent and game sense, Almond posted an exceptional year. Tommey’s duo and the third prong of the TBE trident, Almond earned a whopping $241,507 across 79 tournaments he placed in the money for in 2021 (second-highest earned on the year). Placing first in countless events, none could be bigger than the Baka WonderLAN. In Warzone’s first-ever LAN, Almond and Tommey proved their individual prowess and, more importantly, indisputable synergy. 4. Newbz If Almond earned more money than Newbz, why isn’t he higher? And the answer is adaptability. While the TBE Trio won countless events, Newbz was left as the lone man out for Duos and, instead, built chemistry with HusKerrs. And that chemistry, while shaky at times, culminated in a World Series of Warzone Duos championship and a number of other event wins. The $197,735 earned (fourth-highest) is nice, but Newbz’s ability to take gold with different teammates is practically unprecedented. 3. DiazBiffle Grand Finale, $100K on the line, and @DiazBiffle wins the 1v2 vs Tommey and Almond 🤯 Fitting finish for the #BakaWonderLAN to end with a Baka clutching up. pic.twitter.com/usactxxmc1 — Dexerto Esports (@DexertoEsports) December 18, 2021 One could easily argue that Biffle shouldn’t be in the top five simply because he was the ninth-highest earner in 2021. But, while every other member of this five placed in 70-plus events, Biff placed in just 31. And, when he did place in the money, he showed out – first-place finishes galore, second place on LAN, and outrageous clips and stats along the way. Biff’s average earnings per tournament that he placed in were $5,064, nearly $2,000 more than the second-highest on this list. If you ask any Warzone streamer who the most talented player in the world is, D’s name will be under consideration. When he’s on, his ceiling than anyone else in the game. Eye test, average placement, average earnings – you can’t have a top-five without the kid. 2. Aydan The former top all-time earner in Warzone, Aydan didn’t give up his mantle easily. With the third-most earnings in 2021, he won prestigious events like ZLaners Banger, the World Series of Warzone Trios, and the Dallas Empire Challenge. Ego-challing like this in customs?!@aydan got twisted as he, @Rated_COD, and @zSmitOfficial came back to win eFuse’s $10K 💸 pic.twitter.com/NE8uGDAhOb — Dexerto Esports (@DexertoEsports) July 16, 2021 Mechanically, it’s got to be a contest between Aydan or Biffle. Both are literal G-FUEL demons who probably slide-canceled their ways out of the womb. But, despite some inconsistencies, Aydan plays a lot, wins a lot, and was about one bullet away from winning the WSOW Solos – which would have catapulted him to No. 1. Tommey At this point, Tommey has a serious case for the greatest IGL (in-game leader) in Call of Duty history. The guy thinks as straight as he shoots and has more composure in one eyebrow than most CoD players could dream of. The new highest earner in CoD history, Tommey (alongside Almond) is undefeated on the new Caldera map and won the first-ever Warzone LAN. While he still needs to win a WSOW, the former CoD pro raised the bar in 2021 and deserves the top spot. Be sure to check out the rest of Dexerto’s Best of 2021 series, for the best players, influencers and games of the year.

Best Warzone One-Shot Sniper Rifle loadouts ActivisionSniping in Warzone has always been an integral part of Call of Duty’s battle royale, but not every sniper rifle is worth your time. This is why you need to know which are the best one-shot snipers to use in Season 5 Reloaded. Back in the original Warzone, sniping was incredibly strong, with powerhouses like the Kar98k and 3-Line Rifle running the show. This led to Warzone 2 heavily nerfing them, leaving the marksman weapons entirely out of the meta. However, the arrival of Urzikstan saw snipers gain popularity once again, with there now being several worth using. This has continued into the current season, where multiple snipers are absolute meta, with their power even proving controversial at times. The community’s calls for nerfs are unlikely to stop anytime soon, but until they arrive, you’ll want to be using snipers to win more games and secure more kills. Best One-Shot Sniper Rifle loadouts These are the five best sniper rifle loadouts to use in Warzone Season 5 Reloaded to rack up one-shot kills with ease: 1. Kar98k Best Kar98k Warzone Loadout Muzzle: Sonic Suppressor L – Barrel: Prazisionsgewehr 762 Long Barrel – Laser: SL Razorhawk Laser Light – Optic: Range Caller v3.4 Optic – Ammunition: 7.92x57mm High Grain Rounds – The Kar98k was targeted by a series of nerfs after it dominated everything on arrival. These nerfs have made it less powerful, but it can still one-shot down enemies up to 75 meters, while also offering an extremely fast ADS speed. That alone ensures that this classic weapon is still the best sniper rifle in Season 5 Reloaded, and that looks unlikely to change anytime soon. 2. KATT-AMR Best KATT-AMR Warzone Loadout Muzzle: Sonic Suppressor XL – Barrel: Zang-34 Barrel – Stock: Tactical Stock Pad – Ammunition: .50 Cal High Velocity – Bolt: Ephemeral Quickbolt – The KATT-AMR is the only Sniper Rifle capable of one-shot kills at any range without the need for specific attachments. It boasts incredible damage and bullet velocity but has slow handling stats compared to the other meta options. Thankfully, this can be mitigated by playing smart and controlling high ground, taking advantage of the KATT-AMR’s high bullet velocity and unlimited range. 3. MORS Best MORS Warzone Loadout Barrel: Tonne Heavy Barrel – Laser: SL Razorhawk Laser Light – Stock: Icarus Light Stock – Ammunition: HVP Anti-Materiel Slug – Bolt: Quick Bolt – It’s only natural that a railgun would be capable of one-shot downs, and the MORS doesn’t disappoint. This loadout can take out enemies at any distance with the HVP Anti-Material Slug rounds, but there is a catch. The MORS’ slow fire rate makes missed shots particularly punishing, so only skilled players should use this gun instead of the higher-ranked entries on this list. 4. XRK Stalker Best XRK Stalker Warzone Loadout Muzzle: Sonic Suppressor XL – Barrel: Fission 60 Barrel – Laser: SL Razorhawk Laser Light – Ammunition: .50 Cal High Grain Rounds – Bolt: XRK Stalker Light Bolt – The XRK Stalker has been able to one-shot down enemies since it was buffed back in Season 2, and it retains that ability to this day. This sniper handles faster than most of its competitors, making it a strong option for aggressive sniping. The catch is that its maximum one-shot range is capped at 75 meters, so there’s not much reason to use this over the superior Kar98k. 5. MCPR-300 Best MCPR-300 Warzone Loadout Muzzle: Sonic Suppressor L – Barrel: 22″ OMX-456 – Laser: SL Razorhawk Laser Light – Ammunition: .300 Mag Explosive – Bolt: Cronen Smooth Bolt – The MCPR-300 remains a solid option, largely due to its high damage, which this loadout maximizes. Equip its explosive ammo, and your shots become a wrecking ball of pain for your enemies, allowing you to down them in just one shot. This rendition of the iconic Barrett. 50 cal is a good sniper that beats out every other option in MW2’s arsenal, but the newer MW3 snipers still outclass it. Best One-Shot Sniper Rifles ranked There are 7 Sniper Rifles in Warzone that can down enemy players in one shot in Season 5 Reloaded. These are a mix of MW2 and MW3 weapons, with the Kar98k being the latest addition to the lineup. Here are all 7 One-Shot Sniper Rifles ranked from best to worst, with these rankings assuming you use the best loadouts possible for each gun: Kar98k – KATT-AMR – MORS – XRK Stalker – MCPR-300 – FJX Imperium – Victus XMR – Warzone Season 5 Reloaded added a lot of new changes outside of snipers, so be sure to check out the best loadouts to use, how the Assault Rifle rankings have changed, and which SMGs are going to be your best bet to win more gunfights up close.

Best Warzone MG 82 class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Setup Activision / TreyarchThe MG 82 LMG in CoD Warzone fast is becoming a proper meta LMG once again. Here are the best Attachments and full loadout you should be using for it. Warzone’s Season 4 update in Verdansk brought with it the MG 82 LMG, and it was instantly the main meta weapon for long-range gunfights. It was promptly nerfed and was in the wilderness for quite some time. However, it has been reborn in Warzone Pacific’s Caldera, primarily thanks to nerfs to the mega-popular Bren LMG. Players have realized just how effective the MG 82 can be and it’s destined for a decent time in the spotlight. The MG 82 can easily tear enemy squads apart with the right build and we’ve put together the perfect loadout for you to use. Contents Best MG 82 loadout for Warzone – Best MG 82 class – How to unlock the MG 82 in Warzone – Alternative to the MG 82 loadout – Best MG 82 loadout for Warzone Attachments Muzzle: Agency Suppressor – Barrel: 16.4” Task Force – Optic: Axial Arms 3x – Underbarrel: Field Agent Grip – Rear Grip: Serpent Wrap – The real beauty of the MG 82 is in its ability to effortlessly beam opponents from afar with laser-like accuracy. When kitted out with the attachments above, the MG 82 is an absolute monster across all engagement ranges. First up is the Agency Suppressor and 16.4” Task Force barrel. Both these attachments increase the gun’s effective damage range, bullet velocity, vertical/horizontal recoil control, and even suppress your shots. Combine this with the MG 82’s already blisteringly fast rate of fire and you’ll be taking down multiple players before they can even react. This is made even easier when you land head and body shots using the Axial Arms 3x. However, just like all LMGs, the MG 82 does struggle on the mobility side of things. While the Serpent Wrap does help speed up the gun’s ADS, it’s often best to switch to your secondary in close-quarter situations to avoid any frustrating deaths. Lastly, the Field Agent Grip provides even more control of the weapon, helping reduce recoil and hit those all-important long-range shots. Best MG 82 class Perk 1: E.O.D. – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Secondary: MAC-10 – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Heartbeat Sensor – This MG 82 class utilizes all the same perks and equipment as our other meta Warzone loadouts. EOD and Amped are a must if you wish to reduce explosive damage and switch to your secondary quicker. Having a mobile weapon like the MAC-10 is a must, particularly given how sluggish the MG 82 can be. Once you have selected your Overkill loadout, then try to always secure Ghost on your next drop. Keeping hidden from enemy UAVs and Heartbeat Sensors is incredibly important to your survival, especially in later rounds where the ring brings everyone closer together. How to unlock the MG 82 in Warzone Firstly, you could buy a Blueprint if and when they arrive in the store. If you don’t want to spend money though, you simply have to kill 3 or more enemies without reloading across 15 different completed matches using LMGs. When it launched, the MG 82 could be unlocked by reaching Tier 15 of the Season 4 Battle Pass. Of course, that opportunity has now disappeared, so players have these two different options instead. Alternative to the MG 82 loadout The PKM and Stoner 63 are great options for those that enjoy the LMG playstyle. Both guns feature great accuracy, damage, and recoil — making them viable options in Caldera. The Stoner 63 remains a very powerful weapon in Warzone. Meanwhile, the PKM has secretly been a fan-favorite for the longest time, thanks to its overall ease of use and effectiveness, though it might not quite be as strong as the Stoner 63. If you want to keep updated with all the latest Warzone news and updates, then be sure to check out our Call of Duty page. We have lots more CoD Warzone content for you below: Best warzone settings to increase FPS on PC| Most popular Warzone weapons | Best Sniper Rifles | All Warzone bunker codes | MAC-10 loadout | Best Warzone loadouts | Top 20 highest-earning players

Best Warzone loot rotations to get more wins ActivisionWarzone has undoubtedly been a monster hit for Activision and the Call of Duty franchise, but even now players are still struggling to find the best loot rotations to maximize their chances of winning. [jwplayer Q7ySHZq9] While Black Ops Cold War might be fresh on the shelves, Warzone is still super popular. Just as many players are dropping into Verdansk as ever before, and major changes Cold War will bring to the game are highly anticipated. So, if you’re trying to figure out the best places to pick up loot and put yourself in the most advantageous positions for the long game, you’ve come to the right place, as we take into consideration potential zone pulls, best places to offer mobility and more. Hospital What you’ll find is that, most of the time, the circle pulls towards one of the four corners of the map, so there are several places for you to consider with this in mind, based on where you expect the zone to go. Dropping at Hospital places you in the middle of the lower half of the map, with a whole bunch of loot available. The buildings surrounding the main hospital will often be busy due to the sheer amounts of loot available. But you can often find a lot of mobility as well, including a helicopter, when dropping here, setting you up for the long haul. Stadium Stadium was absolutely hectic when it first opened, but now it’s a much easier place to land, and as always, offers a lot of loot. The best part about Stadium is the chance of finding a keycard to open up the loot bunkers, which will get you more than sufficiently set up for the rest of the game. Again, due to how central it is on the map, Stadium is great if the circle pulls anywhere towards the east side of the map, but it can also be used to loot up and push into Downtown, which is always a hotspot for players dropping in to the battle royale game. Prison A Prison drop will rarely be the most exciting, except for the opening few minutes which will likely be hectic. That said, the loot on offer is often ideal, and many games see the circle finish around Prison too. If you think the zone looks to be finishing in Prison, you can work your way through all the floors to amass serious amounts of loot, and if it finishes away from Prison you can easily float into the likes of Farmland and Port, which equally have good loot on offer. Quarry Quarry is always a busy spot, filled with contracts and, most importantly, loot. Offering good rotation opportunities, it’s easy enough to stock up on everything you need in Quarry before moving out to the likes of Military Base or even as far as Dam, depending on how the zone moves. Similarly, you can move out to TV Station for a more central position, which in itself is also filled with loot, to maximize your chances of staying ahead of circle rotations. Train Station Finally, Train Station is arguably the best place to drop from a pure loot perspective. There’s unprecedented amounts of loot crates, and it feels like it naturally stretches out towards Downtown, Promenade, Boneyard and Hospital, making it easy to rotate out of when the zone moves. Needless to say, if you drop at Train Station (and make it out alive), you should be more than prepared to take any gunfight and buy whatever you need from the Buy Station. They’re our top picks for the best loot rotations in Warzone, but ultimately a lot of it comes down to personal preference. That said, these spots will guarantee you some solid loot and a decent amount of cash to use, so it’s worth practicing these drops and rotations.

Best Warzone loadouts: Guns, attachments, perks, optics, more Infinity WardPlayers have quickly discovered that Call of Duty: Warzone is a very different game to Modern Warfare. Here, we break down the best guns, attachments, optics, and perks to use in Warzone S1 and beyond. Best guns to use in Warzone With Warzone’s options for Loadout Drops, players can access any of their Create-a-Class weapons in-game. This brings with a lot of freedom, but also a lot of hard decisions. You’re probably best off taking two weapons, one for close range and one for long-range. At close range, your best options are the MP7, MP5, or P90, with the latter being arguably the most underrated weapon in Warzone. At medium ranges you’ll probably looking at the M4A1, while longer ranges are dominated by the Grau 5.56 or a sniper rifle – the HDR or AX-50. Thankfully, we’ve put together specific loadout advice for a host of Warzone weapons, meaning you can improve nearly any gun in the game. We’ll continue to provide loadout advice for new weapons as they are added, as well as filling in any gaps we may have missed so far. Best loadouts in Warzone Grau 5.56 – M4A1 – RAM-7 – CR-56 AMAX – P90 – Fennec – AUG – Uzi – PP19 Bizon – MP5 – MP7 – Kilo 141 – M13 – AX-50 – HDR – FR 5.56 – Kar98k – FAL – Bruen Mk9 – FN Scar 17 – PKM – M16 – Krig 6 – AK74u – MAC-10 – DMR 14 – Diamatti – XM4 – Groza – Best gun-type loadouts Below, we’ve created guides that cater to specific categories of guns and the loadouts you should be using for each weapon of the type. Best Warzone shotguns, loadouts – Best Warzone Sniper Rifles and loadouts – Best Warzone SMGs and loadouts – Best Warzone Assault Rifles and loadouts – Best attachments to use in Warzone If you’re not sure what attachments to run, there are a few that have become go-to additions for most Warzone players. Read More: Best Warzone Assault Rifles and loadouts – Top of this list is undoubtedly the Monolithic Suppressor, which features in nearly all of our recommended loadouts. Like most suppressors, this keeps you off enemy radars but, unlike most suppressors, it actually boosts your damage range, as opposed to hindering it. Also, a foregrip or heavy barrel of some kind will be incredibly useful, reducing your recoil significantly, even in long-range gunfights players find so often in Warzone. While ADS will likely be slowed, it’s generally less important than recoil control. Finally, a magazine capacity increase will probably be a good idea on most guns, to allow to spray down multiple enemies at once. Some guns, like the PP19 Bizon, don’t necessarily need this but others, like the MP5, certainly do. Best optics to use in Warzone Another attachment you should probably look to use in Warzone is an optic. This will increase your accuracy at longer ranges, particularly on weapons with less desirable iron sights. The optic you choose should relate to the range at which you’re planning to use the weapon. For example, an SMG will probably need a variant of a Reflex Sight – or no optic at all. An AR, however, could benefit an optic with a greater zoom like the Integral Hybrid. On snipers, you’re probably best off using the default sniper scopes or thermal optics. The latter can highlight enemies across the map, provided they’re not using Cold Blooded. Best perks to use in Warzone Speaking of Cold Blooded, it’s also on our list of recommended perks to run in Warzone. It will hide you from enemy thermal scopes, and prevent enemies running High Alert from being pinged when they are in your sights. The next one is Ghost, but this is a tricky one. Ghost is a perk 2, the same perk slot used by Overkill. Overkill gives players the ability to run two weapons in Warzone, so you’ll need to access two loadout drops if you want Ghost and two custom weapons. This choice is ultimately yours, however. If you’d prefer to be hidden from enemy Heartbeat Sensors and UAVs, take Ghost. If you’re confident about being challenged by enemies who know your location, take two weapons and out-gun them.

Best Warzone loadouts for Iron Trials ’84 ActivisionWarzone has many different game modes that players can drop into, but none are harder than Iron Trials ‘84. This competitive mode gives players more health creating higher TTKs. Here are the top loadouts to use while playing this mode. With Iron Trials giving players more health this means that there is a different meta than the usual BR modes. Gunfights tend to last longer meaning that players will need weapons that do some damage. Playstyle has a huge impact on which guns will work for you but one thing is certain, you must be accurate to get kills. Here are some of the best loadouts to use while taking the Iron Trials battlefield Best Iron Trials ‘84 loadouts Since gunfights will last a lot longer than usual you will definitely want weapons that can hold more than 30 bullets. Here are some loadouts that players might want to give a try in their next game. Muzzle: Agency Suppressor – Barrel: 21.8” Task Force. – Optic: Axial Arms 3x – Underbarrel: Field Agent Grip – Ammunition: 120 Round Speed Mag – The Stoner 63 is one of Warzone’s best weapons, with very little recoil and a huge ammo magazine, this gun is perfect for this mode. On top of that, the Stoner does insane damage and has great range. Another good weapon to use would be the Krig 6, as it was recently buffed. Here are the attachments to run. Muzzle: Agency Suppressor – Barrel: 19.7″ Takedown – Optic: Axial Arms 3x – Underbarrel: Field Agent Grip – Magazine: STANAG 60 Rnd – The Krig 6 is an extremely powerful AR and arguably the best in the game. With 60 bullets and basically no recoil, this shreds opponents. The last loadout to give a go is the most underrated gun in all of Warzone, the MG 82. It has the highest K/D in the game but still is Muzzle: Agency Suppressor – Barrel: 16.4” Task Force – Optic: Axial Arms 3x – Underbarrel: Field Agent Grip – Rear Grip: Serpent Wrap – The MG 82 already has a lot of bullets so there is no need to use a different magazine. This setup will give it minimal recoil and will kill in 7-10 bullets which pair well with its fire rate. For all loadouts we recommend running these Perks and Equipment for all of your classes as it will help a lot. Perk 1: Quick Fix – Perk 2: Ghost or Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Lethal: Throwing Knife – Tactical: Stim – Quick Fix will allow you to start regeneration health right after taking a gunfight. Ghost or Overkill is the best for that perk slot, it mainly depends on what style you want to play. Amped rounds out your perks as you can swap weapons and use equipment faster. Using Throwing Knives can help finish off downed opponents while the Stim helps massively in the middle of fights or after to get that health back. Next time you take on Iron Trials, definitely give one of the combinations a try and see if you can get a win.

Best Warzone loadouts: Top class setups for all playstyles ActivisionThe best Warzone Season 4 Reloaded loadouts can give you a huge advantage when using weapons with optimal attachments and perks. So, we’ve put together a list of the best guns that suit every playstyle. Warzone Season 4 Reloaded is bringing us one step closer to Warzone 2, and the game’s various weapons are thriving with this season’s balance changes. Just like with every update, the game’s meta is constantly shifting as new balance patches and guns are added. Whether it be Assault Rifles, SMGs, LMGs, or Shotguns and Sniper loadouts, there’s plenty to keep an eye out for in Warzone now. To help you settle on the absolute best classes in Season 4, we’ve put together a list of the best Warzone loadouts for every playstyle. Contents Best Assault Rifle in Warzone – Best SMG in Warzone – Best Shotgun in Warzone – Best Sniper in Warzone – Best Marksman Rifle in Warzone – Best close-range AR in Warzone – Best LMG in Warzone – Best Mid-range Warzone loadout – That begs the question – what makes a good custom class? Each one has a primary weapon, secondary, lethal, tactical, and three perks, so there are plenty of combinations you can choose from. See the latest Call Of Duty deals here Below, we’ve listed several loadouts we feel can provide everything you need in Warzone Season 4 Reloaded. Keep in mind, that some of the guns and attachments could still be locked for you. If that’s the case, substitute them with similar ones until you’ve played enough to unlock the rest. Best Assault Rifle in Warzone Season 4 Reloaded: KG M40 Attachments Muzzle: MX Silencer – Barrel: Reisdorf 720mm Shrouded – Optic: SVT-40 PU Scope 3-6x – Stock: Krausnick 12V – Underbarrel: M1930 Strife Angled – Magazine: 8mm Klauser 60 Round Drums – Ammo Type: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Polymer Grip – Perk 1: Tight Grip – Perk 2: Fully Loaded – Assault Rifles continue to be the absolute, go-to powerhouses in CoD Warzone and the top dog of the pack right now is the KG M40. This particular loadout helps in improving accuracy and control, while also raising its damage in the process. Mid-range effectiveness is the main goal of this loadout, especially with long-range nerfs, so our loadout will maximize its potential Be sure to brush up on our full KG M40 loadout to ensure you have the best secondary, perks, and equipment. Best SMG in Warzone Season 4 Reloaded: Armaguerra 43 Attachments Muzzle: Recoil Booster – Barrel: Botti 315mm CII – Optic: Slate Reflector – Stock: Imerito SA Folding – Underbarrel: Mark VI Skeletal – Magazine: 9mm 60 Round Mags – Ammo Type: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Polymer Grip – Perk: Hardscope – Perk 2: On-Hand – When it comes to SMG gameplay, you should always try to push the pace. This is where our best Armaguerra 43 loadout truly shines, taking both mobility and close-quarters damage to the very limit in Season 4 Reloaded. This SMG has consistently ranked near the top of Warzone’s SMG meta, and if you’re seeking the most powerful SMG build possible, then the Armaguerra 43 will definitely net you plenty of kills. Best Shotgun in Warzone Season 4 Reloaded: JAK 12 Attachments Muzzle: FORGE TAC Marauder – Barrel: ZLR J03699 Torrent – Laser: 5mW Laser – Magazine: 20 Round Drum Mags – Rear Grip: Stippled Grip Tape – Shotguns have certainly had their time in the spotlight, and while they might not be the most optimal pick in Caldera, Rebirth Island, or Fortune’s Keep, certain loadouts are still viable. Arguably your top choice is the JAK 12 shotgun. Alongside the KG M40, this is a perfect setup for players who love to push aggressively and take on enemies at close range. This loadout focuses on making the JAK 12 as fast as possible, so you’re guaranteed to wipe out your opponents in no time. Best Sniper in Warzone Season 4 Reloaded: HDR Attachments Muzzle: Monolithic Suppressor – Barrel: 26.9″ HDR Pro – Laser: Tac Laser – Optic: Variable Zoom Scope – Stock: FTAC Champion – This class is for those who like to quickly take down fully armored foes at long range. Our HDR loadout has been outfitted to maximize range, accuracy, and speed, making it a great choice no matter the scenario. With Sniper Rifle balance updates in Warzone Season 4, the HDR remains among the top picks. Based on community sentiment, it has even become the most popular sniper as well, surpassing the likes of the Kar98k and Swiss K31. Best Marksman Rifle in Warzone Season 4 Reloaded: Kar98k (MW) Attachments Muzzle: Monolithic Suppressor – Barrel: 26.9″ HDR Pro – Laser: Tac Laser – Optic: Variable Zoom Scope – Stock: FTAC Champion – If you want to use a Sniper Rifle but plan on doing a little moving around, this class offers more of a balanced approach. Compared to the HDR, the Kar98k has a faster ADS time making it the perfect choice for players who prefer to maintain mobility. On top of this, the Kar98k is deadly at close range, meaning you’re prepared for all scenarios and can take out opponents at all distances. Even though this weapon has fallen in popularity with the Season 4 Reloaded balance changes, it still remains a solid pick for many players. For a detailed look into this weapon, check out our Kar98k loadout guide. Best close-range AR in Warzone Season 4 Reloaded: Cooper Carbine Attachments Muzzle: MX Silencer – Barrel: 22″ Cooper Custom – Optic: G16 2.5x – Stock: Cooper 45RS – Underbarrel: M1941 Handstop – Magazine: 9mm 60 Rnd Drums – Ammunition: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Polymer Grip – Perk: Tight Grip – Perk 2: Fully Loaded – While SMGs are often king when it comes to close-range firefights, the Cooper Carbine is a fantastic choice for those that prefer the AR playstyle. Not only does it come packed with a fast rate of fire, but it also does great damage in both close and mid-range scenarios. Because of this, the Cooper Carbine has a lot more versatility, which means you’ll be able to utilize this loadout in any of CoD Warzone’s maps. Best LMG in Warzone Season 4 Reloaded: Bren Attachments Muzzle: MX Silencer – Barrel: Queen’s 775m Scepter – Optic: SVT-40 PU Scope 3-6X – Stock: Queen’s Model 11 BH – Underbarrel: M1941 Hand Stop – Magazine: 6.5 Sakura 40 Round Mags – Ammunition: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Polymer Grip – Perk: Tight Grip – Perk 2: Fully Loaded – As it stands, the best Bren loadout is the go-to meta LMG option in Warzone Season 4 Reloaded. This beefy weapon shreds opponents in close to mid-range engagements and can be very easy to control with the right attachments. As with most LMGs, the Bren can be a little sluggish (though not as much as others in its class), so running an SMG as your secondary will ensure you’re never caught off-guard. Best Mid-range Warzone loadout Season 4 Reloaded: XM4 Attachments Muzzle: Agency Suppressor – Barrel: 13.5″ Task Force – Optic: Axial Arms 3x – Underbarrel: Field Agent Grip – Magazine: STANAG 60 Rnd – If you’re looking for a decent AR to help in mid-range fights, there’s no looking past the XM4 in Warzone Season 4. Our optimal XM4 build improves not only the rate of fire but also enhances the AR’s handling. This makes this gun just as agile as any SMG in the battle royale and ideal for close-range engagements. So, there you have it, our top picks of the best loadouts and attachment combos to use in Warzone Season 4 Reloaded. Looking for more of the best Warzone loadouts? Check out our list of guides below: Grau 5.56 | MP5 | Vargo 52 | Welgun | Best Warzone Assault Rifles and loadouts | Best Warzone Sniper Rifles and loadouts | Best Warzone SMGs and loadouts | Best controller settings | Highest-earning Warzone players If you click on a product link on this page we may earn a small affiliate commission.

Best Warzone kills against cheaters exploiting the Stim glitch ActivisionTaking matters into their own hands, some of Call of Duty: Warzone’s bravest players have, quite literally, gone out of their way to punish cheating exploiters who abuse the notorious Stim glitch. As most Warzone fans have become familiar with by now, there is an unlimited Stim Shot glitch that pops into existence, gets patched out, and then returns every once in a while. The bug allows you to use an infinite amount of Stim Shots, enabling players to remain in the gas indefinitely and secure easy wins while those who play fairly die to the final circles. Unfortunately, as time passes, more and more exploiters have become aware of the glitch and prone to abusing it. Fortunately, more and more players with competitive integrity have become aware of those exploiters and prone to exacting justice by punishing them. While few things are more satisfying than a high-kill Warzone victory, one such thing is the cathartic sensation of a cheater being killed and therefore robbed of their illegitimate win. Highlighted by one of Warzone’s very best, Liam ‘Jukeyz’ James, here are the best kills against Stim glitch exploiters. YOU AINT STOPPING OUR 100 KILL GAME KID F THE STIM GLITCH pic.twitter.com/GwQCBbCcon — Li (@Jukeyz) January 12, 2021 Unwilling to be denied their 100-kill victory, Jukeyz and his team got set up with self-revives, gas masks, and a UAV to go seek out and eliminate the exploiter in their lobby. Driving directly into the toxic gas, Jukeyz is able to hop out (as his driver is downed by the green cloud) and delete the prone cheater. And Jukeyz isn’t alone in obliterating these exploiters. Reddit’s ‘thebigeasy31’ decimated the hubris of one such exploiter, who brashly thought they could start Stim glitching earlier in the game with a Most Wanted contact on his head. Instead, bigeasy gave him a bullet to the head. Lesson is don’t stim glitch with a Most Wanted. pic.twitter.com/auIyq8G9xK — Dexerto Esports (@DexertoEsports) January 16, 2021 And last, but certainly not least, Reddit’s ‘Millertime166’ took it upon themself to pull off a one-man vigilante act by seeking out a Stim glitcher on Rebirth Island. Heading into the gas, copping a Gas Mask, and getting into a vehicle, Millertime used their last remaining HP to kill off a silly cheater who was hidden behind a wall. While the Stim glitch was supposed to have been removed during the January 13 patch, some believe it persists, albeit in a more limited fashion. Nevertheless, most expect it could possibly make a return at some point. If it does come back, these players prove that the game’s developers are not the only ones who can counteract cheaters. Like those who killed off exploiters who were abusing the Promenade truck glitch, Verdansk’s finest have begun carrying out their own brand of justice.

Best Warzone Gulag callouts to help teammates win 1v1s Infinity Ward[jwplayer mCpsAxNx]Teamwork makes the dream work and the cutthroat arena that is the Gulag in Call of Duty: Warzone is no exception, so nailing down the appropriate callouts is key to helping out comrades in their 1v1 battles. The Gulag is Warzone’s microcosmic Cinderella story. You die, are stripped of your loot, and attend a Royal Ball deep below Verdansk. It’s an opportunity to go from rags to riches and should any of your teammates be present, they can be the birds that help prepare you for greater glory. Every team is different and communication may be subjective, so ultimately you can determine which specific words your squad wants to use. But there is one obvious, central tenet to making callouts: use your teammate’s point of view. So, for the first two facing directions, left and right, you want to call those out in relation to the direction your duelist initially faces from their spawn, looking toward the opponent. The same goes for the middle, if the opposition hasn’t moved to either side. Next, you have the other directions, traditionally forward and back, but these can actually be confusing in the Gulag since your teammate already begins with the knowledge that their opponent is in front of them. So, it becomes a matter of clarifying exactly where in that enclosure they are. The quickest way to do this is simply to use “back,” not as in “behind,” but rather that the opponent is staying in the back left, back right, or hasn’t moved from the back middle. If their enemy does move forward towards the center, you should call that out as “pushing right,” “pushing left,” or “pushing middle.” All three of these convey that the bad guy has moved forward toward the center of the map. https://twitter.com/drdisrespect/status/1253734665875152896 What gets especially confusing is wanting to call that level of the map, near the flag, the “middle” while already using “middle” to suggest they’re not on the left or right. Personally, after it’s been clear that the opponent has pushed up, most teams will be fine with using “middle, flag” (or even the notorious “middle, middle”), “middle, left,” or “middle, right. But, if you want to decide on using “middle” for the horizontal direction and “center” for the vertical, then that works too. If the enemy pushes all the way to your teammate’s spawn, then all that’s left is to say “pushing your side” with a direction. If your teammate has moved up and they’ve swapped sides, you can begin using their new point of view (therefore inverting the initial left and right callouts). Finally, little details can help too. If the opponent tries to cap the flag, you can call out “pushing” and then “sitting flag.” If they try to camp behind cover you can call out “camping” or “tucking.” These sorts of callouts should make life much clearer for your teammates. But, of course, you should alter them if certain terms feel more personally effective. And, if words have failed you, just throw a bunch of rocks at a hiding enemy to add some visual aid.

Best Warzone equipment: Which Lethal, Tactical and Field Upgrades should you use? ActivisionCall of Duty: Warzone has lots of effective equipment for players to choose from that can turn a 1v1 in their favor. Warzone Pacific has welcomed Caldera and made some adjustments to some of the game’s best gear. So here are our top picks for Warzone’s best Lethal and Tactical equipment, as well as Field Upgrades. Sometimes it can become very easy to worry about having the ‘best meta loadout,’ and forget about other important aspects of Warzone. Getting your loadout, setting up with your favorite AR and Kar98k loadout is pointless if you get stunned and killed without having a chance to blink. So we’ve gone through all of Warzone Pacific’s best equipment to see which are the best ones you should think about running. Best Warzone Lethal equipment Lethals are perfect for either giving you the edge at the beginning of a battle, or for quickly finishing off an opponent. They after often disregarded in favor of guns, when they can actually be just as effective. Throwing Knife Thanks to Warzone Pacific’s Caldera update, the Throwing Knife can one-shot a fully-plated enemy. The obvious downside to the Throwing Knife is that if you want to use it against a fully mobile opponent then you’ll need to be accurate. But if you can sneak up on someone, then you’ve got an easy down in waiting. Or, if you’ve already downed someone and want to quickly get your kill, a swift Throwing Knife will make quick work of them. Claymore The beneficiary of a buff in Caldera, Claymores have always been effective but overlooked in favor of stronger tools. But now, they are a lot stronger than they were and can be incredibly helpful in fortifying your position. Set one of these bad boys up behind a door or entranceway, and an enemy that isn’t up to their full allocation of health and armor will be in big trouble. Thermite An old-school classic from Warzone’s Verdansk days, the Thermite is still a boss in Caldera too. Launch a Thermite at the spot you believe to be containing an enemy and watch as they either flee into the open or maybe get lucky and stick them with it for a guaranteed kill. Again, like the Throwing Knife, if you’ve downed someone, chuck a Thermite at the body and pick up your kill without expending time and bullets shooting them. Best Warzone Tactical equipment If you play your cards right, you can win Warzone duels before you even fire a bullet. ‘Tactical equipment’ is called that for a reason. If a player can use it in the right circumstances, then they can be instrumental in picking up dubs. Stun Grenade The duration of players being stunned by Stun Grenades has dropped thanks to the Season 1 update patch notes. However, the few seconds that you do get to capitalize on a disabled opponent is still more than enough. Simply bounce one off a wall, or judge your throw correctly, and your disorientated opponent will be easy pickings. Heartbeat Sensor Another item that has been subjected to Warzone Pacific’s nerfs, the Heartbeat Sensor is still an invaluable piece of kit. The hardware will now ping every six seconds as opposed to its previous 3-second recharge. Still, this is more than enough time to get the edge on your un-Ghosted opponent as it will ping live data for you. Stim Having regenerative health may seem like Stims are an arbitrary addition to the ranks, but they are deeper than that. Countless Warzone deaths are caused by being trapped in the gas, having Stims will drastically decrease the chances of this. If you have no Gas Mask, simply time your Stim usage right, and you will maximize your healing potential and escape the poison. Best Warzone Field Upgrades The final piece of the puzzle, Field Upgrades provide special one-off boosts that prepare you for a fight or help you to recover after one. They can even be purchased from Buy Stations they are that important. Dead Silence Apart from its main nerf being ‘reduced drop rates,’ the actual Dead Silence upgrade itself is still incredibly OP. Activating this special ability will allow you to sprint a bit faster and with the bonus of making zero sound. Found an exposed enemy unaware of your position? Pop a Dead Silence and become a murderous ninja. Munitions Box Regardless of if you’re a skilled player that can survive long enough to burn through your ammo, or you’re not quite as capable and need more shots to kill opponents, chances are you will run out of ammo. It’s always recommended to consider having someone carry around a Munitions box to pop at any given moment and give your guns fresh stock. Check out some more of our Warzone guides below: | Best Sniper Rifle Warzone class loadouts | Best Cooper Carbine Warzone loadout | Best MP40 Warzone loadout | How to win your Gulag 1v1 | 10 most popular weapons in Warzone |

Best Warzone EM2 class loadout: Attachments, perks, setup ActivisionThe EM2 assault rifle landed in Black Ops Cold War and Warzone as part of the Season 5 Battle Pass, and it’s slotted nicely into both games’ metas for Season 6. Here’s the best build for the new AR. The Season 5 Battle Pass introduced two new weapons to the game, the EM2 assault rifle and a new SMG called the Tec-9. While the Tec-9 looks like a solid addition to the SMG class, the EM2 has really stolen the hearts of some players. The weapon recoils slightly more than the standard meta assault rifle, but the damage it puts out seeks to balance that. Provided players can manage its kick, it can be a mid to long-range behemoth. In order to help you get the most out of the EM2 in Warzone, we’ve outlined here the best attachments, perks, and overall setup for the EM2, as well as alternative loadouts that could take your fancy. Best EM2 loadout for Warzone Attachments Muzzle: Agency Suppressor – Barrel: 25.8″ Task Force – Optic: Axial Arms 3x – Underbarrel: Field Agent Grip – Ammunition: STANAG 50 Rnd – The biggest strength of the EM2 is its damage output. It’s not the fastest-firing assault rifle, nor the most sturdy, but the time to kill (TTK) on it is incredibly quick. For the most part, this is set up like a standard assault rifle build in Warzone. The Agency Suppressor and 25.8″ Task Force barrel increase the gun’s effective damage range, bullet velocity, and recoil control, while offering the huge advantage of suppressing your gunfire. Read More: Top 10 most viewed Warzone Twitch streamers – For a long-range weapon, the Axial Arms 3x optic is perfect, while the STANAG 50 Rnd magazine ensures you’ll rarely have to reload mid-gunfight, even if it does lower the ADS speed slightly. Finally, the Field Agent Grip improves recoil control, negating perhaps the biggest drawback of the EM2. Even with this attachment, it will take some time to fully master the gun’s kickback, but with enough practice, you’ll have this lethal weapon under control. Best EM2 setup (Perks & equipment) Perks & Equipment Perk 1: E.O.D – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Secondary: OTs 9 – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Heartbeat Sensor – Our suggestions follow that of most meta AR loadouts in Verdansk. E.O.D. helps to reduce explosive damage, while Amped makes switching weapons in those close, intense gunfights even quicker. Finally, Overkill is perfect on your first loadout so you can easily run an SMG with it, but if you’re approaching the later stages of the game, you might want to set up a class with Ghost too. If you do opt for two primary weapons, we suggest running the OTs 9 or the fan-favorite MAC-10, so you’re always ready for a close-quarter gunfight if your opponents decide to push you aggressively. As for your lethal and tactical equipment, these are pretty much bog-standard. You might wish to swap out a Heartbeat Sensor for Stun Grenades if you’re in the later stages of the game and most players have Ghost, but this comes down to personal preference. Alternative to the EM2 loadout If you enjoy the high damage stats of the EM2 but looking for something a little more sturdy when gunning down opponents, you can’t go far wrong with the tried-and-true XM4. There are several viable ARs right now, including the AK-47, Krig 6, and Grau among others, but the C58 slightly edges out the others due to its damage output. At the end of the day, though, it all comes down to personal preference, so be sure to try out the EM2 and see how it feels for you.

Best Warzone CX-9 class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Setup Treyarch/ActivisionInstead of another Cold War gun, Warzone players have been given a brand new Modern Warfare SMG to take into battle in the form of the CX-9. Warzone Season 4 is well underway and although the overall meta has been established with the Krig 6 and the Kar98k on top, players are always excited to experiment with new weapons. While the community is experiencing some difficulties unlocking the brand new Modern Warfare SMG, the CX-9 is another option for players who love to play aggressively and take close-quarter skirmishes. However, as with every new gun that’s added into Warzone, it’s difficult to know what attachments and build to use. In order to help you get the most out of the CX-9, we’ve put together the best loadout that you can use to get the upper hand over your opponents. Best CX-9 loadout for Warzone Attachments Muzzle: Monolithic Suppressor – Underbarrel: Commando Foregrip – Stock: CX-FR – Perk: Sleight of Hand – Ammunition: 50 Rnd Drum – Perks Perk 1: EOD – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Equipment Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Heartbeat Sensor – As with every Modern Warfare weapon, you’ll want to equip the Monolithic Suppressor for increased damage range and bullet velocity. On top of this, the attachment provides sound suppression which is key in Warzone for remaining undetected on the radar. Next, utilize the CX-FR stock to reduce the SMG’s ADS speed and the Commando Foregrip to bolster the weapon’s recoil, giving you the ability to take out opponents at medium range. After that, make sure you’re running the Sleight of Hand perk as your fourth attachment, as the CX-9 runs out of ammo quickly, so it’s key you’re able to reload as fast as possible and jump right back into the fight. Finally, round off the loadout with the 50 Round Drum to ensure you have enough ammo to finish off your opponents and take on a whole squad of enemies. How to unlock the CX-9 in Warzone Rather than reaching a specific level in Warzone or Modern Warfare, unlocking the CX-9 requires players to complete an in-game challenge. Luckily, the objective isn’t too difficult to complete, tasking players to get two longshot kills while using an SMG in five different matches. Completing this challenge shouldn’t be too difficult, just make sure you kit out your SMG with attachments that boost the weapon’s damage range. So, there you have it, that’s the best CX-9 loadout in Warzone’s current meta. Don’t forget to check out our Call of Duty homepage for all the latest news, guides, and leaks.

Best Warzone controller settings: Aim assist, sensitivity, response curve, & more ActivisionWarzone can be challenging at the best of times, so optimizing your controller settings is essential to make the experience easier. Here are the best controller settings for Call of Duty Warzone to improve your comfort and performance, leading to more wins and eliminations. Warzone is more than just shooting down your opponent. You have to strategize concerning your movement, loot collection, and taking on fights. However, no matter how you decide to play, poorly optimized controller settings will hold you back. The last thing you want in a heated gunfight is to miss shots because your settings let you down. Equally, suboptimal controller settings can lead to slow looting and menu navigation, which can be the difference between winning and losing a game. Here are the best Warzone controller settings to put you in the best position in every gunfight, so that you can dominate Call of Duty’s battle royale. Best Warzone controller settings Whether you’re on a console or PC, outside of traditional controller settings, there are four things that any player looking to improve their controller experience needs to disable: Film Grain – World Motion Blur – Weapon Motion Blur – Controller Vibration – While these settings are fine when playing through a single-player campaign, they’re an unnecessary distraction when attempting to up your game in Urzikstan, or any of Warzone’s other maps. So, if you’re chasing tight-knit control over your settings, then read on to find out all you need to know about everything from Deadzone, to Use/Reload Behavior, and ADS Multipliers. Best Warzone controller aim assist & sensitivity Here are the best aiming and aim assist settings in Warzone. If a setting isn’t listed here, such as Vertical Aim Axis or Tac Stance Sensitivity, it’s likely because you don’t need to change the setting. The following settings can be found under the Aiming tab of Warzone’s controller settings: The following recommended settings can be found under the Gameplay tab of Warzone’s controller settings: Best Warzone controller movement settings To get that responsive Warzone movement down to perfection, here are the settings you’ll want to use. These can be found under the Movement Behaviours section of the Gameplay tab. Best Warzone deadzone settings Deadzones are dependent on your controller, and whether you get stick drift, but generally you want low deadzones for full command of your sticks. Here are the best deadzone settings for Warzone, all found in the Controller tab. With these settings, you should be in a much more comfortable position while playing Warzone, whether you’re traversing Urzikstan or trying to rank up in Ranked Resurgence. In addition to these best Warzone controller settings, be sure to check out the best controller settings for MW3 too. For more Warzone tips, you’ll want to know the current meta, as well as the best Assault Rifles, Snipers, and SMGs to use right now.

Best Warzone CARV.2 class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Setup Activision / TreyarchThe CARV.2 (G11) is the latest gun to join the Tactical Rifle class in Warzone Season 3, so find out which attachments you should be using to increase your KDA across Verdansk ‘84. Warzone’s big Season 3 update is well underway, which means players can finally get their hands on the CARV.2. Previously known as the G11 in the original Black Ops, this Tactical Rifle comes packed with well-rounded stats. Not only does the CARV.2 have great damage and accuracy, it is also incredibly fun to use in Warzone. Whether this deadly burst rifle will replace the game’s recently nerfed M16 and AUG loadouts remains to be seen, but it does pack a punch, particularly when you kit it out with these attachments. If you’re currently grinding out attachments in Black Ops Cold War or simply wanting to know what the best CARV.2 build is, then this deadly Warzone loadout has you covered. How to unlock the CARV.2 in Warzone In order to unlock the CARV.2, you must rapidly kill 2 or more players in 10 different completed matches while using tactical rifles. This challenge is incredibly easy to complete in Black Ops Cold War’s multiplayer, but the added armor in Warzone will make this a little trickier. Instead, you’ll want to head into Plunder and simply drop onto your targets, grab a couple of kills, then exit the match. Rinse and repeat until you have the CARV.2 unlocked. Of course, if either of these options sound like too much of a hassle, then you can always purchase the Plastik Prototype bundle for the Call of Duty store. Best CARV.2 build for Warzone Attachments Muzzle: Agency Silencer – Barrel: 20.8” Strike Team – Optic: Axial Arms 3x – Underbarrel: Field Agent Foregrip – Ammunition: 45 Rnd Drum – This CARV.2 build greatly bolsters the Tactical Rifle’s accuracy, damage, and range – making it lethal across close to mid range firefights. However, this loadout does come at a rather costly price to mobility, so don’t expect to be zipping around the map. Fortunately, the added hit to this loadout’s mobility is well worth the incredible kill potential. Due to the CARV.2’s incredibly fast rate of fire, we’ve utilized the Agency Silencer to help temper the gun’s vertical recoil. This muzzle attachment also increases bullet velocity, provides sound suppression, and also greatly enhances the gun’s damage range. Meanwhile, the 20.8” Strike Team Barrel also bumps the CARV.2’s bullet velocity and damage even further. This is particularly useful if you wish to compete against the current close-quarters FARA, AK-47, and FFAR loadouts that are dominating across Verdansk. The Axial Arms 3x Optic is a must for those that wish to remain accurate across Verdansk’s vast engagement ranges. Not only does it give you an incredibly clean sight that doesn’t obstruct your view, but it also makes securing those all-important headshots that much easier. If you don’t like the added magnification, then you can always switch out the Axial Arms 3x for the Visiontech 2x. Rounding things off at the bottom are the Field Agent Foregrip and 45 Rnd Drum. The Field Agent Foregrip helps provide even more horizontal and vertical recoil, while the 45 Rnd Drum ensures you have plenty of ammunition to take down multiple threats. While the added ammunition from the other mags looks tantalizing, the penalty ADS is rarely worth it. Best CARV.2 setup (Perks & equipment) Perk 1: E.O.D. – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Secondary: FFAR – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Heartbeat Sensor – Just like all of our meta Warzone loadouts, the CARV.2 utilizes EOD, Amped, and Overkill. Not only do these perks keep you safe from any explosives and enable you to carry another primary, but they also enable you to quickly swap weapons. Despite the CARV.2’s fast fire rate, you’re still better off taking the FFAR to help you in close-quarters firefights. A sniper could also be chosen if you wish to go for those cross-map plays. Lastly, both the Semtex and Heartbeat Sensor are a must for those that enjoy actively tracking down their foes. Alternatives to CARV.2 loadout If you’re not enjoying the CARV.2, you could try out our Krig 6 loadout, or NICKMERCS’ revived Grau class. While neither of these Assault Rifles may be burst fire, they do pack a real punch across Verdansk ’84. However, if you’re looking for another burst fire Tactical Rifle, then the M16 or AUG might be more your thing. Just be aware that both of these rifles were nerfed in Season 3, so you’ll need to work a little harder for those kills. There you have it, the best CARV.2 loadout you can use in Warzone Season 3. Make sure you check out our Call of Duty page for all the latest news and loadout guides.

Best C58 Warzone loadout: Class setup, Attachments, Perks Activision / TreyarchThe best C58 loadout will allow you to take down enemies easily in Warzone Pacific Season 1. Although it may no longer be a top pick since the Vanguard integration, when paired with the right attachments, this weapon can be quite effective. Previously in the Warzone Season 5 reloaded update, the C58 received a nerf in the form of a slight recoil increase. However, it still remains a favorite among many skilled Warzone players. Whether you’re looking to try out the C58 Assault Rifle or wish to simply kit it out with the best attachments, then you’ll want to use the best loadout possible. While there are many competitive assault rifle choices out there, the C58 is capable of delivering some pretty potent damage due to its high fire rate. Despite having a slower fire rate, this deadly AR offers great handling and TTK across close to mid ranges. Here’s everything there is to know in order to build the ultimate C58 loadout in Warzone. Contents Best C58 loadout for Warzone – Best C58 setup (perks & equipment) – How to unlock the C58 in Warzone – Best C58 loadout Warzone tips – Alternative to the C58 loadout – Best C58 loadout for Warzone Muzzle: Agency Suppressor – Barrel: 18.5” Task Force – Optic: Axial Arms 3x – Ammunition: STANAG 55 Rnd – Underbarrel: Field Agent Foregrip – Like most Cold War Assault Rifles, the best C58 build will look familiar to those that have utilized the likes of the XM4 and Krig 6. In fact, if you ever used either of these guns you’ll know what just to expect. The Agency Suppressor and 18.6” Task Force barrel are integral to most Cold War ARs, especially the C58. These powerful attachments increase the gun’s effective damage range, bullet velocity, vertical recoil control, and even suppress your shots. These became ever more vital after Season 5 Reloaded nerfs added to the gun’s overall recoil. Unlike the AMAX, the C58 still has fairly manageable recoil with these attachments locked and loaded. You’ll still be able to beam targets from afar no different from usual. While both the muzzle and barrel are the best options when it comes to increasing the C58’s DPS, we recommend utilizing the Field Agent Foregrip to bolster the weapon’s recoil, making it easy to track targets from a distance. Rounding off the loadout is the STANAG 55 Rnd magazine – an absolute must for those that wish to get those all-important squad wipes. Best C58 setup (Perks & equipment) Perk 1: E.O.D. – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Secondary: MP40 – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Heartbeat Sensor – Our C58 class utilizes all the standard meta Warzone perks. Both EOD and Amped keep you safe from any explosive blasts, while also giving increased speed when swapping to your secondary weapon. Despite the C58’s high damage at close range, you’ll still want to switch to a fast-firing secondary. Fortunately, Overkill enables you to bring the infamous MP40. Once you’ve secured your core loadout, we recommend grabbing Ghost as soon as you can. This will keep you hidden from any prying eyes and help to increase your survivability in Verdansk. Lastly, both the Semtex and Heartbeat Sensor will give you the tools needed to track down nearby enemies and deliver explosive kills with Semtex. How to unlock the C58 in Warzone To unlock the C58 in Warzone and Cold War, players first had to reach Tier 31 of the Season Four Battle Pass. After Season Four, however, new challenges were implemented so everyone could access the weapon. Now, players have to get a Long Shot kill with an Assault Rifle in 15 different completed matches. Best C58 loadout Warzone tips The C58 Assault Rifle has many redeemable characteristics. It’s damage output, fairly easy to control recoil and range capabilities. When coupled with our best loadout recommendation, it becomes even better. If you’re considering using the C58 in Warzone, then we’ve got you covered with some general tips: Depending on your preferred playstyle, you’ll want to choose your second weapon for this class carefully. If you favor an aggressive playstyle, using an SMG like the MP40 is a solid choice. However, if you prefer ranged gunfights, equipping a sniper rifle such as the Swiss K31 would be your best bet. – When using the C58, you should prioritize keeping your gunfights at medium to long-range. At close ranges, weapons like shotguns and SMGs will have an inherent advantage. – Alternative to the C58 loadout If the C58 just doesn’t fit your style of play, consider using the STG44 as an alternative AR that deals a hefty amount of damage at medium to long range. This weapon has been hailed as one of the best Assault Rifles in Warzone Pacific Season 1. Perfect for players who want a versatile gun with a relatively manageable recoil pattern, just make sure you’re running an SMG alongside it just in case you get pushed by an enemy squad. If you want to keep updated with all the latest Warzone news and updates, then be sure to check out our Call of Duty page. Make sure you check out more of our Call of Duty guides for a competitive edge in Warzone Pacific Season 1: | Best streamer loadouts | Most popular Warzone weapons| Best Sniper Rifles | All Warzone bunker codes | Mac-10 loadout | FFAR Warzone class | Top 20 highest-earning players

Best Warzone Assault Rifle class loadouts: Attachments, Setup, Perks Activision / Infinity WardThe original Warzone bolsters an impressive arsenal of weapons spanning multiple categories, ARs are no exception. So we have prepared a list of the best meta assault rifle loadouts you can have in Warzone’s Caldera to secure an advantage over other players. ARs are best known for their great versatility in the Call of Duty’s battle royale mode. Some of them specialize in long-range, while others dominate in close-quarters combat. But not every single one of them is viable if you are serious about the game. Whether you wish to beam your foes with laser-like precision or simply want a do-it-all gun you can rely on, you’ll want to add an AR to your loadout. However, not all weapons in Warzone are the same. In fact, there are only a few that are truly worth leveling up and using. So we’ve put together an Assault Rifle tier list that ranks all of the best ARs in Warzone and the attachments you should be using for them. Remember, if you’re ready to dive into Warzone 2 and want to check out the best ARs in the sequel to dominate Al Mazrah, be sure to check out our list of the best meta ARs to use in Warzone 2. If you’re looking for a more overall rundown of the best WZ2 weapons, consider checking out our tier list. Contents What is the best AR in Warzone? The best AR in Warzone is the Cooper Carbine. With a new meta in place, the Cooper Carbine has taken the place of the KG M40 as the strongest AR in Warzone. Although it was hit with some nerfs, it’s still a dominant weapon that’s extremely easy to use. See the latest Call Of Duty deals here With its incredibly high TTK, low recoil, and great damage range, you’ll be wracking up the kills on Caldera, Rebirth Island, and Fortune’s Keep in no time. Best AR in Warzone There are tons of different Assault Rifles to use in Call of Duty: Warzone, what with the game having over 100 weapons this is no surprise. So instead of doing every single AR, with some being considerably weaker than the meta guns, we’ve picked out the top 23 to consider. 23. RAM-7 Best RAM-7 Warzone loadout Muzzle: Monolithic Suppressor – Barrel: FSS Ranger – Optic: VLK 3.0x Optic – Underbarrel: Commando Foregrip – Ammunition: 50 Round Mags – This lightning-fast AR famously became popular back in the first year of Warzone when it was introduced as floor loot. Since then, Warzone players have discovered how powerful this AR can truly be. While the RAM-7’s popularity has dwindled in Warzone Pacific, it can still shred through even the tankiest of foes. The current meta build is all about increasing the gun’s range and accuracy, which makes it a lot more viable in mid-range firefights – an area the RAM-7 has often struggled to excel in. 22. ITRA Burst Best ITRA Warzone loadout Muzzle: MX Silencer – Barrel: Perfetto 140mm Rapida – Optic: G16 2.5x – Stock: Botti SMI Adjustable – Underbarrel: Carver Foregrip – Magazine: 8mm Klauser 24 Round Fast Mags – Ammunition: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Stippled Grip – Perk: Vital – Perk2: Fully Loaded – The ITRA Burst is a 4-round burst semi-automatic rifle that offers great accuracy and moderate damage over long ranges. While its fire rate may be a little on the slower side, the added precision does make it a decent option for mid to long-range firefights. If you do wish to utilize this Vanguard AR, then we recommend pairing it with the best SMG in Warzone to ensure you have a strong secondary option. 21. AS44 Best AS44 Warzone loadout Muzzle: Mercury Silencer – Barrel: Kovalevskaya 615mm – Optic: G16 2.5x – Stock: ZAC 12B Custom – Underbarrel: M1941 Hand Stop – Magazine: 7.62 Gorenko 50 Round Mags – Ammo Type: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Polymer Grip – Perk 1: Gung-ho – Perk 2: Fully Loaded – While the AS44 in Warzone is classified as an Assault Rifle, its rapid-fire rate and close-range effectiveness make it act quite similarly to an SMG. Instead of trying to tailor this weapon more to an Assault Rifle role, the goal of this loadout is to further improve its fire rate and speed. Pair this weapon with one of the best sniper rifles in Warzone, and you’ll be deadly at all ranges. 20. FFAR 1 Best FFAR 1 Warzone loadout Muzzle: Agency Suppressor – Barrel: Tiger Team Spotlight – Stock: Raider Stock – Rear Grip: Serpent Wrap – Ammunition: Salvo 50 Rnd Fast Mag – The FFAR has been countless nerfs and buffs since the inception of Warzone. While it may no longer be the best Assault Rifle in the game, it can still dish out decent damage, provided you kit it out with the right attachments. With this loadout, it’s all about the close-quarter gunfights and pushing enemies aggressively at speed. The FFAR thrives in these engagements and with the Steady Aim Laser, your hip-fire accuracy will be pretty potent at close range. 19. EX1 Attachments Muzzle: Coil Amp – Barrel: SD Instant Grat – Optic: Mk. 3 Mod. 2 Sunfilter – Stock: AC-Titanium Anchor – Underbarrel: Ion Hand Stop – Magazine: Quantum High Voltage Battery – Rear Grip: Hatched Grip – Perk: Sleight of Hand – Perk2: On-Hand – Season 5’s EX1 is without a doubt the most unique and futuristic AR in Warzone, but it doesn’t quite have the power to reach the top spots on our list. Although Raven did buff the gun in Season 5 Reloaded, the small damage increase isn’t enough to make it top-tier. While the recoil on the gun is easy to control, it just doesn’t have the damage to compete at the top. 18. Krig 6 Best Krig 6 Warzone loadout Muzzle: Agency Suppressor – Barrel: 15″ CMV Mil-Spec – Optic: Axial Arms 3x – Underbarrel: Field Agent Grip – Magazine: STANAG 60 Rnd – This Black Ops Cold War Assault Rifle delivers excellent precision and deals great damage across all ranges, making it a viable weapon in Warzone. Raven Software previously nerfed the Krig’s maximum/minimum damage, which has seen it drop from the top 10 spot. Despite this nerf, the Krig’s is still a great pick thanks to its great accuracy and minimal recoil. Expect to see this loadout pop up from time to time as players continue to wreak havoc with it. 17. FARA 83 Best FARA 83 Warzone loadout Muzzle: GRU Suppressor – Barrel: 18.7″ Spetsnaz RPK Barrel – Optic: Axial Arms 3x – Underbarrel: Spetsnaz Grip – Ammunition: Spetsnaz 60 Rnd – Despite having its maximum damage decreased from 31 to 29 and featuring increased recoil, the FARA continues to remain firmly within the best AR category. The FARA 83 comes kitted out with a blisteringly quick rate of fire, high damage profile, and low recoil pattern, which make it absolutely devastating in close to mid-range engagements. Consider pairing the FARA 83 with one of Warzone’s best snipers to help with those long-range kills. 16. BP50 Best BP50 Warzone loadout Muzzle: Recoil Booster – Barrel: Maes 538mm Kort – Laser: Charlier CR Laser – Optic: Slate Reflector – Stock: Maes Skeletal – Magazine: .30 Russian Short 50 Round Drums – Ammunition: Subsonic – Rear Grip: Taped Grip – Perk1: Tight Grip – Perk2: Fully Loaded – Arriving in the Season 5 Reloaded update, the BP50 bullpup AR thrives at medium-range and in close-quarter skirmishes. Our build above focuses on maximizing the gun’s already potent fire rate and providing plenty of mobility so you’re always one step ahead of your foe. Don’t be afraid to play aggressively with the BP50, the weapon is brilliant when you’re putting pressure on your opponents and taking the high-risk gunfights. 15. BAR Best BAR Warzone loadout Muzzle: MX Silencer – Barrel: CGC 30″ XL – Optic: SVT-40 PU Scope 3-6x – Stock: Chariot WR – Underbarrel: M1941 Hand Stop – Magazine: 8mm Klauser 40 Round Mags – Ammo Type: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Polymer Grip – Perk 1: Hardscope – Perk 2: Fully Loaded – The BAR assault rifle arrived in Warzone as a result of the Vanguard integration. While many pros and streamers now use the STG44, the BAR’s high damage output and accuracy still make it a great pick. To take this AR to the next level, we’ve listed attachments that improve accuracy, ammo count, and damage output. If you’re in search of a new AR to add to your list of favorites, then look no further than the BAR. 14. CR-56 AMAX Best CR-56 AMAX Warzone loadout Muzzle: Monolithic Suppressor – Barrel: Tempus 26.4″ Archangel – Optic: VLK 3.0x Optic – Underbarrel: Commando Foregrip – Ammunition: 45 Round Mags – The CR-56 AMAX (AKA the Galil) has remained a fan-favorite pick since its introduction into Warzone. While its pick rate dwindled slightly in the last few months, a set of buffs to its damage range in Season 5 Reloaded has given the gun a new lease of life. The most lethal AMAX loadout is all about pushing the gun to its ranged limits, while also keeping its ADS speed to a minimum. Don’t be put off by the AMAX’s 45 Round clip, as this AR is capable of pumping out some truly dizzying damage numbers. This is especially true when you manage to capitalize on the gun’s headshot multiplier. 13. AK-47 (CW) Best AK-47 Warzone loadout Muzzle: Gru Suppressor – Barrel: 20″ Spetsnaz RPK Barrel – Optic: Axial Arms 3x – Underbarrel: Spetsnaz Grip – Magazine: 45 Rnd – The Cold War AK-47 is one of the most instantly recognizable guns in the Call of Duty series and boy does it pack a lethal punch when kitted out with the right attachments. This Russian-made AR continues to be a decent pick in the Season 5 Reloaded, with players picking it up and using its high TTK. While its recoil is a little punchy, the high damage offered from this loadout is fantastic. 12. M13 Best M13 Warzone loadout Muzzle: Monolithic Suppressor – Barrel: Tempus Marksman – Optic: VLK 3.0x Optic – Underbarrel: Commando Foregrip – Ammunition: 60 Round Mags – The M13 is often overlooked in Warzone when it comes to picking the best Assault Rifles. It may not deal as much damage as the current top pick, but this gun makes up for this with its blisteringly fast rate of fire. Despite having manageable recoil, it’s often best to focus on close to mid-range engagements. After all, the high rate of fire can quickly leave you in the dirt if you miss those first initial shots. If you’re after an AR that offers both speed and precision, then you’ll want to give the M13 a whirl. 11. M4A1 Best M4A1 Warzone loadout Muzzle: Monolithic Suppressor – Barrel: Stock M16 Grenadier – Optic: VLK 3.0x Optic – Underbarrel: Commando Foregrip – Ammunition: 60 Round Mags – The M4A1 has been a dominant Assault Rifle in Modern Warfare since the game was released. While its moderate recoil keeps it from being the single best pick, its high damage and great range make it one of the most versatile ARs in Warzone. The M4A1 can be kitted out in a multitude of different ways, but this build is all about bolstering the M4’s range, while still allowing you to play aggressively. The added 60 rounds also enable you to punish multiple players, giving you the potential to claim those all-important squad wipes. 10. Kilo 141 Best Kilo 141 Warzone loadout Muzzle: Monolithic Suppressor – Barrel: Singuard Arms 19.8” Prowler – Optic: VLK 3.0x Optic – Underbarrel: Commando Foregrip – Ammunition: 50 Round Mags – While the Kilo 141 didn’t receive any changes in Warzone Season 5 Reloaded, this highly versatile AR has long been a dominant pick in Warzone thanks to its incredible accuracy, minimal recoil, and fantastic damage range. In fact, this AR has proved so devastating that the majority of the player base utilized it in past seasons. With this loadout, you’ll be able to effortlessly beam players from all distances without much recoil. Simply click on your target and let the bullets fly. On top of this, opting for the 50 Round Mags will allow you to rotate quickly and push an enemy once they’re weakened. 9. NZ-41 Best NZ-41 Warzone loadout Muzzle: MX Silencer – Barrel: Orbweaver 360MM BC – Optic: SVT-40 PU Scope 3-6x – Stock: Orbweaver E Pack – Underbarrel: M1941 Hand Stop – Magazine: 6.5mm Sakura 50 Round Mags – Ammunition: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Polymer Grip – Perk 1: Brace – Perk 2: Fully Loaded – The NZ-41 may not be the best AR in the game anymore, but it still packs a punch. Not only does it have next to no recoil, but its TTK is absolutely through the roof. This is especially true when you kit it out with the best meta attachments. 8. KG M40 Best KG M40 Warzone loadout Muzzle: MX Silencer – Barrel: Reisdorf 720mm Shrouded – Optic: SVT-40 PU Scope 3-6x – Stock: Krausnick 12V – Underbarrel: M1930 Strife Angled – Magazine: 8mm Klauser 60 Round Drums – Ammo Type: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Polymer Grip – Perk 1: Tight Grip – Perk 2: Fully Loaded – The KG M40 made its debut in Warzone Season 2 and since then, players have been using this “workhorse” AR to eliminate their foes. This rifle deals big damage and boasts a solid fire rate, which makes it particularly versatile on Caldera. While the KG M40 held the top spot in Season 4 Reloaded, a set of nerfs pushed it down a few places but it remains strong in Season 5 Reloaded. 7. Nikita AVT Best Nikita AVT in Warzone Muzzle: MX Silencer – Barrel: Empress 613mm BFA – Optic: G16 2.5x – Stock: ZAC Padded – Underbarrel: M1930 Strife Angled – Magazine: 7.62x54mmR 45 Round Mags – Ammo Type: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Polymer Grip – Perk1: Brace – Perk2: Fully Loaded – The Nikita AVT has the best-in-class fire rate for Assault Rifles in Warzone. While this AR can be kitted out for long-range, its lightning-fast fire rate makes it difficult to control unless you equip the correct attachments. Fortunately, our Nikita loadout minimizes the gun’s recoil, ensuring your shots remain accurate. If you’re after a close to mid-range AR, then the Nikita is a decent choice. 6. Volkssturmgewehr Best Volkssturmgewehr Warzone loadout Muzzle: Recoil Booster – Barrel: Hockenson 142mm Rapid – Optic: Slate Reflector – Stock: Removed Stock – Underbarrel: M1941 Hand Stop – Magazine: 8mm Kurz 60 Round Drum – Ammo Type: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Fabric Grip – Perk 1: Acrobatic – Perk 2: Quick – The Volk saw a spike in play in Season 3, with loadouts like the one above replicating the FFAR meta. Having an AR that enables you to rush down your foes and outmaneuver them is incredibly advantageous, particularly on Fortune’s Keep. Now, in Season 5 Reloaded, the Volk has made a resurgence thanks to its overwhelming power in mid-range gunfights. So, if you’re after an AR you can rely on during close-quarter firefights, then you can’t go wrong with the Volk. 5. STG44 Best STG44 Warzone loadout Muzzle: MX Silencer – Barrel: VDD 760mm 05B – Optic: SVT-40 PU Scope 3-6x – Stock: VDD 34S Weighted – Underbarrel: M1941 Hand Stop – Magazine: 7.62 Gorenko 50 Round Mags – Ammo Type: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Polymer Grip – Perk 1: Vital – Perk 2: Fully Loaded – When the STG44 was originally released as a Vanguard weapon in Warzone, no one could imagine it would eventually claim a top 10 spot. However, this quickly changed with the Vanguard integration. The STG44 has become one of the most popular ARs in Warzone thanks to its balanced, yet effective nature. And to make full use of this weapon, be sure to use our STG44 loadout. 4. Grau 5.56 Best Grau 5.56 Warzone loadout Muzzle: Monolithic Suppressor – Barrel: Tempus 26.4” Archangel – Optic: VLK 3.0x Optic – Underbarrel: Commando Foregrip – Ammunition: 60 Round Mags – The Grau has the cleanest iron sight in the entire game, but the VLK 3.0x does make it easier to remain accurate at a distance, giving you an advantage in mid-range firefights. While this Modern Warfare rifle was overlooked in Season 4 Reloaded, a set of buffs placed it in the spotlight once again back in Season 5. Although its popularity with the community is fueled by a lot of nostalgia, it’s undeniably a powerful weapon that shreds foes at medium range. 3. Vargo 52 Best Vargo Warzone loadout Muzzle: GRU Suppressor – Barrel: 18.6″ Task Force – Optic: Axial Arms 3x – Underbarrel: Spetsnaz Grip – Ammunition: Spetsnaz 60 Rnd – The Vargo continues to be a strong contender, especially now that Raven has decreased its recoil. With its fantastic damage range and high precision, players looking for an Assault Rifle with great accuracy will want to utilize this lethal loadout. 2. XM4 Best XM4 Warzone loadout Muzzle: Agency Suppressor – Barrel: 13.5″ Task Force – Optic: Axial Arms 3x – Underbarrel: Field Agent Grip – Magazine: STANAG 60 Rnd – Previously known as the Commando, this reliable Black Ops rifle shares a lot of similarities to that of the M4A1. While the XM4 may have been previously nerfed, it still absolutely melts opponents in close to mid-range firefights. This particular XM4 loadout is all about boosting the gun’s effective damage range and accuracy, while also greatly improving its handling when going full-auto. 1. Cooper Carbine Best Cooper Carbine Warzone loadout Muzzle: MX Silencer – Barrel: 22″ Cooper Custom – Optic: SVT-40 PU Scope 3-6x – Stock: Cooper 45RS – Underbarrel: M1941 Hand Stop – Magazine: 9mm 60 Rnd Drums – Ammunition: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Polymer Grip – Perk 1: Tight Grip – Perk 2: Fully Loaded – The Cooper Carbine specifically excels in close-range engagements thanks to its incredible fire rate and mobility. For those players who enjoy playing aggressively, then this AR is definitely a solid choice. When kitted out with the right attachments, this weapon’s effectiveness can be boosted even further, easily making it one of the best ARs in Warzone Season 5 Reloaded. Best Warzone AR support weapons Once you’ve decided on the best Warzone AR loadout for your individual playstyle, it’s then important you pick a solid secondary or support weapon. Seeing as Assault Rifles are ideal for mid-range engagements, your best bet will be to find a weapon that is good at close-range engagements, leaning toward whichever suits you best. We’ve listed three separate weapon loadouts that are perfect when paired with any of the AR loadouts above. 1. Best Marco 5 loadout Muzzle: F8 Stabilizer – Barrel: Imerito 342mm 04P – Optic: Slate Reflector – Stock: Perfetto Esatta – Underbarrel: Mark VI Skeletal – Magazine: 8mm Nambu 64 Round Drums – Ammo Type: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Taped grip – Perk 1: Frenzy – Perk 2: Quick – 2. Best MP40 loadout Muzzle: Recoil Booster – Barrel: VDD 189mm Short – Optic: Slate Reflector – Stock: Krausnick 33M Folding – Underbarrel:M1941 Hand Stop – Magazine: 7.62 Gorenko 45 Round Mags – Ammo Type: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Polymer Grip – Perk 1: Brace – Perk 2: Quick – 3. Best H4 Blixen loadout Muzzle: Recoil Booster – Barrel: Bergstrom 17″ F3 – Optic: Slate Reflector – Stock: Removed stock – Underbarrel:SG98 Compact – Magazine: 7.62 Gorenko 54 Round Mags – Rear Grip: Taped Grip – Ammunition: Lengthened – Perk 1: Fleet – Perk 2: Quick – So, there you have it, our top picks of the best ARs in Warzone and attachments to use. Looking for more of the best Warzone loadouts and tips? Check out our list of guides below: C58 | Grau 5.56 | Kilo 141 | Krig 6 | CR-56 AMAX | FFAR 1 | Mac 10 | MP5 | Kar98k | HDR | Best controller settings | Top 10 best class setups and loadouts | Best streamer loadouts | Most popular Warzone weapons| Best Sniper Rifles | All Warzone bunker codes | Mac-10 loadout | FFAR Warzone class | Top 20 highest-earning players | Best Warzone Weapons | Bren Loadout | Cooper Carbine Loadout If you click on a product link on this page we may earn a small affiliate commission.

Best Warzone Assault Rifles after AMAX nerf ActivisionWhile the AMAX may still reign supreme in Warzone Season 3, the upcoming nerfs could lead to a new AR meta. Fortunately, these weapons will help you find a worthy replacement. The Warzone Season 3 update has brought plenty of new content to the table, but the biggest changes came in the form of the game’s weapon nerfs. Despite major adjusting to the FFAR, M16, and AUG – the AMAX had managed to avoid Activision’s crosshair. Well, the AMAX’s dominance is set to come to an end in the near future. In fact, Warzone’s devs left a note foreshadowing upcoming changes stating: “We are keeping a close eye on the AMAX. No king rules forever.” It certainly seems that the AMAX days at the top of the AR meta are numbered, which means Warzone’s Assault Rifle meta will be changing once again. Here are all the ARs we think could replace the AMAX after the nerf, so be sure to add them to your arsenal if you want to remain competitive. Krig 6 Best Krig 6 Warzone loadout Muzzle: Agency Suppressor – Barrel: 19.7” Ranger – Optic: Axial Arms 3x – Underbarrel: Field Agent Grip – Magazine: STANAG 60 Rnd – The Krig 6 has been creeping into contention ever since the Cold War attachment adjustments increased their viability in Warzone. However, the Season 3 buffs to the Krig’s damage multiplier have only enhanced this gun’s lethality even further. This Black Ops Cold War assault rifle delivers excellent precision and deals great damage across all ranges, making it a fantastic replacement to the AMAX. If that wasn’t enough, the Krig’s Ice Drake skin ensures you can always dominate your foes in style. Kilo 141 Best Kilo 141 Warzone loadout Muzzle: Monolithic Suppressor – Barrel: Singuard Arms 19.8” Prowler – Optic: VLK 3.0x Optic – Underbarrel: Commando Foregrip – Ammunition: 50 Round Mags – The Kilo 141 has long been a dominant Assault Rifle in Warzone thanks to its incredible accuracy, minimal recoil, and fantastic damage range. This reliable rifle may have taken a backseat in Warzone Season 3, but the AMAX nerfs could see it climbing up the meta rankings once again. Read More: Best Warzone Swiss K31 class loadout – The build above enables you to effortlessly beam players from all distances without the need to wrestle for control. Simply hold down the trigger and let the bullets fly. If you miss the Kilo meta, then now’s a good time to dive back in. AK-47 Best AK-47 Warzone loadout Muzzle: Gru Suppressor – Barrel: 18.2″ Takedown – Optic: Axial Arms 3x – Underbarrel: Spetsnaz Grip – Ammunition: 45 Rnds – The AK-47 is another Cold War AR that has made a name for itself in Season 3. While this punchy Russian rifle may have a rather unwieldy recoil pattern, the sheer amount of damage it does makes it incredibly potent. The fire rate may be a little slower, but the damage per shot is through the roof. Read More: Best AMAX Warzone class loadout – Unlike other ARs in Warzone, the AK-47 is also incredibly potent in close-quarter engagements. This means you can kit it out for range or have a class that purely focuses on a more aggressive, run and gun playstyle. Grau Best Grau Warzone loadout Muzzle: Monolithic Suppressor – Barrel: Tempus 26.4” Archangel – Laser: Tac Laser – Underbarrel: Commando Foregrip – Ammunition: 60 Round Mags – Just like the Kilo, Modern Warfare’s Grau continues to be a popular pick in Warzone. The Grau clean ironsight enables players to focus on mitigating recoil and bolstering the gun’s mobility, which makes it perfect for those that enjoy hyper-aggressive play. Read More: Best Warzone loadouts for Season 3 – While long-range firefights may be a little trickier without an optic, close and mid-range engagements are where the Grau truly shines. ADS times are ridiculously quick with this loadout, so don’t be afraid to rush your foes and beam them with deadly precision. FFAR Best FFAR Warzone loadout Muzzle: Flashguard 5.56 – Barrel: 19.5” Task Force – Stock: Raider Stock – Ammunition: STANAG 50 Rnd – Rear Grip: Serpent Wrap – Despite receiving several nerfs in Season 3, the FFAR is still alive and kicking. In fact, Call of Duty content creator NICKMERCS has even stated that he’d use this loadout in tournaments. While this particular loadout doesn’t fare as well as the AMAX at range, you will absolutely melt opponents in close quarters. If you do choose to use this FFAR build, then consider pairing it with one of the ARs above to help with those long-range encounters. There you have it, five guns that you’ll want to use after the AMAX nerf. Make sure you check out our Call of Duty hub for all the latest Warzone news and updates.

Best Warzone AMP63 class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Setup Activision / TreyarchThe AMP63 is the latest pistol to be added to Warzone, so find out which attachments you should be using in order to dominate the competition in the Season 3 Reloaded update. Warzone’s Season 3 Reloaded update has brought with it plenty of new content for players to sink their teeth into. Aside from the usual weapon balance changes and the addition of the 80’s Action Heroes bundle, many fans will be looking to pick up the AMP63. This punchy pistol comes packed with a blisteringly fast rate of fire and barely any recoil – making it a must for those that enjoy close-quarter gunfights. The AMP63 may not have what it takes to overthrow the game’s best SMG loadouts, but with the right attachments, it can absolutely melt opponents. If you wish to drastically increase your damage, then you’ll want to use this lethal loadout. How to unlock the AMP63 in Warzone If you wish to unlock the AMP63 pistol in Warzone and Black Ops Cold War, then you’ll need to eliminate 5 enemies using a pistol in 20 separate matches. This challenge may seem rather tedious, but it is can be done relatively quickly. Read More: Best Warzone loadouts – In order to speed up the process, we recommend running either the Sykov, Renetti, or .357 pistols. Once you have any of the above pistols equipped, either jump into Cold War’s multiplayer or queue up for a game of Plunder. Best AMP63 loadout for Warzone Attachments Muzzle: Agency Suppressor – Barrel: 7.2” Task Force – Laser: SWAT 5mw Laser Sight – Stock: Dual Wield – Ammunition: STANAG 25 Rnd – While it’s still early days, the current best AMP63 loadout follows a similar pattern to that of other akimbo pistol builds. In fact, if you ever used the Sykov or Renetti pistols, you’ll be very familiar with this gun’s playstyle. Like most Cold War guns, the AMP63 utilizes the Agency Suppressor. This must-have Muzzle increases the gun’s effective damage range, bullet velocity, vertical recoil control, and suppresses your shots. Not only does this make the AMP63 incredibly deadly in close-quarters scenarios, but it also helps provide a little extra range when your opponent tries to flee. Next up is the 7.2” Task Force Barrel, which also bolsters the AMP63’s bullet velocity and damage range. To make matters even better, you also get the added bonus of having a higher strafe speed, which helps you keep on your feet during hyper-aggressive maneuvers. As this AMP63 loadout utilizes the Dual Wield stock, you’ll need to ensure you have as much hipfire accuracy as possible. Fortunately, the SWAT 5mw Laser Sight does just that. While this akimbo loadout may hurt your foes in close-range fights, the lack of ADS makes hitting any mid to long-range shots tricky. You can always remove the Dual Wield Stock and replace it with the Serpent Wrap if you wish to increase the AMP63’s accuracy. Rounding things off at the bottom is that of the STANAG 25 Rnd mags. This mag attachment will give you plenty of ammo needed to melt through your foe’s armor, while also keeping you from constantly reloading every few seconds. Best AMP63 setup (Perks & equipment) Perk 1: E.O.D. – Perk 2: Ghost – Perk 3: Amped – Secondary: CR-56 AMAX – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Heartbeat Sensor – Just like most meta Warzone loadouts, our AMP63 class utilizes EOD and Amped. These perks help keep you safe from any explosive blasts and also enable you to quickly swap to your secondary weapon – something that is incredibly important if you wish to get the most out of the AMP63. Meanwhile, the Ghost perk enables you to stay off enemy UAVs and Heartbeat Sensors. Once you’ve grabbed your AMP63 loadout, we suggest picking up another loadout so that you can utilize the deadly AMAX, which still remains one of the best Assault Rifles in Warzone Season 3. Lastly, both the Semtex and Heartbeat Sensor help track down nearby enemies and flush out pesky campers. Simply locate your target, throw in a Semtex, and rush in with your AMP63 to claim some speedy kills. Alternative to the AMP63 loadout If you’re looking for a similar playstyle to the AMP63, then you’ll want to check out our Sykov pistol loadout. This class also utilizes the akimbo feature and performs very similarly to the AMP63, giving you great damage in close-quarters combat. If you’re all too familiar with the Sykov and wish to grab a pistol class that feels a little different, the .357 pistols might be more your cup of tea. These deadly revolvers may not be fully automatic like the AMP63 or Sykov, but the .357 rounds can tear through even the tankiest of foes. If you want to keep updated with all the latest Warzone and Black Ops Cold War news and updates, then be sure to check out our Call of Duty page.

Best Warzone 2 Sniper Support loadouts: Attachments, Setup, Perks ActivisionWarzone 2 Season 3 is underway and the meta has seen a significant shift. The rise of snipers thanks to explosive rounds now being able to one-shot kill has pushed players to also pursue the best sniper support. These are the best sniper support loadouts in Warzone 2. With the introduction of true one-shot snipers in Warzone 2 Season 3 snipers like the MCPR-300, FJX Imperium, and Victus XMR, snipers are more popular than ever before. Naturally, the rise of snipers has pushed Warzone 2 players to look for the perfect counterpart to their new primary weapon. These secondary weapons are often referred to as Sniper Support weapons, secondary guns that cover the weaknesses of a sniper. Whilst snipers are great for taking down and pressuring squads at long range they struggle at close and medium range. To help you figure out what gun to partner with your sniper we’ve put together this list that ranks the nine best Sniper Support Loadouts in Warzone 2. Contents Best VEL 46 loadout – Best STB 556 loadout – Best TAQ-56 loadout – Best BAS-P loadout – Best ISO Hemlock loadout – Best Lachmann Sub loadout – Best Kastov 762 loadout – Best PDSW 528 loadout – Best Vaznev-9K loadout – Best Warzone 2 Sniper Support: Perks & equipment – Best Warzone 2 Sniper Support Loadouts, ranked 9. VEL 46 Muzzle: Lacerta Compensator – Barrel: Tango 228 Barrel – Optic: Cronen Mini Pro – Underbarrel: OP-X9 Foregrip – Magazine: 50-Round Mag – The VEL 46 is a decent choice for those wanting a more aggressive sniper support weapon. It handles well and lets you push enemy teams but it isn’t the most accurate SMG. Even so, this gun can excel in the right hands, especially in solos and duos. 8. STB 556 Barrel: Bruen Turaco 686mm – Laser: Accu-Shot 5mW Laser – Optic: Aim OP-V4 – Underbarrel: FTAC Ripper 56 – Magazine: 42 Round Mag – Although most sniper support weapons are fast and snappy that might not be required depending on your playstyle. Players who like to play slower that want a weapon well suited to a defensive playstyle should consider using the STB 556. It’s extremely accurate and has a good TTK at all ranges. 7. TAQ-56 Muzzle: Harbinger D20 – Barrel: 17.5″ Tundra Pro Barrel – Underbarrel: FTAC Ripper 56 – Magazine: 60-Round Mag – Rear Grip: FSS Combat Grip – Being the fan favorite in Ranked Play, the TAQ-56 is a jack of all trades assault rifle with excellent recoil control and a good TTK. The TAQ’s access to a huge 60 Round Mag makes it an excellent sniper support weapon in trios and quads. 6. BAS-P Barrel: 10.5″ Bruen Typhon – Optic: Cronen Mini Pro – Stock: Ravage-10 – Magazine: 50-Round Drum – Rear Grip: D37 Grip – Despite once being arguably the worst SMG in Warzone 2 the BAS-P was buffed in Season 3 and is now a genuinely strong sniper support. At close to medium range this SMG is accurate and melts through enemies. Just don’t push your luck and try using the BAS-P at long range. 5. ISO Hemlock Muzzle: Harbinger D20 – Barrel: Field-T50 – Optic: Aim OP-V4 – Underbarrel: FTAC Ripper 56 – Magazine: 45-Round Mag – in Season 2 the ISO Hemlock was undoubtedly the best gun in Warzone 2. However, Season 3’s nerfs have seen it drop off in popularity. Even so, it’s still one of the better sniper support guns thanks to its incredible accuracy at all ranges. 4. Lachmann Sub Muzzle: XRK Sandstorm – Laser: Accu-Shot 5mW Laser – Underbarrel: Lockgrip Precision-40 – Magazine 40-Round Mag – Rear Grip: Lachmann TCG-10 – Warzone 2’s rendition of the MP5 has been strong since launch and Season 3 hasn’t changed that. For pushing buildings and taking close-range gunfights there is arguably no better sniper support than the Lachmann Sub. Despite this, it misses out on the top three as it can struggle at medium range. 3. Kastov 762 Muzzle: ZLR Talon 5 – Barrel: KAS-10 584mm Barrel – Optic: Aim OP-V4 – Underbarrel: FTAC Ripper 56 – Magazine: 40-Round Mag – The Kastov 762 has taken the ISO Hemlock’s place as the most used weapon in Warzone 2. It’s no surprise either as this assault rifle absolutely shreds with its incredible TTK and manageable recoil. Despite its strengths, it isn’t quite the best sniper support as this AR is best paired with an SMG. 2. PDSW 528 Muzzle: FTAC Castle Comp – Barrel: FTAC Series IX 14.5″ – Laser: Accu-Shot 5mW Laser – Stock: Hollow Extended Stock – Rail: Integrated Reflex Rail – The PDSW 528 is arguably the most underrated weapon in Warzone 2. An interpretation of the P90, this SMG offers spectacular mobility and is perfect for aggressive playstyles. It isn’t the easiest gun to use but those with good aim should be able to dominate with this build. 1. Vaznev-9k Muzzle: XTEN Razor Comp – Stock: Otrezat Stock – Underbarrel: Edge-47 Grip – Magazine: 45-Round Mag – Rear Grip: Demo-X2 Grip – Barely edging out the PDSW 528, the Vaznev-9K is the best sniper support in Warzone 2. Much like the PDSW, it offers fantastic mobility but has the advantage of better iron sights freeing up an attachment slot and easier to control recoil. Best Warzone 2 Sniper Support: Perks & equipment Basic Perk 1: Overkill – Basic Perk 2: Double Time – Bonus Perk: Cold Blooded – Ultimate Perk: Ghost – Lethal: Proximity Mine – Tactical Equipment: Smoke Grenade – Overkill is the most important perk as it allows you to combo your sniper support with a sniper. Otherwise, you’ll have to collect two loadouts or buy your second gun separately at a Buy Station. It’s best to partner Overkill with Double Time which lets you move around the map faster and reposition easier. Plus the 30% faster crouch movement speed is great for sneaking around without being detected. For sniping specifically, Cold Blooded is a superb Bonus Perk to use as it prevents High Alert from triggering. Without High Alert, enemies won’t know when you are aiming at them giving you more time to line up the perfect shot. Ghost is perfect for sniping as it lets you take power positions on rooftops without having to worry about other squads finding you. It’s especially useful in the late game where UAVs and Heartbeat Sensors are used to track down teams. For lethal equipment, the Proximity Mine works well as it lets you cut off entrances to buildings. Meanwhile, Smoke Grenades are a good pick for the Tactical Equipment slot as they let you move around the map and revive teammates more freely. That’s all for our best Sniper Support loadout in Warzone 2! For more of our Warzone 2 coverage, check out these guides below: Best Warzone 2.0 Sniper Rifle class loadouts | Does Warzone 2 have SBMM? | 10 most popular guns in Warzone 2.0 | Best 1-shot Sniper loadout in Warzone 2 Season 3 | Best Warzone 2 loadouts: Meta weapons and classes to dominate in Al Mazrah | How do Warzone 2 circles work? | Best Warzone 2 PC settings for higher FPS | Call of Duty 2023: Early leaks, Modern Warfare 2, Warzone 2, more

Best Warzone PC settings for higher FPS ActivisionTo optimize your Warzone experience on PC, and enhance your chances of securing kills, it’s crucial to ensure smooth gameplay by fine-tuning your settings. Here are the best PC settings to guarantee a seamless Warzone experience. While Warzone doesn’t have the highest system requirements, it is still taxing on your PC, especially for your CPU and RAM. This can lead to FPS drops, which in turn can damage your performance in Call of Duty’s battle royale. Fortunately, you can tweak your settings to maximize FPS. Doing this correctly can be the difference between a smooth, fun gaming session and an inconsistent, miserable one. If you are not confident in how to do this, you’ve come to the right place. Here are the best PC settings for Warzone, to make sure your game runs as smoothly as possible, while still making sure it is visually pleasing. Best Warzone PC graphics settings Best Display Settings Display Mode: Fullscreen Exclusive, minimizes input lag – Display Monitor: Select a monitor with the fastest refresh rate – Display Adapter: Your graphics card – Screen Refresh rate: Maximum for monitor (144hz / 240hz) – Display Resolution: 1080p, Avoid 1440p/4K as it will significantly reduce FPS – Dynamic Resolution: Off – Aspect Ratio: Automatic (16:9) – Display Gamma: 2.2 (sRGB) – Brightness: Preference – Constrain Mouse to Game Window: Preference – NVIDIA Reflex Low Latency: On + Boost – ECO Mode Preset: Custom – V-Sync [Gameplay]: Off, V–Sync can cause input delay – V-Sync [Menus]: Off – Custom Frame Rate Limit: Custom Gameplay Custom Frame Rate Limit: 300 – Menu Custom Frame Rate Limit: 60 – Out of focus Custom Frame Rate Limit: 30 – – Menu Render Resolution: Optimal – Pause Game Rendering: Off – Focus Mode: Preference – Best Quality Settings Quality Presets: Custom – Render Resolution: 100 Upscaling / Sharpening: FidelityFX CAS – FidelityFX CAS Strength: 75, Sharpens gameplay at minimal FPS cost – – Path Tracing + Ray Reconstruction: Off – VRAM Scale Target: 90 – Use max VRAM to prioritize Warzone – Variable Rate Shading: On – Texture Resolution: Normal – Texture Filter Anisotropic: High – FPS barely affected by this setting – Depth of Field: Off – Detail Quality Level: Low – Particle Resolution: Normal – Bullet Impacts: Preference – Persistent Effects: Off – Shader Quality: Low – On-Demand Texture Streaming: Off – Local Texture Streaming Quality: Low – Shadow Quality: Normal – Screen Space Shadows: Off – Ambient Occlusion: Off – Screen Space Reflections: Off – Static Reflection Quality: Low – Tessellation: Off – Volumetric Quality: Low – Deferred Physics Quality: Low – Weather Grid Volumes: Off – Water Quality: Off – Best View Settings Field of View: 90 – 110, This is a matter of preference, but around 100 should give the best balance between visibility and performance. Higher values make distant enemies smaller/harder to see and can impact FPS. – ADS Field of View: Affected – Weapon Field of View: Default – 3rd Person Field of View: 90 – Vehicle Field of View: Default – World Motion Blur: Off – Weapon Motion Blur: Off – Film Grain: 0.00 – 1st Person Camera Movement: Least (50%) – 3rd Person Camera Movement: Least (50%) – 3rd Person ADS Transition: Preference – Spectator Camera: Preference – Inverted Flashbang: On – How to get higher FPS in Warzone For higher FPS in Warzone, make sure you adjust your display, quality, and view settings as shown above. While some of these settings are a matter of preference, you’ll want to try these settings first, and then see how well your game runs. If you’re still not satisfied with the FPS, there are a couple more things to do. First, make sure your graphics card’s drivers are up to date, by using the official applications from either Nvidia, AMD, or even Intel. Next, make sure you’re not running lots of applications in the background. Web browsers like Chrome can often take up CPU usage, causing your gameplay to be bottlenecked. Closing other applications can improve FPS in these instances. Finally, the most expensive, but effective option, is to buy a new graphics card with more power. For that, check out our list of the best graphics cards, to make you are getting good value from your next GPU. That’s all for the best Warzone PC settings. For more useful information, check out the best controller settings, the current meta, weekly challenges, and which top-tier assault rifles and sniper rifles you should be using.

Best Warzone console settings: Graphics, Audio, Interface, FOV, more Activision BlizzardIf you want to dominate Warzone, you need to have the best settings on your console to ensure top-notch performance. Here’s how to set up your graphics options on PlayStation and Xbox to optimize your experience. Consoles are often considered the safest route to seamless performance. If you are playing Warzone on a console, you are bound to get the performance that is promised. However, some settings can hinder your gameplay. Thankfully, you can tweak these settings, which will improve your Warzone experience significantly. Doing so is a must to get the most out of Call of Duty’s battle royale. Here is a look into the best console settings for Warzone to use on both PlayStation and Xbox, while PC players will instead want to consult the best Warzone PC settings to make their game run smoothly. Best Warzone console settings for PlayStation and Xbox The best console settings for Warzone make the game look clearer, while still ensuring Call of Duty’s battle royale runs well and sounds as good as possible. Here are the graphics, audio, and interface settings you should be using: Best Warzone console graphics settings These recommended graphics settings are designed to offer a balance of visual fidelity and overall performance, but also work as competitive settings for those who want to get more serious about their gameplay: On-Demand Texture Streaming: Off – World Motion Blur: Off – Weapon Motion Blur: Off – Film Grain: 0.00 – Depth of Field: Off – FidelityFXCAS: On – FidelityFXCAS Strength: 90 – ECO Mode Preset; Off – 120 Hz Refresh Rate: On, if your display supports higher refresh rates – FOV: 90 – 120, experiment around this range to see what works best for you – First-Person ADS: Affected, less visual recoil when firing – Weapon Field of View: Wide, less visual recoil when firing – 3rd Person Field of View: 90 – 1st Person Camera Movement: Least (50%), minimizes screen shake during gameplay – 3rd Person Camera Movement: Least (50%), minimizes screen shake during gameplay – Inverted Flashbang: On, flashbangs make your screen black rather than white – 3rd Person ADS Transition: 3rd Person ADS – Spectator Camera: Game Perspective – Brightness: 55 – Best Warzone console audio settings These recommended audio settings make it easier to hear other players’ footsteps in Warzone, while also ensuring environmental sounds aren’t too distracting: Audio Mix: TV – Master Game Volume: 100 Gameplay Music Volume: 0 – Dialogue Volume: 50 – Effects Volume: 100 – Cinematic Music Volume: 0 – War Tracks Volume: 0 – – Voice Chat Volume: 50 – Voice Chat: Preference – Game Voice Channel: Preference – Last Words Voice Chat: Preference – Proximity Chat: Preference, though it can give you an advantage in some situations – Open Mic Sensitivity: 50 is a good baseline, but this may need tweaking – Mute Yourself When Connecting To Channel: Preference – Microphone Level: 50 is a good baseline, but this may need tweaking – Subtitles: Preference – Subtitles Size: Preference – Subtitles Background Opacity: Preference – Mono Audio: Off – Reduce Tinnitus Sound: On, reduces piercing audio of Stun and Flash Grenades – War Tracks As a Passenger: Preference – Juggernaut Music: Off – Hit Market Sound Effects: Preference – Best Warzone console interface settings Optimal interface settings make navigating Warzone’s menus and UI easier. These recommended settings also offer a range of accessibility features that you may find useful: Subtitles: Preference – Subtitles Size: Preference – Subtitles Background Opacity: Preference – Menu Text Size: Preference – Text Chat Text Size: Preference – Color Customization: Preference, tweak to make differentiating various UI elements easier – Mini Map Shape: Square, allows you to see more of the map – Mini Map Rotation: On – Horizontal Compass: On, can be used to call out the direction of enemy players – Crosshairs: On – Hit Marker Visuals: On – Damage-Based Hit Markers: On – Player Names: Preference – In-Game Text Chat: Preference – Vehicle HUD Prompts: Preference – Squad Health and Stamina: On – Server Latency: On – Packet Loss: On – Clock: Preference – Connection Meter: On – Gameplay Tips: Off – Tooltips: Preference – Menu Prompts: Automatic – That’s all for the best Warzone console settings. Console players will also want to check out the best controller settings, plus what the current meta is, including the best Assault Rifles, Submachine Guns, and Sniper Rifles.

Best Warzone 2 Ranked Play loadouts in Season 5 ActivisionWarzone 2 Ranked Play is finally here, but you need the right loadout to hang with the best of the best. Here are the best loadouts to use in Season 5. Treyarch led the charge on Modern Warfare 2 Ranked Play, and CDL pros credited the game mode for sparking fresh interest in competitive CoD. MW2 viewership skyrocketed on Twitch, bringing fans and pro players closer together than ever. WZ2 Ranked Play shares a resemblance to its MW2 counterpart, using the same division and Top 250 system. Squads earn Skill Rating and climb the ranks through placement, kills, and assists. Everyone will use their best weapons, so here are the strongest loadouts for WZ2 Ranked Play. Contents Best Ranked Play long-range meta weapons – Best Ranked Play short-range meta weapons – Best Ranked Play perks and equipment items – Best Ranked Play long-range meta weapons Signal 50 Muzzle: Nilsound 90 Silencer (-0.68, +0.39) – Barrel: 29″ TV Kilo-50 (+0.27, -0.31) – Optic: Schalger Night View (-1.84, -1.05) – Laser: FSS OLE-V Laser (+0.29, +37.84) – Ammunition: .50 Cal High Velocity (-0.29, +6.39) – The Signal 50 sniper rifle has been steadily growing in popularity in recent months, to the point that it became a near-essential weapon to carry for World Series of Warzone players while competing in the $1.2m tournament. Despite experiencing a surge in popularity, Raven Software defended its decision to not nerf the sniper in Season 5. Cronen Squall Muzzle: TY-LR8 (+0.80, +0.32) – Barrel: HR6.8 (+0.39, +0.40) – Optic: Aim OP-V4 (+2.53, 0.00) – Underbarrel: FTAC Ripper 56 (+0.80, -0.23) – Magazine: 50 Round Drum – After dominating Season 4 Reloaded, the Cronen Squall saw a long list of nerfs in Season 5. The battle rifle’s maximum damage, neck, lower and upper torso, and limb damage multipliers decreased. JGOD argued that those nerfs were “negligible,” and the Cronen Squall is still a top-tier meta loadout in Season 5. TAQ V Muzzle: TY-LR8 (+0.23, +0.14) – Rear Grip: FSS Combat Grip (+0.58, +0.30) – Underbarrel: FTAC Ripper 56 (+0.57, +0.27) – Magazine: 7.62 High Velocity (-0.56, -5.43) – Ammunition: 50 Round Drum – The TAQ-V separates itself from other battle rifles because it has the best accuracy and recoil in the class. It also helps that the hard-hitting rifle excels in full-auto firing mode while others only perform well in single-fire mode. The TAQ V is also easier to control than the Cronen Squall in medium to long-range engagements. Best Ranked Play short-range meta weapons Lachmann Sub Barrel: L38 Falcon 226mm (-0.16, -0.19) – Laser: 1mW Quick Fire Laser (-0.06, -26.32) – Stock: FT Mobile Stock (-2.58, -1.55) – Magazine: 50-Round Drum – Rear Grip: Lachmann TCG-10 (-0.35, -0.28) – The Lachmann Sub may be the best short-range meta in Warzone 2 after the ISO 45 nerf in the Season 4 Reloaded update. The reliable SMG shreds enemies up close and is also extremely easy to use. Some players will still prefer the ISO 45, but the Lachmann Sub warrants plenty of attention. ISO 45 Muzzle: Lacerta Compensator (-0.62, -0.21) – Laser: 1MW Quick Fire Laser (-0.50, -29.61) – Optic: Slimline Pro (+3.00, +2.40) – Stock: SK-3 Cheetah (-1.29, -1.32) – Magazine: 45 Round Drum – Despite seeing a few nerfs, the ISO 45 still has the fastest time-to-kill speed for SMGs, up to nine meters. If you strictly want a close-range weapon for extremely short-range engagements, this is the weapon for you. But for anything else, you may want to consider using the Lachmann Sub. Best Ranked Play perks and equipment items Best Perks Base Perk: Overkill – Base Perk: Double Time – Bonus Perk: Resupply – Ultimate Perk: High Alert – There are a couple of different avenues you can take when choosing perks. The most contentious selection will be the Ultimate Perk. Many players choose High Alert, which gives you a vision pulse when an enemy spots you. However, Ghost, Birdseye, and Quick Fix are viable options as well. Resupply should be a no-brainer choice, as it recharges equipment over 25 seconds. With how important smoke grenades are to escape gunfights or repositioning, squads will need as many as possible. As for the Base Perk slots, we decided to go with Double Time and Overkill to maximize the ability to escape gunfights and carry two primary weapons. Buying a weapon from the buy station could allow a player to replace Overkill with Scavenger, Battle Hardened, or Bomb Squad. Best Equipment Lethal: Drill Charge – Tactical: Smoke Grenade – Players should choose a throwing knife or drill charge for their lethal choice. Throwing knives make it easier to finish downed enemies without wasting ammunition, while drill charges are great for taking out campers. As for the tactical slot, at least one, if not all, teammates should have smoke grenades equipped. That rounds off the best Ranked Play loadouts in Warzone 2.0 right now. Be sure to check back in the future because as the meta shifts, so will this list.

Best Warzone 2 perk packages for Season 1 Reloaded ActivisionDiscovering what playstyle best suits you in Warzone 2 is a difficult task. So, to help make matters easier, we broke down the benefits of every perk package in Warzone 2 and ranked each offering from worst to best. In Modern Warfare 2, players can select their own Base, Bonus, and Ultimate perks. Warzone 2 went down a different route featuring preset perk packages. Unfortunately, game-breaking bugs have plagued Warzone 2’s perk system. Birdseye gave out free advanced UAVs, some players could edit perk packages, and community members criticized developers for not realizing Ultimate Perks were not working as intended. Finally, on January 11, a hotfix fixed Ultimate perks, including High Alert, which drew attention on social media. Now that perks are back and fully operational, here’s everything you need to know about choosing the best option. Best Warzone 2 perk packages ranked WZ2 perks work the same as they do in MW2. You will have access to Base perks from the beginning of the game. Bonus perks activate four minutes into a match, followed by ultimate perks after eight minutes. It’s essential to consider each perk in a package and consider when they will come in handy. Our Warzone 2 perk guide goes into more detail. 8. Sentinel Perks: Battle Hardened, Bomb Squad, Cold-Blooded, Quickfix Battle Hardened and Bomb Squad are both practical, yet you would rather have one than both simultaneously. Cold-Blooded is much better multiplayer than in Warzone 2, and Quickfix leaves much to be desired compared to other Ultimate perks. 7. Weapon Specialist Perks: Overkill, Strong Arm, Spotter, Survivor It may come as a surprise to some seeing Weapon Specialist so low in our ranking. The perk package is the only one which offers Overkill, yet the other perks are too undesirable to warrant a higher ranking. Survivor is arguably the weakest Ultimate perk, and the same can be said about Spotter. 6. Specter Perks: Double Time, Tracker, Spotter, Ghost Specter is the weaker of the two perk packages that have Ghost. Spotter is only effective in certain situations, and Tracker sometimes serves more as a distraction than a helpful tool. Double Time is a valuable perk, but doesn’t justify selecting the perk package. 5. Scout Perks: Scavenger, Strong Arm, Focus, Ghost Ghost will be a trendy Ultimate perk selection to counter UAVs. Scavenger is useful for resupplying ammo and plates in the latter stages of a match, and Strong Arm will come in handy when pushing an opponent out of cover. Focus gets outclassed by other Bonus perks, which is the only thing holding Scout back from being a top-tier perk package. 4. Warden Perks: Double Time, Strong Arm, Fast Hands, Quickfix It is hard to conjure up a better trio of perks than Double Time, Strong Arm, and Fast Hands. Each perk is at the top of most players’ lists of favorites, especially Fast Hands, a must-use perk in Warzone 1. We would have ranked the package higher if it weren’t for the limitations of Quickfix. Quickfix starts health regeneration after killing an enemy or by inserting a plate. However, the perk only activates when you are missing all your plates, so it will only save you from an extra shot or two. Other Ultimate perks have more universal uses. 3. Recon Perks: Double Time, Tracker, Focus, Birdseye Tracker and Focus is a relatively weak one-two punch of perks. Birds Eye is the true crown jewel of the Recon perk package. The Ultimate perk gives three pings per UAV called during a match, allowing teams to have a good idea of what’s happening around them at any point during a match. Birdseye is dependent upon other teams’ UAVs, so it does have its drawbacks, but the Ultimate perk could end up saving your squad in the later stages of a game. 2. Commando Perks: Scavenger, Strong Arm, Fast Hands, High Alert It will be an ongoing battle between Ghost and High Alert for the best Ultimate perk in Warzone 2. Cold-Blooded is the only counter to High Alert, and the only perk package with the perk is relatively weak. Knowing where you are getting shot from in the final circle could make the difference between winning or losing a match. The trio of Scavenger, Strong Arm, and Fast Hands is among the best for Warzone 2’s perk packages, and some would even consider this package better than our top choice. 1. Vanguard Perks: Double Time, Bomb Squad, Resupply, High Alert Vanguard is well-balanced and doesn’t have any glaring weaknesses. Double Time allows players to sprint longer, which will be helpful for escaping a gunfight or running from the storm. Bomb Squad protects players from the brunt force of lethal grenades, and Resupply recharges equipment every 30 seconds. Drill Charges are a must-have equipment item for clearing out campers from rooms, and smoke grenades make it easier to reposition and move between cover. When resources are scarce at the end of a match, having access to both grenades gives users a distinct advantage. As previously mentioned, High Alert is in contention for Warzone 2’s best Ultimate perk, and knowing where you are getting shot from reduces the stress involved in trying to clutch a game during the final circle. For more on Warzone 2, be sure to check out some of our other guides: Do Warzone skins carry over to Warzone 2? | What are Strongholds in Warzone 2? | All Warzone 2 vehicles and Gas Stations | Does Warzone 2 have SBMM? | How do Warzone 2 circles work?

Best Warzone 2 Lockwood MK2 loadout: Class setup, attachments, perks ActivisionThe Lockwood MK2 emerged as an underrated weapon in MW2, and undeservedly flies under the radar in Warzone 2 as well. To maximize the weapons’ strengths, you’ll need a top-tier loadout. Marksman rifles held a niche place in the original Warzone’s meta, but the often maligned class could be special in Warzone 2. Marksman rifles are popular selections because of their blistering fast ADS speed, devastating damage, and quick mobility. All three of those traits perfectly translate over to Warzone 2. After the Season 1 update, players demanded a sniper rifle buff because the weapons don’t one-shot kill enemies. Marksman rifles have the capability of one-shot killing enemies, and sniper users should consider switching classes while waiting for a buff. If you are looking for a marksman rifle to start with, look no further than the Lockwood MK2. The versatile lever-action rifle boasts a rapid-fire rate and dominates mid-range firefights. Here are the best Lockwood MK2 attachments, perks, and equipment Contents Best Lockwood MK2 Warzone 2 loadout – Best Lockwood MK2 Warzone 2 perks & equipment – How to unlock the Lockwood MK2 in Warzone 2 – Best Lockwood MK2 alternatives in Warzone 2 – Best Lockwood MK2 Warzone 2 loadout Attachments Barrel: 25″ Buffalo Barrel – Muzzle: FTAC Dreadnought – Optic: SZ Bullseye optic – Laser: Accu-Shot 5MW Laser – Stock: Lockwood Bullseye stock – For our loadout, we focused on improving the Lockwood MK2’s damage range and bullet velocity without sacrificing too much mobility and short-range capabilities. The 25″ Buffalo Barrel helps in all facets, increasing bullet speed, damage range, and movement speed. We opted to use the FTAC Dreadnought Muzzle because it also improves bullet velocity and adds an extra element of recoil smoothness to help line up difficult shots. The useful attachments also offers sound suppression, keeping you off the minimap when firing. Unlike other weapons, the Lockwood MK2 has easy-to-use iron sights, however, for long-ranged engagements, the SZ Bullseye Optic will be valuable, providing a 6x magnification. Using a marksman rifle forces you to react extremely fast when going up against an AR or SMG. The Accu-Shot 5MW Laser boosts ADS speed, aiming stability, and sprint-to-fire speed. Finally, the Lockwood Bullseye Stock increases ADS, sprint, and crouch movement speed. Best Lockwood MK2 Warzone 2 class: perks & equipment Perk Package: Scout Base Perk 1: Scavenger – Base Perk 2: Strong Arm – Bonus Perk: Focus – Ultimate Perk: Ghost – Lethal: Semtex Grenade – Tactical Equipment: Flash Grenade – The scout perk package was perfectly crafted for marksman rifle loadouts. Sniper rounds can be hard to come by while looting on Al Mazrah, so the Scavenger perk replenishes ammo on dead enemies. Strong Arm comes in handy if you are getting pushed while holding a sniping angle or attempting to push players out of cover. The perk allows you to throw equipment items further and see where they will land. Using a marksman rifle requires pinpoint accuracy. Focus reduces flinch when aiming down sights and extends hold breath duration, allowing players to line up a difficult shot better. Ghost will help you stay off the mini-map in the final circle, as enemies will use heartbeat sensors to find you. Finally round off the setup with Semtex for flushing opponents out of cover and Flash Grenades for clearing encloses spaces. How to unlock the Lockwood MK2 in Warzone 2 In order to get your hands on this powerful marksman rifle in Modern Warfare 2, you need to reach Military Rank level 28. Best Lockwood MK2 alternatives in Warzone 2 The SP-R 208 is an unconventional weapon, but if you are looking for an alternative to the Lockwood MK2, look no further. The deadly marksman rifle can one-shot enemies before they know what’s hit them. Warzone 2’s meta is still in the process of taking form, but the SP-R 208 is in contention of being the game’s best marksman rifle, and for good reason. Now that you have the best Lockwood MK2 loadout, you can check out some other guides we’ve compiled for Warzone 2. Do Warzone skins carry over to Warzone 2? | What are Strongholds in Warzone 2? | All Warzone 2 vehicles and Gas Stations | Does Warzone 2 have SBMM? | How do Warzone 2 circles work?

Best Warzone loadouts & meta guns in Season 5 Reloaded Warzone’s meta has shifted once again following the launch of the Season 5 Reloaded update, so to make sure your classes are the strongest they can be, you’ll need to update your loadouts. With every new season of Warzone, the meta changes. The arrival of new weapons, various buffs & nerfs, and even the addition of new maps forces players to once again figure out the best loadouts to use in Call of Duty’s battle royale. In Warzone, a few weapons stand above the rest, with these going on to dominate lobbies. These guns typically have a fast TTK, great damage range, and low recoil, allowing them to outperform their peers. Not using these top-tier guns will leave you outgunned, making winning games more difficult than it needs to be. Equally, you need to use the best loadouts, builds, and attachments to make each weapon as effective as possible. Best Absolute meta loadouts in Season 5 Reloaded If you’re looking to use the best guns in the game, you are going to want to use these weapons. They outperform everything else right now and have very few downsides. Best Long-range weapons (ARs, LMGs, Battle Rifles & Snipers) Kar98k Muzzle: Sonic Suppressor L – Barrel: Prazisionsgewehr 762 Long Barrel – Optic: Range Caller v3.4 Optic – Ammunition 7.92 High Grain Rounds – Sling: Recon Sling – The Kar98k returned to Warzone back in Season 4, immediately becoming the best weapon in the meta. This led to inevitable nerfs targeted at controller players, but the Kar98k is still an exceptional weapon even after the changes. You’ll just need to be a little more skilled now to land those crucial headshots. This dominant marksman rifle is a sniper with an effective one-shot range of 76 meters, while also possessing far superior handling to any of its competitors. It has effectively replaced the XRK Stalker as the best sniper for aggressive playstyles. It’s not that the XRK Stalker is bad, but rather that the Kar98k is so absurdly good that it’s hard to justify using anything else. Pulemyot 762 Muzzle: Quartermaster Suppressor – Barrel: ST Pyro Heavy Barrel – Optic; Corio Eagleseye 2.5x – Stock: Ivanov Wood Stock – Underbarrel: Kimura Ryn-03 Vertical Grip – The Pulemyot 762 makes its first return to the meta since the JAK Annihilator Bullpup Kit was nerfed back in Season 2. This follows a huge buff in the Season 5 Reloaded that improved its damage, handling, and fire rate. These have made it a much stronger option, with this now being the best LMG in Warzone. It offers fantastic accuracy thanks to its low recoil and great range. Furthermore, the Pulemyot 762 has a colossal 100 round magazine, dwarfing all of its competitors. This means you don’t have to reload as often and are far less likely to be caught out doing so. The only downside to this gun is that its handling is slower than other absolute meta options, so it’s not suitable for run and gun playstyles. STG44 Muzzle: Quartermaster Suppressor – Barrel: Bruen Acrux Heavy Barrel – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Underbarrel: DR-6 Handstop – Magazine: 50 Round Drum – To literally nobody’s surprise, the STG44 was incredibly strong at the start of the season. In fact, it was the best all-around weapon in the game, offering low recoil and a comically fast TTK. This led to an inevitable nerf in Season 5 Reloaded, with its maximum damage being reduced. Following the nerf, the STG44 is no longer so utterly dominant there’s no point using anything else, but it is still the best assault rifle in Warzone. Its freakishly low recoil remains untouched, and even its post-nerf time to kill is still competitive. However, the WWII assault rifle is noticeably worse up close after the changes, with SMGs comfortably beating it. SVA 545 Muzzle: Quartermaster Suppressor – Barrel: STV Precision Barrel – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Magazine: 60 Round Mag – Rear Grip: Citadel Grip – Since MW3’s integration, there has yet to be a meta where the SVA 545 wasn’t at least viable. Now in Season 5 Reloaded, it has once again emerged as an absolute meta assault rifle, largely thanks to its incredible performance at long range. What makes the SVA 545 so unique is its hyperburst. The AR’s first two shots fire together in a burst, so if you tap fire, it turns into a two-round burst weapon. The main advantage of this is that it becomes incredibly accurate, even at extreme distances. If you don’t fancy using the STG44, this is the next best option. Best Close-range weapons (SMGs, Shotguns, Pistols) BP50 (JAK Revenger Kit) Conversion Kit: JAK Revenger Kit – Muzzle: Quartermaster Suppressor – Laser: Kimura RYL33 Laser Light – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Rear Grip: TRST-IV Grip Tape – At least on paper, the JAK Revenger Kit looks to beat out every other option. It offers great mobility, has a competitive TTK, and is easy enough to use regardless of skill level. In many ways, it feels like the successor to the WSP Swarm, which hasn’t been top-tier for a while now. If guns were solely judged on how dominant they are in a one-versus-one scenario, this would be the only close-range weapon worth using. However, Warzone is a team game, so this conversion kit’s painfully slow reload speed keeps it in check. If you can look past this flaw, it’s a fantastic weapon, but in Trios and Quads, it can be a deal breaker. Static-HV Muzzle: Quartermaster Suppressor – Barrel: Garrote-8 Long Barrel – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Stock: Spry 24 Light Stock – Underbarrel: XTEN Phantom-5 Handstop – The STG44 wasn’t the only newcomer to make an immediate impact at the start of the season. Warzone players also took to the Static-HV, which is no surprise given its many strengths. The most notable of these was its absurd damage. After the nerfs in Season 5 Reloaded, it doesn’t hit as hard anymore, but it’s still a really good SMG. It can still do everything it did pre-patch, but it’s just slightly worse across the board now. Before it was untouchable up close and at midrange, while now it’s good at both but not unmatched. The good news is it retained its excellent mobility and handling, which was a big reason why so many players loved using it in the first place. Superi 46 Muzzle: Quartermaster Suppressor – Barrel: Lux 30 Heavy Barrel – Stock: Rescue-9 Stock – Underbarrel: DR-6 Handstop – Magazine: 40 Round Mag – Throughout Season 4, the Superi 46 took over Warzone, and it continues to see success in Season 5 Reloaded. Its mobility stats alone – which beat every other gun on this list – are enough to make it meta, but it also has a fairly fast TTK and even great recoil control. It’s rare to see an SMG that is this well-rounded. It’s reminiscent of some of the battle royale’s greatest SMGs ever, such as the MP5 and MAC 10. While the Superi 46 is unlikely to have the same legacy as those legends, Warzone players shouldn’t overlook how good this is. When the community looks back, only then will they truly appreciate it. Striker Muzzle: Quartermaster Suppressor – Barrel: Striker Recon Long Barrel – Underbarrel: Paracord Grip – Ammunition: .45 Auto High Grain Rounds – Magazine: 48 Round Mag – The Striker has been in and around the meta for some time but was never quite good enough to justify using over other SMGs. That changed in Season 5 Reloaded after Raven buffed its damage ranges, allowing it to finally take advantage of its main strength, its unrivaled versatility. This gun has low recoil and great range, letting it compete from further away than other SMGs. Despite this, it’s also strong up close, having a TTK comparable to the Static-HV, in addition to good mobility and handling stats. It’s a true jack-of-all-trades weapon that works great as both a sniper support and a highly versatile submachine gun. Best Meta loadouts in Season 5 Reloaded These guns certainly pack a punch but won’t quite compete with the Absolute Meta. Even so, they offer some variety and are still great weapons in their own right. Meta long-range weapons (ARs, LMGs, Battle Rifles, Snipers) BAL-27 Muzzle: Quartermaster Suppressor – Barrel: Crown-H3 Barrel – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Stock: Ardent Tac Stock – Magazine: 60 Round Mag – A massive recoil buff at the start of the season saw the BAL-27 emerge as a serious meta contender. This was followed by a range buff in Season 5 Reloaded, which has pushed into firmly into the meta. This futuristic assault rifle is now one of the best long-range options in Warzone. It’s not overly surprising that this reimagined gun is so good after these buffs, as it already excelled in most other areas. From its relatively fast TTK to its large magazine and snappy handling, there are a lot of reasons to use the BAL-27. This only feels fitting given how dominant it was back in Advanced Warfare, with its pre-buff state simply not doing this era-defining weapon justice. Holger 556 Muzzle: Quartermaster Suppressor – Barrel: Chrios-6 Match – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Stock: RB Addle Assault Stock – Magazine: 40 Round Mag – For the longest time, the Holger 556 was really good but held back by its smaller magazine capacity. This limitation still exists, but a big range buff in Season 5 Reloaded has proven enough to push this gun firmly into the meta. It now offers comparable range to the SVA 545 and STG44, both of which are among the best long-range guns in Warzone. This means that, at least in Solos and Duos, this gun is arguably the best assault rifle in the game. In larger team modes like Trios in Quads, it isn’t quite as dominant due to that smaller magazine, but that’s no longer enough of a reason to ignore it. MTZ-556 Muzzle: Quartermaster Suppressor – Barrel: MTZ Clinch Pro Barrel – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Stock: MTZ Marauder Stock – Magazine: 50 Round Drum – The MTZ-556 has been hovering around the meta for some time now, even having a run back in Season 4, where it was the most used long-range gun. In Season 5 Reloaded, it’s been surpassed by the STG44, but if you were having success with this gun beforehand, there’s no reason why it won’t continue to be a great choice now. One of the best aspects of the MTZ-556 is its great damage, especially at close range. The MTZ-556 is an AR-SMG hybrid, which means it deals more damage up close than its competitors. This unique trait of the meta AR also means it has fast handling and mobility, which is fantastic for Warzone players who want to make big plays for their squad. KATT-AMR Muzzle: Sonic Suppressor XL – Barrel: Zang-34 Barrel – Laser: SL Razorhawk Laser Light – Ammunition: .50 Cal High Velocity – Bolt: Ephemeral Quickbolt – With how dominant sniping is in Season 5, it’s not a surprise that so many players are looking for the best one-shot build possible. Though the Kar98k is excellent for fast-paced sniping, the KATT-AMR is the superior marksman weapon on larger battle royale maps like Urzikstan. Despite its slower fire rate and handling, the KATT-AMR’s ability to one-shot at any range – in addition to its incredibly fast bullet velocity – makes it a clear meta option. The MORS is a great alternative too, but the KATT-AMR beats out the railgun thanks to its faster bullet velocity. TAQ Eradicator Muzzle: Quartermaster Suppressor – Barrel: Conquer-70 Long Barrel – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Stock: Tactique Brute Stock – Underbarrel: Bruen Heavy Support Grip – The TAQ Eradicator received a big buff at the start of the season, with its damage profile and range both being improved. That directly affected its TTK, which now competes with the best long-range weapons in the game. However, competitors like the Pulemyot 762 were buffed in the mid-season update, causing this gun to slip down the rankings. Regardless, if there’s one thing Warzone players love, it’s a forgiving gun that anyone can dominate with, and that’s a perfect description of the TAQ Eradicator. It’s easy to use, hits hard, and has a big magazine, and as long as that remains true, it will remain a great option. Meta close-range weapons (SMGs, Shotguns, Pistols) FJX Horus Muzzle: Quartermaster Suppressor – Barrel: Syn9 Long Barrel – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Stock: Ripper Light Stock – Magazine: 60 Round Drum – The FJX Horus was already strong when it was limited to just 48 rounds and had much more recoil. Buffs back in Season 4 and the introduction of a 60 Round Drum elevated this to absolute meta, with the FJX Horus establishing itself as one of the best close-range weapons. However, it received a sizable nerf to damage range at the start of Season 5, making its TTK only competitive out to around 10 meters. If you can keep gunfights up close, this often overlooked SMG still dominates. It isn’t versatile, nor does it partner well with a sniper, but if you want a proper, old-school submachine gun that melts up close and has great mobility stats, the FJX Horus remains a great option. MCW (JAK Raven Kit) Conversion Kit: JAK Raven KIt – Muzzle: Quartermaster Suppressor – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Underbarrel: Paracord Grip – Magazine: 40 Round Mag – While the base MCW is a low-damage, long-range weapon, equipping the JAK Raven Kit flips that entirely. With the conversion kit, it becomes an AR-SMG hybrid with a sensational time to kill out to 20 meters. Incredibly, it will usually beat SMGs in this range despite being an assault rifle, making this gun rather special. Despite its high damage, the JAK Raven isn’t perfect. It has more recoil than most of its competitors and inferior mobility. With that said, this is still the best sniper support weapon in Season 5 Reloaded and one of the best close-range guns that Warzone has to offer. Reclaimer 18 Muzzle: Bryson Choke – Barrel: Ironbrand Long Barrel – Stock: No Stock – Underbarrel: Bruen Bastion Angled Grip – Rear Grip: Haste XV Grip Tape – This shotgun can down enemies in just two shots, giving it a freakish TTK that simply shouldn’t be possible. Its absurd damage was largely assumed to be a bug at the start of the season, but that no longer appears to be the case since it wasn’t changed in the mid-season update. To be honest, using this will make everyone else in your lobby furious. They will send you angry messages, and you’ll have a great time winning more games. If that sounds like something you want, it’s time to use this rendition of the SPAS-12 and bring it back to its former glory. Just be sure to utilize Tac-Stance as its iron sights are not pretty. WSP-9 Muzzle: Quartermaster Suppressor – Barrel: WSP Reckless-90 Long Barrel – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Underbarrel: DR-6 Handstop – Magazine: 50 Round Mag – When it comes to theoretical TTK and damage, the WSP-9 performs very well, even after being nerfed in Season 5. This phenomenal rendition of the iconic Uzi hits hard, has great mobility, and is even competitive at medium range. This is because its slower fire rate makes it easier to control and more accurate from further away. However, that slower fire rate is a double-edged sword, as it also makes the WSP-9 less forgiving. If you miss a couple of shots, its TTK becomes significantly worse. This is a high-skill weapon that rewards aim above all else, so while it won’t be for everyone, those who can use it are sure to dominate. WSP Stinger Muzzle: Sonic Suppressor S – Barrel: Hiss Short Light Barrel – Laser: XTEN Sidearm-L400 – Magazine: 32 Round Mag – Rear Grip: Akimbo WSP Stinger – With a theoretical TTK of 560 ms, the WSP Stinger is outstanding when used with the akimbo grip. The combination of its raw damage and high mobility makes it perfect for Resurgence, where running around the map and taking constant gunfights is the aim of the game. Naturally, this comes with some trade-offs. Most notable is the WSP Stinger’s low range and intense recoil. It can be tricky to control the vertical kick of this gun at times, especially on controller. Mouse and keyboard players will have an easier time, but there are still many other guns that are much more forgiving. Even so, it’s a really good option as long as you keep gunfights up close and personal. Best off-meta loadouts in Season 5 Reloaded These weapons aren’t necessarily meta right now, but they can hold their own and are a lot of fun to use. Consider trying these loadouts out if you want a competitive option that most other players aren’t using. BP50 Muzzle: Quartermaster Suppressor – Barrel: Lore-9 Heavy Barrel – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Stock: Moat-40 Stock – Magazine: 45 Round Mag – The BP50 received a range of mobility nerfs back in Season 4, slowing it down quite a bit. Even so, it was so freakishly mobile beforehand that this nerf hasn’t stopped it from having great mobility for an assault rifle. Given its many other strengths, this gun remains a great option, albeit not a top-tier one anymore. From its great iron sights to its incredible recoil control and effectiveness at just about any range, there are a lot of reasons to use this in Season 5 Reloaded. It says a lot that despite being nerfed several times, the BP50 is still good. Although it may not be meta anymore, it’s not that far off, and a return to the top isn’t out of the question. COR-45 (XRK IP-V2 Conversion Kit) Conversion Kit: XRK IP-V2 Conversion Kit – Muzzle: Zehmn35 Compensated Flash Hider – Optic: Mk.3 Reflector – Stock: XRK Dynamic Precision Stock – Magazine: 40 Round Drum – The COR-45 has always been solid in Warzone, but it was hard to maintain the fire rate required to make this pistol competitive. However, the XRK IP-V2 Conversion Kit changed that by introducing a binary trigger. This makes it much easier to utilize the COR-45’s true potential and reach its maximum fire rate all at once. It does take some getting used to, as you don’t want to simply spam fire the trigger but rather find a rhythm where the gun fires fastest. However, once you have figured this out, the COR-45 becomes a monster at short range, offering quite literally the best TTK in Warzone. Lockwood Mk2 (JAK Wardens) Conversion Kit: JAK Wardens – Muzzle: Bryson Choke – Laser: Verdant Hook Cylindrical Laser – As much as the community loves to complain about shotguns, they aren’t meta and haven’t been in a long time. They are too inconsistent, have next to no effective range, and are almost always outgunned by SMGs. Furthermore, missing shots is extremely costly, and unless you have the nastiest flicks in the West, they will get you killed more often than not. Despite all those flaws, it’s impossible to ignore how fun these reimagined Model 1887s can be. Running around and three-tapping enemies as you spin them around is a blast. The JAK Wardens are especially fun on Resurgence, where it’s much easier to get up close and personal. RAAL MG (JAK Protean) Conversion Kit: JAK Protean – Muzzle: Quartermaster Suppressor – Optic: Corio Eagleseye 2.5x – Stock: Demo H-40 – Magazine: 50 Round Belt Mag – Any marksman rifle that can kill in two shots is going to be competitive. From the infamous DMR to the more recent MTZ Interceptor, these kinds of guns always perform well. The JAK Protean variant of the RAAL MG is no exception, delivering a deadly two-shot blow to the head. While this might have you shaking at the thought of another DMR taking over Warzone, you probably don’t need to worry. Just like the base gun, the JAK Protean has terrible handling and mobility. As such, this heavy-duty marksman rifle won’t be for everyone, but those who do enjoy it will find themselves using a powerful gun that’s capable of great things. SOA Subverter Muzzle: Quartermaster Suppressor – Barrel: Dozer-90 Long Barrel – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Underbarrel: Paracord Grip – Magazine: 50 Round Drum – Battle rifles have had a tough time in Warzone as of late, with the versatility of assault rifles and the effective range of LMGs winning out. However, the SOA Subverter stands out as the best battle rifle by far due to its hard-hitting shots and impressive damage profile, which is especially impressive after the buffs in Season 5 Reloaded. So, what’s the catch? Ever since it was nerfed back in Season 3, there has been no way to build the SOA Subverter to have both fast handling and good recoil control. Since recoil control is a must to make this weapon competitive, its handling has to take a hit. This loadout has a sluggish ADS Speed and sprint-to-fire time, neither of which is suitable for playing fast. All Warzone guns Below you’ll find a list of every gun that’s currently available, split up by type, with links to guides on the best loadouts for each of them: Assault Rifles SMGs Battle Rifles LMGs Sniper Rifles Shotguns Marksman Rifles Pistols That’s all for the best meta loadouts in Warzone, but you’ll also want to check out the best assault rifles, submachine guns, sniper rifles, and most popular guns. Alternatively, these best MW3 loadouts will help you dominate in multiplayer too.

Best Warzone controller settings: Aim assist, sensitivity, response curve, & more ActivisionWarzone can be challenging at the best of times, so optimizing your controller settings is essential to make the experience easier. Here are the best controller settings for Call of Duty Warzone to improve your comfort and performance, leading to more wins and eliminations. Warzone is more than just shooting down your opponent. You have to strategize concerning your movement, loot collection, and taking on fights. However, no matter how you decide to play, poorly optimized controller settings will hold you back. The last thing you want in a heated gunfight is to miss shots because your settings let you down. Equally, suboptimal controller settings can lead to slow looting and menu navigation, which can be the difference between winning and losing a game. Here are the best Warzone controller settings to put you in the best position in every gunfight, so that you can dominate Call of Duty’s battle royale. Best Warzone controller settings Whether you’re on a console or PC, outside of traditional controller settings, there are four things that any player looking to improve their controller experience needs to disable: Film Grain – World Motion Blur – Weapon Motion Blur – Controller Vibration – While these settings are fine when playing through a single-player campaign, they’re an unnecessary distraction when attempting to up your game in Urzikstan, or any of Warzone’s other maps. So, if you’re chasing tight-knit control over your settings, then read on to find out all you need to know about everything from Deadzone, to Use/Reload Behavior, and ADS Multipliers. Best Warzone controller aim assist & sensitivity Here are the best aiming and aim assist settings in Warzone. If a setting isn’t listed here, such as Vertical Aim Axis or Tac Stance Sensitivity, it’s likely because you don’t need to change the setting. The following settings can be found under the Aiming tab of Warzone’s controller settings: The following recommended settings can be found under the Gameplay tab of Warzone’s controller settings: Best Warzone controller movement settings To get that responsive Warzone movement down to perfection, here are the settings you’ll want to use. These can be found under the Movement Behaviours section of the Gameplay tab. Best Warzone deadzone settings Deadzones are dependent on your controller, and whether you get stick drift, but generally you want low deadzones for full command of your sticks. Here are the best deadzone settings for Warzone, all found in the Controller tab. With these settings, you should be in a much more comfortable position while playing Warzone, whether you’re traversing Urzikstan or trying to rank up in Ranked Resurgence. In addition to these best Warzone controller settings, be sure to check out the best controller settings for MW3 too. For more Warzone tips, you’ll want to know the current meta, as well as the best Assault Rifles, Snipers, and SMGs to use right now.

Best Warzone Sniper Rifle loadouts in Season 5 Reloaded ActivisionSniper rifles have been dominating Warzone’s meta for some time now, and the strongest snipers are always among the best guns in Call of Duty’s battle royale. The power of snipers is unmatched for long-range engagements, providing critical support by pressuring and eliminating enemy teams from afar, often without them even having the chance to fight back. To keep snipers in check, developer Raven Software has implemented various buffs and nerfs throughout Warzone’s history, with Season 5 Reloaded being no exception. This latest update saw the JAK Cataclysm conversion kit heavily nerfed, bringing the powerful RPK variant back in line with other options. With these constant changes, it’s important to stay informed and make sure your sniper loadouts are optimized. Even a seemingly minor change can make all the difference, and the last thing anyone wants is to lose a gunfight because they chose a weapon that isn’t competitive anymore. Best Sniper Rifle loadouts These are the five best sniper rifles to use in Season 5 Reloaded, all of which can down enemies in one headshot: 1. Kar98k Best Kar98k Warzone Loadout Muzzle: Sonic Suppressor L – Barrel: Prazisionsgewehr 762 Long Barrel – Optic: Range Caller v3.4 Optic – Ammunition: 7.92x57mm High Grain Rounds – Slings: Recon Sling – The Kar98k remains a top-tier option in Warzone, and it doesn’t take a genius to figure out why. It can down in one shot up to 76 meters, which is extraordinary considering how fast its handling is compared to other snipers. This weapon is especially strong in Resurgence, where it is one of the best weapons in the game. 2. KATT-AMR Best KATT-AMR Warzone Loadout Muzzle: Sonic Suppressor XL – Barrel: Zang-34 Barrel – Laser: SL Razorhawk Laser Light – Ammunition: .50 Cal High Velocity – Bolt: Ephemeral Quickbolt – In contrast to other meta snipers, the KATT-AMR is slow and heavy. However, it is still an incredible option, as it can down in one shot at any range. Even better, it doesn’t require a special ammo type to do so, leaving you free to use attachments to optimize other key stats. If you want to be a true marksman and get kills from hundreds of meters away, this is the best sniper to use. 3. MORS Best MORS Warzone Loadout Barrel: Tonne Heavy Barrel – Stock: Superlite-90 Stock – Ammunition: HVP Anti-Material Slug – Rear Grip: OP-980 Grip – Bolt: Quickbolt – The MORS is still a great sniper, with its impressive range and damage helping it stand out. Even after countless nerfs to key stats like ADS speed and bullet velocity, it remains a top-tier option. With the HVP Anti-Material Slug equipped, it can one shot at any range, making it a direct competitor to the KATT-AMR. Which is better is largely a matter of preference, so be sure to try them both. 4. XRK Stalker Best XRK Stalker Warzone Loadout Muzzle: Sonic Suppressor XL – Barrel: Fission 60 Barrel – Laser: SL Razorhawk Laser Light – Ammunition: .50 Cal High Grain Rounds – Bolt: XRK Stalker Light Bolt – The XRK Stalker used to be the best sniper rifle in Resurgence, thanks to its fast mobility and handling. However, the Kar98k has since dethroned it, leaving this weapon out of favor. Even so, the XRK Stalker is still competitive, as sniping as a whole is so strong. Just don’t be surprised when someone else outguns you using its successor. 5. MCPR-300 Best MCPR-300 Warzone Loadout Muzzle: Sonic Suppressor L – Barrel: 22″ OMX-456 – Laser: SL Razorhawk Laser Light – Ammunition: .300 Mag Explosive – Magazine: 5 Round Magazine – The addition of newer MW3 snipers has left the MCPR-300 in a difficult position. It’s hard to justify using these days, but it is still the best MW2 sniper rifle, with the MCPR-300 holding its own as long as you’ve got the skill required. It’s not meta in Season 5 Reloaded, but if you want some variety, this rendition of the Barrett .50 cal still hits hard and has good handling and mobility. All Warzone Sniper Rifles ranked There are 14 sniper rifles in Season 5 Reloaded, with the latest addition being the JAK Cataclysm conversion kit for the RPK. Additionally, balance changes in this update have affected the meta, switching up the rankings. Here’s how all of Warzone’s sniper rifles rank from strongest to weakest, assuming you are using the best loadout possible for each weapon: Kar98k – KATT-AMR – MORS – XRK Stalker – MCPR-300 – FJX Imperium – JAK Cataclysm – Victus XMR – KV Inhibitor – Signal 50 – Carrack .300 – Longbow – SP-X 80 – LA-B 330 – For more meta Warzone weapons, check out the best Assault Rifles, SMGs, and which guns are the most popular right now. Also, you’ll want to make sure you are using the best controller settings and PC settings possible to optimize your experience.

Best Warzone 2.0 Shotgun class loadouts: Attachments, Setup, Perks Shotguns pack a walloping punch yet consistently fly under the radar in Warzone 2. The class is perfect for clearing out buildings or making aggressive pushers, but which are the best? Here’s every shotgun ranked from worst to best. SMGs and akimbo pistols have dominated Warzone 2’s meta. Akimbo pistols fell out of relevancy after the Season 1 Reloaded update, and on February 24, a balancing patch finally nerfed the Fennec 45 into oblivion. The Lachmann Sub (MP5) emerged as everyone’s favorite new short-range option, but the door is wide open for other challengers. Season 2 introduced Warzone 2’s first Resurgence map, Ashika Island. While Al Mazrah’s expansive desert environment hurts shotguns’ viability, Ashika Island perfectly suits up close and personal engagements. If you’re still playing the original BR, you can check out the best shotguns in Warzone Caldera here. If you’ve moved onto the long-awaited sequel, you’re in the right place to find out exactly which Warzone 2 shotguns you should use and why. We’re ranking them all from worst to best and giving you the strongest meta loadout for each. The first number represents the Y axis, and the second corresponds with the X axis for the weapon tuning. 5. Bryson 800 Muzzle: Bryson Choke (+0.07, +0.28) – Laser: VLK LZR 7mW – Stock: XTEN Ripcord Stock (-2.19, -2.09) – Underbarrel: FSS Sharkfin 90 (-0.70, +0.31) – Guard: Demo X50 Tactical Pump (+0.10, -0.16) – The Bryson 800 deals plenty of damage in close-range engagements, but a slow fire rate and reload time keep the weapon from being viable in Warzone 2. Dragon’sood 300 Muzzle: Sakin DB 107 (-0.95, 0.00) – Barrel: 11″ Bryson Special (-0.36,”+0.40) – Laser: Point-G3P 04 – Stock: Heist Stock Mod – Ammunition: 12 Gauge Dragon’s Breath (+0.70, -3.60) – Fans of Modern Warfare 2019 will be familiar with the Lockwood 300. The weapon was an absolute nuisance, but it’s a different story in Warzone 2. Shotguns don’t one-shot-kill fully armored players, so a painstakingly slow reload speed makes this a weapon to avoid. 3. Bryson 890 Muzzle: Bryson Improved Choke – Barrel: 18″ Demo Firewall (+0.31, +0.37) – Laser: Point-G3P 04 – Stock: Sawed Off Mod – Guard: Demo Dropzone Pump (0.00, -0.17) – If you like the Bryson 800 but can’t overcome its shortcomings, the Bryson 890 is a better version. The weapon has a detachable magazine, which makes reloading faster, but we don’t suggest choosing this weapon over other options. 2. Expedite 12 Barrel: 18.5″ Battlemaster (+0.26, +0.40) – Laser: Point-G3P 04 – Stock: Bryson Reverb-55 Stock (-2.84, +1.47) – Underbarrel: FTAC Ripper 56 (+0.67, -0.32) – Bolt: Expedite L-Bolt – Recoil can be a slight issue while using the Expedite 12, but if you are able to control your shots, the Expedite 12 is an excellent close-range option. The semi-automatic shotgun fires faster than its pump action counterparts, yet it still deals enough damage to be extremely viable in most short engagements. 1. KV Broadside Barrel: Gunner D20 (0.00, +0.34) – Bolt: Dashbolt 60 – Stock: VLK Stockless – Ammunition: 12 Guage Dragon’s Breath (+0.50, 0.00) – Magazine: 25 Shell Drum – Season 2 introduced the KV Broadside, which is far and away the best shotgun in Warzone 2. YouTuber JGOD broke down Warzone 2’s best close-ranged weapons and explained why the Broadisde is “broken.” The shotgun can two-shot killing enemies thanks to Dragon’s Breath rounds, and its sub 300 ms TTK is one of the best for any weapon. That rounds off the best SMGs in Warzone 2.0 right now. Be sure to check back in the future because as the meta shifts, so will this list.

Best Warzone 2.0 Perk Package: Base, Bonus, and Ultimate Perks Warzone 2 offers players a variety of Perks that empower users in various ways. With there being so many Perks it can be hard to know which to use. These are the best Perks and Perk Package to use in Warzone 2 after the Season 3 Reloaded update. Perks have been a part of Call of Duty since 2008, with the original Modern Warfare introducing them. They help differentiate playstyles by giving players tools that benefit how they want to approach each match. It was only natural that Perks would also come to Warzone and later Warzone 2. The battle royale game changes the longstanding Perk system as they are now categorized as Base, Bonus, and Ultimate Perks, each placed based on their perceived impact. Perks are constantly rebalanced and occasionally new Perks are added to change up the meta. To stay informed and make sure your Warzone 2 loadouts aren’t out of date it’s best to regularly consult this list. Here are the best Perks and Perk Package to use in Warzone 2. Contents Best Warzone 2 Perks It can be difficult to precisely rank Warzone 2’s perks as they all excel in different situations. While one Perk may be useless most of the time it could save your life when relevant. To account for this our ranking of the best Perks in Warzone 2 is based on how impactful the Perk is across a range of situations. Some niche Perks can still be powerful but are generally not worth using over the alternatives. Base Perks Overkill – Double Time – Scavenger – Tracker – Battle Hardened – Bomb Squad – Strong Arm – Overkill is easily the best Base Perk in Warzone 2 as it lets you take two primary weapons from a single loadout. Having two weapons cover each other’s weaknesses allows for more varied play and helps avoid situations where you can’t be effective. Double Time, Scavenger, and Tracker are all great options to partner with our top pick. Double Time and Tracker are useful for chasing and tracking down enemies, giving you the edge during tight gunfights. Meanwhile, Scavenger will keep both your ammo and armor plates topped up throughout the match. Battle Hardened and Bomb Squad are more situational but can save your life when relevant. Battle Hardened provides protection against powerful tactical equipment such as Flash and Stun Grenades while Bomb Squad makes it possible to survive a hit from lethal equipment like Claymores and Frag Grenades. Strong Arm is the only Base Perk that is never worth using. The extra throwing distance granted by Strong Arm is extremely situational and won’t help in the majority of cases. Being able to cook Frag Grenades faster is beneficial but that alone isn’t enough to use this Perk. Bonus Perks Fast Hands – Resupply – Cold-Blooded – Spotter – Focus – Fast Hands is an obvious pick for the Bonus Perk slot as it lets you reload guns faster. Faster reloads mean more time shooting and less time standing around. As an added bonus, this Perk also increases weapon swap speed which synergizes well with Overkill. Resupply and Cold-Blooded are more playstyle dependent but can be powerful. Resupply is useful for replenishing Smoke Grenades to move around safely, making positioning errors less costly. As for Cold-Blooded, it directly counters High Alert which is fantastic given how prevalent that Ultimate Perk is. Although not top-tier, Spotter can be useful as it allows you to spot dangerous Lethal Equipment like Proximity Mines through walls. This can be used to figure out if a team is playing in a certain building which is especially powerful in the end game where intel is key. Focus is the weakest Bonus Perk. It reduces flinch and extends the duration you can hold your breath for but neither of these is that helpful. Most weapons aren’t too affected by flinching and High Alert makes it difficult to hold your breath and aim at an enemy player for a long duration without them reacting. Ultimate Perks High Alert – Ghost – Quick Fix – Birdseye – Survivor – The best Ultimate Perk is Warzone 2 is High Alert. When a High Alert user is aimed at by another player a yellow outline will appear revealing the direction of the enemy. That kind of intel is invaluable, especially in Warzone 2 where the shorter TTK can make it difficult to survive being shot from behind. Ghost is a close second as it prevents players from showing up on UAVs and Heartbeat Sensors. For stealthy playstyles focused more on winning than getting kills this Ultimate Perk is extremely effective. Quick Fix is a strong Ultimate Perk as it lets you regen health after applying an Armor Plate. This is fantastic for disengaging from a gunfight and then catching your pursuer off guard when they don’t expect you to have healed up so quickly. Both Birdseye and Survivor aren’t impactful enough to justify using. Birdseye was once the best perk in Warzone 2 but after its nerfs all it does is increase the speed of UAV pings. As for Survivor, it automatically pings downed enemies but you should be pinging downed enemies anyway to help your teammates. That’s all for four our guide on the best Perks and Perk Packages in Warzone 2! For more of our Warzone 2 coverage, check out these guides below: Best Warzone weapons: Ultimate tier list with meta loadouts | Best Warzone 2 loadouts: Meta weapons and classes to dominate in Al Mazrah | Call of Duty 2024: Early leaks, concept art, Warzone 2.0, Treyarch & more | Call of Duty 2023: Early leaks, Modern Warfare 2, Warzone 2, more | Best M4 Warzone 2 loadout | Best Modern Warfare 2 weapons: Ultimate tier list with the best classes | Modern Warfare 2 best settings on PC for FPS, graphics, visibility, more

Best Warzone 2.0 Marksman Rifles class loadouts: Attachments, setup, Perks ActivisionMarksman Rifles aren’t usually the go-to choice for most players but with their impressive effective range and fantastic TTK, they are often underrated. Here’s our ranking and loadouts of the best Marksman Rifle in Warzone 2 ranked from worst to best. Marksman Rifles are a series of primarily semi-automatic weapons that sit between Battle Rifles and Sniper Rifles. They aren’t easy to use but offer fantastic TTKs for those that learn how to use them properly. They are precision weapons that excel at mid to long range and benefit greatly from headshots. Most Markman Rifles are capable of downing an enemy player in Warzone 2 with just three shots. With a large enough magazine that means that it’s possible to wipe an entire squad out without reloading. Using the right loadout with Marksman Rifles is extremely important as they tend to have significant downsides that can make them hard to use if not accounted for. Best Warzone 2 Marksman Rifles 8. Lockwood MK2 Muzzle: Nilsoound 90 – Laser: Accu-Shot 5mW Laser – Optic: VLK 4.0 Optic – Lever: Longhorn Lever – Ammunition: .45 GVT High Velocity – Although stylish, this cowboy lever action rifle is amongst the worst guns in Warzone 2. Its slow fire rate and low damage per shot does not work well in a battle royale environment. The Lockwood MK2 might be fun to use in multiplayer but is never worth using in Warzone 2. 7. Crossbow Arms: SO Momenti – Laser: Accu-Shot 5mW Laser – Optic: Forge Tac Delta 4 – Wire: 28-Strand Cable – Stock: Speedtrak Echo – The Crossbow is a gimmicky weapon that whilst enjoyable isn’t necessarily a good choice. It has an extremely slow fire rate and can’t kill in one shot against fully plated enemies, even with the explosive bolts equipped. It does have fast handling though and can be fun to use on occasion. 6. SA-B 50 Muzzle: Polarfire-S – Laser: Corio LAZ-44 V3 – Optic: Forge Tac Delta 4 – Ammunition: .308 High Velocity – Bolt: FFS ST87 Bolt – Bolt action rifles don’t perform well in Warzone 2 unless they have access to the Explosive Rounds, enabling one shot kills. The SA-B 50 can’t use those rounds and is therefore better suited to quick scoping in multiplayer than it is sniping in Warzone 2. 5. SP-R 208 Laser: Corio LAZ-44 v3 – Optic: Forge Tac Delta 4 – Magazine: 10 Round Mag – Ammunition: 7.62 High Velocity – Bolt: FSS ST87 Bolt – The SA-B 50’s bigger brother is marginally better due to its more forgiving damage multipliers and higher bullet velocity. Even so, it suffers from the same problems as the SA-B 50, requiring multiple shots with a slow firing gun to secure a kill. 4. LM-S Muzzle: Tempus GH50 – Optic: SZ Recharge-DX – Underbarrel: Commando Foregrip – Ammunition: 7.62 High Velocity – Magazine: 20 Round Mag – Entering the top half of the list, the LM-S is the first marksman rifle actually worth using in Warzone 2. This semi-auto primary offers the best fire rate in its category as well as well above average handling. It’s a decent choice for those wanting a more aggressive marksman rifle build. 3. TAQ-M Muzzle: Tempus GH50 – Barrel: 15.5″ Theta-X13 – Optic: SZ Recharge-DX – Ammunition: 6.5mm High Velocity – Magazine: 20 Round Mag – Where the TAQ-M struggles due to its slower fire rate it makes up for with outstanding handling characteristics and a fast reload. This semi-auto is a great choice for mid-range engagements and for downing multiple players in quick succession. 2. EBR-14 Muzzle: Tempus GH50 – Barrel: 18″ T300 Barrel – Optic: SZ Recharge-DX – Ammunition: 7.62 High Velocity – Magazine: 20 Round Mag – If it’s a true marksman rifle experience you want, look no further. The EBR-14 is a proper DMR with great handling, a fast recenter speed, and an outstanding TTK. It’s also extremely versatile with it performing well at both mid-range and from afar thanks to its impressive effective range. 1. Tempus Torrent Muzzle: Tempus GH50 – Barrel: 12.5″ Rugged ZN – Optic: SZ Recharge-DX – Ammunition: 7.62 High Velocity – Magazine: 50 Round Drum – Added in Season 2 Reloaded, the Tempus Torrent has remained the best marksman rifle in Warzone 2 since its introduction. Even after it got nerfed, this semi-auto primary offers everything the EBR-14 does but also gains access to an insane 50 Round Drum. With a magazine that big you’ll never run out of ammo making the Tempus Torrent an excellent choice for ammo efficiency. As an added bonus it also has one of the best fire rates in the category and handling comparable to the LM-S. That’s all for our best Marksman Rifles in Warzone 2 guide! For more of our Call of Duty coverage, check out these guides below: Best Warzone weapons: Ultimate tier list with meta loadouts | Best Warzone 2 loadouts: Meta weapons and classes to dominate in Al Mazrah | Call of Duty 2024: Early leaks, concept art, Warzone 2.0, Treyarch & more | Call of Duty 2023: Early leaks, Modern Warfare 2, Warzone 2, more | Best M4 Warzone 2 loadout | Best Modern Warfare 2 weapons: Ultimate tier list with the best classes | Modern Warfare 2 best settings on PC for FPS, graphics, visibility, more

Best Warzone 2.0 LMG class loadouts: Attachments, Setup, Perks ActivisionWarzone 2.0 brings all of MW2’s LMGS into Al-Mazrah,Ashika Island, and Vondel but which should you be using? Here, we rank the best LMG in Warzone 2. LMGs are unique weapons that can excel in the right situation. They sacrifice weapon handling and mobility in favor of a fast TTK and a huge magazine. These beasts are perfect for taking down multiple players in quick succession or suppressing an opposing team. But, with six unique LMGs to pick from, it can be difficult to make the call on which you should drop with. They all have their own strengths and are best suited to different playstyles. We’re ranking them all from worst to best, as well as recommending attachments. Here’s our ranking of the best LMG in Warzone 2. 6. Sakin MG38 Best Sakin MG38 Warzone 2.0 loadout Muzzle: Polarfire-S (-0.70, +0.46) – Barrel: 20″ Bruen Silver Series (+0.34, +0.18) – Optic: AIM OP-V4 (_0.71, +0.25) – Underbarrel: Edge-47 Grip (+0.46, +0.18) – Rear Grip: STIP-40 Grip (+0.71, +0.25) – The Sakin MG38 is still a fine weapon, but it’s more a matter of other LMGs improving. Players can still expect a top-tier TTK speed, but it comes with a massive trade-off with slow mobility. 5. RAAL MG Best RAAL MG Warzone 2.0 loadout Muzzle: Shred CP90 (+0.44, +0.16) – Barrel: 21″ EXF Rhino Barrel (+0.42, -0.34) – Laser: Corio LAZ-44 V3 (+0.39, +32.90) – Optic: Aim OP-V4 (+0.58, +1.80) – Underbarrel: XRK Dune Grip (+0.36, +0.28) – The RAAL MG packs a walloping punch, but its blistering fast TTK speed no longer dominates other weapons as it used to. A weaker damage profile and painfully slow mobility make the RAAL MG extremely unusable in most situations. 4. 556 Icarus Best 556 Icarus Warzone 2.0 loadout Muzzle: Harbinger D20 (+1.04, +0.61) – Optic: Aim OP-V4 (-1.35, +1.80) – Underbarrel: FTAC Ripper (+0.34, +0.26) – Ammunition: 5.5 High Velocity (-0.34, -4.06) – Rear Grip: Sakin ZX Grip (+0.68, +0.36) – The 556 Icarus is effectively the M4’s big brother with handling stats closer to an AR than an LMG. Its recoil can be difficult to get used to but it’s arguably one of the only LMGs suited for more aggressive playstyles. 3. RPK Best RPK Warzone 2.0 loadout Muzzle: TY-LR8 (+0.77, +0.18) – Optic: Aim OP-V4 (+2.39, 0.00) – Underbarrel: FTAC Ripper 56 (+0.46, -0.27) – Ammunition: 7.62 High Velocity (-0.45, +3.19) – Rear Grip: Demo X2 Grip (+0.48, +0.17) – Once the king of Warzone 2, the RPK has fallen off in popularity following a series of nerfs. Even after the nerfs it is still a fine choice though thanks to its fast reload relative to its magazine size and above average handling for an LMG. Just be aware that the RPK has much more recoil than it used to. 2. HCR 56 Best HCR 56 Warzone 2.0 loadout Muzzle: XTen Ported 290 (+0.46, +0.17) – Optic: Aim OP-V4 (+1.77, 0.00) – Underbarrel: FTAC Ripper 56 (+0.57, +0.28) – Ammunition: 5.56 High Velocity (-0.41, -2.03) – Rear Grip: Stip-40 Grip (+0.65, +0.29) – The HCR 56 was widely regarded as one of the best long-range meta weapons in Season 4. The mid-season update knocked the easy-to-use LMG down a peg, but it is still a great option. Somewhat fast mobility and a laser-accurate recoil pattern elevate the HCR 56 above other class options. 1. Rapp H Best Rapp H Warzone 2.0 loadout Muzzle: Tempus GH50 (+0.59, +0.29) – Optic: Aim OP-V4 (+0.87, 0,00) – Underbarrel: FTAC Ripper 56 (+0.49, -0.25) – Ammunition: 7.62 High Velocity (-0.50, +6.10) – Rear Grip: Lachmann TCG-10 (+0.48, +0.19) – After the Season 4 Reloaded update, the Rapp H’s 900 ms TTK ranks third among long-range meta weapons. An extremely fast fire rate and easy-to-control recoil pattern not only makes the RAPP H the best LMG in Warzone 2, but one of the best weapons in the game. That rounds off the best LMGs in Warzone 2.0 right now. Be sure to check back in the future because as the meta shifts, so will this list.

Best Warzone Assault Rifle loadouts in Season 5 Reloaded ActivisionIt doesn’t matter what Warzone map you’re playing; ARs are always a great option thanks to their versatility, with the best assault rifles often dominating the battle royale’s meta. Assault rifles are the most adaptable weapons in Call of Duty. Whether you’re shooting an enemy 10 meters away or 100 meters away, an assault rifle can get the job done. Their ability to perform in most situations is a massive strength that’s exclusive to this weapon class. With already strong options like the MCW and Holger 556 receiving buffs in Season 5 Reloaded, assault rifles will play an important part in this season’s meta. Equally, a nerf to the dominant STG44 has opened a window for another AR to take over, so your loadouts will need updating. Even though ARs are in a good spot, not all of them are worth using. You’ll want to avoid options that lack the TTK, recoil control, and damage range to be worthwhile, as running them could ruin your classes. Best Assault Rifle loadouts These are the five best assault rifle loadouts to run in Season 5 Reloaded to make sure that you are using the strongest builds possible: 1. STG44 Best STG44 Warzone loadout Muzzle: Quartermaster Suppressor – Barrel: Bruen Acrux Heavy Barrel – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Underbarrel: DR-6 Handstop – Magazine: 50 Round Drum – In Season 5, the STG44 outclassed everything else, and it wasn’t close. A hefty nerf to its damage in Season 5 Reloaded has closed the gap to its competitors significantly, but this gun’s ease of use at practically any range means it is still the best assault rifle in Warzone. Until it’s freakishly low recoil is adjusted, that seems unlikely to change anytime soon. 2. SVA 545 Best SVA 545 Warzone loadout Muzzle: VT-7 Spiritfire Suppressor – Barrel: STV Precision Barrel – Optic: Corio Eagleseye 2.5x – Magazine: 60 Round Mag – Rear Grip: Citadel Grip – The SVA 545 is great at long-range thanks to its extremely low recoil and fast TTK. Its damage hardly drops off at all while firing at a distance, so you can bring it with you into any encounter and depend on it to get the job done. Regardless of whether you use it in burst mode or full auto, the SVA 545 remains a fantastic option for those wanting a strong yet consistent weapon that’s easy to use. 3. Holger 556 Best Holger 556 Warzone loadout Muzzle: Quartermaster Suppressor – Barrel: Chrios-6 Match – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Stock: RB Addle Assault Stock – Magazine: 40 Round Mag – The Holger 556 was already a meta contender in Season 5, so the damage range buff it received in Season 5 Reloaded has only made it even better. The gun has high damage, low recoil, and good mobility, which makes it strong in both close quarters and at medium range. It’s a true jack-of-all-trades primary weapon, but its smaller magazine can be a hindrance in Trios and Quads. 4. MTZ-556 Best MTZ-556 Warzone loadout Muzzle: Quartermaster Suppressor – Barrel: MTZ Clinch Pro Barrel – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Stock: MTZ Marauder Stock – Magazine: 50 Round Drum – Thanks to a surprise buff back in Season 5, the MTZ-556 has remained one of the best assault rifles in Warzone. It is a fantastic long-range option that has little recoil, but the MTZ-556 also hits hard up close thanks to its AR-SMG hybrid roots. This is one of the rare weapons that is equally strong on both Resurgence and Battle Royale, which goes to show just how good an option it is right now. 5. BAL-27 Best BAL-27 Warzone loadout Muzzle: Quartermaster Suppressor – Barrel: Crown-H3 Barrel – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Stock: Ardent Tac Stock – Magazine: 60 Round Mag – A damage range buff in Season 5 Reloaded was finally enough to push the BAL-27 into the meta. It’s been a strong option for some time now, offering great damage thanks to its fire rate that ramps up as you hold the trigger. This can take some getting used to, but those who master this sci-fi assault rifle’s unique characteristics will be dominating lobbies in no time. All Warzone Assault Rifles ranked There are currently 25 assault rifles in Warzone Season 5 Reloaded, with the latest addition being the STG44, a throwback to the iconic AR that was meta in World at War, Vanguard, and even Advanced Warfare. Here’s every assault rifle ranked from best to worst, assuming you use the best loadout possible for each weapon: STG44 – SVA 545 – Holger 556 – MTZ-556 – BAL-27 – MCW – BP50 – Tempus Razorback – M16 – Kastov 762 – M13B – FR Avancer – FR 5.56 – DG-56 – Kastov 545 – STB 556 – RAM-7 – Chimera – ISO Hemlock – TR-76 Geist – Lachmann 556 – TAQ-56 – M4 – Kastov 74u – M13C – If you fancy using something that isn’t an assault rifle, check out these meta SMG loadouts, including the best builds possible for the FJX Horus, Striker 9, and more. You’ll also want to make sure you are using the best graphics settings and controller settings to streamline your experience.

Best Volkssturmgewehr CoD Vanguard class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Proficiency, Setup ActivisionIf you’re looking for an Assault Rifle loadout in CoD Vanguard that packs a mean punch, then you’ll want to get acquainted with the Volkssturmgewehr. From the strongest attachments to ideal weapon perks, here’s how to make the best of this AR. Assault Rifles are always prominent in Call of Duty titles, and Vanguard is no different. While the STG can be one of the most dominant in the game, the Volkssturmgewehr, or “Volk,” is still one of the most popular guns. While this is one of the last guns you unlock in the game, it certainly can be the deadliest of the bunch. With good range and nice damage, here’s everything you need to know about building the best Volkssturmgewehr loadout in CoD Vanguard. Contents Best Volkssturmgewehr Vanguard loadout – Best Volkssturmgewehr Vanguard class (Perks, Equipment, & Field Upgrade) – How to unlock the Volkssturmgewehr in CoD Vanguard – Alternative to the Volkssturmgewehr in CoD Vanguard – Best Volkssturmgewehr Vanguard loadout Muzzle: F8 Stabilizer – Barrel: Krausnick 428MM 05V – Optic: Slate Reflector – Stock: Reisdorf 22V Adjustable – Underbarrel: M3 Ready Grip – Magazine: 7.62 Russian Gorenko 30 Round Mags – Ammo Type: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Stippled Grip – Proficiency: Sleight of Hand – Kit: On-Hand – Up first is the F8 Stabilizer Muzzle paired up with the Krausnick 428MM 05V Barrel. When used together, these two attachments heavily increase the damage range as well as the accuracy of the Volk, allowing it to compete with other ARs in the class. Next up is the Optic, which all comes down to personal preference. To avoid any major penalty to your ADS speed, we opted for the Slate Reflector, as it has no cons and is one of the most used sights in the game. Moving on, we have the Reisdorf 22V Adjustable Stock, as it has the least amount of downsides for a stock. This increases the initial recoil and accuracy, which is essential and only affects the sprint to fire time (we’ll make up for that in other attachments). Keeping the weapon sturdy is the M3 Ready Grip Underbarrel. This makes up for the loss of sprint to fire speed as well as increasing the ADS speed and controlling the recoil. Pair that up with Stippled Grip in the rear, and this gun turns into a laser beam at nearly every distance. The hardest decision comes with the 7.62 Russian Gorenko 30 Round Mags. There are two options: You can not use a magazine attachment at all, or use this, as it heavily increases accuracy and recoil control but hurts the rate of fire and range of the gun. All in all, if you want to use a mag, this 7.62 Russian is the way to go. To help make up for the loss in rate of fire, we will use Lengthened ammo type to speed up our bullets. This will make the weapon feel even more like a hitscan AR, which is essential in Vanguard. Rounding things out, we’ll use Sleight of Hand for our Proficiency slot and On-Hand in the Kit. Since you can not use Vital on the Volk, the next best option is Sleight of Hand so you can reload faster and stay in the fight. On-Hand will help you get those grenades out faster and hold down spawns. Best Volkssturmgewehr Vanguard class (Perks, Equipment, & Field Upgrade) Perk 1: Ghost – Perk 2: Radar – Perk 3: Double Time – Secondary: Machine Pistol – Lethal: MK2 Frag Grenade – Tactical: No 69 Stun Grenade – Field Upgrade: Dead Silence – For the remainder of your Volkssturmgewehr loadout, it’s important that you are running the right Perks, Equipment, and Field Upgrades to make sure you obliterate your enemies. When it comes to Perks, there are two options for your first one. We have selected Ghost for this loadout, but if you want to remain quiet, then Ninja is another good option. However, due to the spamming of Spy Planes, Ghost is a safer option as you want to hold angles with an assault rifle. For Perk 2, you’ll want to use Radar, as the devs have elected to change the way the minimap works in CoD. Radar is by far the most essential map to know when enemies are and rack up a ton of kills. Finally, we’ll turn to Double Time for Perk 3, as you can fly out of spawn faster and get back to that god-tier head glitch. If you find yourself running out of ammo and don’t have time to reload, then we have the sidearm for you. You’ll want to have the Machine Pistol stored in your back pocket so you can whip it out and finish off enemies in an instance. Read More: Best MP40 Vanguard loadout – For Equipment, the MK2 Frag Grenade is always a safe option. For the tactical, use the No 69 Stun Grenade because they are good to slow down enemies – and if you stun an enemy, you can get an additional 100 score for an elimination. There are many good Field Upgrades to pick from, but since we aren’t using Ninja, we’ll want to use Dead Silence so we can rotate or sneak up on enemies without them knowing. If you choose to run Ninja, then Armor is another great option. How to unlock the Volkssturmgewehr in CoD Vanguard To unlock the Volk all you need to do is play the game and level up. This gun is available to you when you reach level 55. While that can take some time, you might want to take advantage of Double XP tokens or weekends that occur to help speed this process up. Alternative to the Volkssturmgewehr in CoD Vanguard If you try out the Volk and realize it’s not for you, then you will probably want to give the STG44 a try, as it is one of the most used weapons in Vanguard. That’s everything there is to our best Volkssturmgewehr loadout in Vanguard. While it can take a bit to unlock, it can still be one of the deadliest weapons the game has to offer. Make sure to check back with every major weapon tuning update as we will adjust this loadout guide accordingly. Looking for more Call of Duty: Vanguard updates and information? Check our list of guides below: Best CoD Vanguard FOV settings | Best MP40 Vanguard loadout | Best M1928 Vanguard loadout | Every CoD Vanguard perk | Best Vanguard controller settings | Unlock Atomic camo

Best Victus XMR Warzone 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks ActivisionThe Victus XMR is among the best sniper rifles in Warzone 2 and thanks to recent changes is among the chosen ones capable of one-shotting opponents from afar with the explosive rounds. So here’s our best Victus XMR meta loadout for Warzone 2’s battle royale. Introduced in the Warzone 2 Season 1 update, the Victus XMR is a “hard-hitting, bolt action sniper rifle with .50 cal BMG ammunition,” based on the real-world AW50. Alongside the MCPR-300 and FJX Imperium, the Victus XMR is the best sniper rifle in Season 3 for insta-killing enemies at long-distance. While the gun lacks mobility, it makes up for it in raw firepower which is essential for dominating foes on Al Mazrah and Ashika Island. Here’s the best loadout for the Victus XMR, including the attachments, perks, and equipment to use. Contents Best Victus XMR Warzone 2 loadout – Best Victus XMR Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the Victus XMR in Warzone 2 – Best Victus XMR alternatives in Warzone 2 – Best Victus XMR Warzone 2 loadout Attachments Muzzle: Nilsound 90 Silencer – Barrel: Mack 8 33.5 Super – Laser: Accu-Shot 5MW Laser – Stock: XRX Rise 50 – Ammunition: .50 Cal Explosive – For our loadout, we focused on making the weapon one-shot enemies with ease and made sure it was powerful when used at long range. To do so you’ll need to use the .50 Cal Explosive ammunition as it isn’t possible to one shot against a fully plated enemy without it. The downside to the Explosive rounds is that they noticeably decrease the Victus XMR’s bullet velocity. To offset this it’s best to use both the Nilsound 90 Silencer muzzle attachment and Mack 8 33.5 Super barrel. As an added bonus the silencer will also make any shots fired quieter. Since both the silencer and barrel slow down the Victus XMR it’s best to use the two remaining attachment slots to speed up the ADS. The best attachments for this are the Accu-Shot 5MW Laser and XRK Rise 50. After the Season 3 patch, it’s better to use the Accu-Shot 5MW Laser than the VLK LZR 7MW as the latter has an extremely visible laser that can give your position away. Both provide the same ADS increase so you aren’t missing out on much anyway. Best Victus XMR Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Overkill – Base Perk 2: Double Time – Bonus Perk: Spotter – Ultimate Perk: High Alert – Lethal: Throwing Knife – Tactical Equipment: Smoke Grenades – Having Overkill is essential for any Sniper Rifle loadout as it allows you to equip an SMG or AR to provide a short-range option when not holding a sniping angle. Next, Double Time is a nice quality-of-life perk to have as it makes getting around the map easier. The 30% crouch movement speed increase shouldn’t be overlooked either as it can be useful whilst trying to stay quiet and sneak up on an enemy team. Spotter ensures you’ll never be caught off guard by enemy equipment, killstreaks, or field upgrades. This is particularly useful when entering buildings where enemy teams could have set up claymores and proximity mines. For the Ultimate Perk, it’s best to use High Alert as this perk gives you a chance of fighting back when shot from behind. Since most players don’t use Cold Blooded you’ll receive a lot of intel on where other teams are positioned using this. We round off the setup with a Throwing Knife for finishing off opponents quickly and Smoke Grenades to help reposition and create cover in areas that would otherwise put you at risk. How to unlock the Victus XMR in Warzone 2 The Victus XMR Sniper Rifle was originally unlocked by completing Sector A7 of the Season 1 Battle Pass. However, those who missed out can still acquire the sniper rifle by completing its respective challenge or picking up and exfilling with any Victus XMR variant in DMZ. Best Victus XMR alternatives in Warzone 2 We believe that the Victis XMR offers some of the best damage in the Sniper Rifle class, but if it’s not cutting things for you, we recommend trying the MCPR-300. Equipped with devastating damage as well as being simple to control, this sniper can kill in one shot and is overall among the most consistent Warzone 2 sniper rifles. That’s all for our Victus XMR loadout! For more of our Warzone 2 coverage, check out these guides below: Do Warzone skins carry over to Warzone 2? | What are Strongholds in Warzone 2? | All Warzone 2 vehicles and Gas Stations | Does Warzone 2 have SBMM? | How do Warzone 2 circles work?

Best VEL 46 Warzone 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks ActivisionThe VEL 46 brings back the iconic MP7 to Warzone 2, and it might just be the deadliest iteration of it in the franchise’s history. Here’s our best VEL 46 loadout in Warzone 2, including the best attachments, Perks, and equipment. Warzone 2 Season 5 is here, and players have already begun discovering what the meta weapons are. All signs point to the Lachmann Sub and ISO 45 dominating the game’s short-range meta, but a substantial VEL 46 throws a wrench in proceedings. The reliable SMG saw its neck, upper, and lower torso damage multipliers increase. The VEL 46 is one of Warzone 2’s most devasting close-range weapons and has proven a popular choice. Being this game’s rendition of the MP7, it works well as both a close-range SMG for aggressive play and as a sniper support to partner with your one-shot primary. We’ve put together the best VEL 46 loadout in Warzone 2, so you can make the most of this fan-favorite SMG in your next match. Contents Best VEL 46 Warzone 2 loadout attachments – Best VEL 46 Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the VEL 46 in Warzone 2 – Best VEL 46 alternatives in Warzone 2 – Best VEL 46 Warzone 2 loadout attachments Muzzle: Spiral V3.5 Flash Hider (-0.82, +0.29) – Laser: VLK LZR 7MW (-0.36, -35.98) – Stock: Assault-60 Stock (-2.84, -1.70) – Rear Grip: Schlager Solider Grip (-0.62, -0.37) – Magazine: 50-Round Mag – Our best VEL 46 loadout in Warzone 2 is geared around making the SMG as competitive as possible at close range. We start with the Spiral V3.5 Flash Hider, which reduces recoil, making the VEL 46 easier to control. Next up, we’ve gone for attachments that help the SMG compete with other close-range meta weapons in up close and personal engagements. First, the VLK LZR 7MW laser improves ADS, sprint-to-fire speed, and aiming stability only at the cost of the laser being visible. And then we recommend equipping the Assault-60 Stock and Schlager Solider Grip to further improve aim down sight and sprint to fire speed. Last up is 50 Round Mags, ensuring there’s always enough ammo in the tank to deal with multiple enemies at once. This should suffice in solos, duos, and trios, but those who primarily play quads should consider using the 60-Round Mag instead. Best VEL 46 Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Double Time – Base Perk 2: Overkill – Bonus Perk: Fast Hands – Ultimate Perk: High Alert – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical Equipment: Stun Grenade – The best VEL 46 loadout comes to life when using an aggressive playstyle, so combining it with the Double Time Perk makes sense. This increases tactical sprint time which pairs nicely with the SMG’s high mobility. Overkill and Fast Hands work in unison to create an incredible perk combination. Overkill lets you pick a suitable secondary weapon that covers the VEL 46’s weaknesses like a sniper whilst Fast Hands makes it possible to quickly switch between those weapons and be prepared for any gunfight. In the Ultimate Perk slot is High Alert, which provides a helpful ping on the screen when an enemy you can’t see has their sights on you. This gives you more time to react and is a must to avoid getting shot in the back when trying to move around the map. When it comes to equipment, we recommend using Semtex to pressure teams that are hiding in buildings, and Stun Grenades to immobilize enemies giving you the opportunity to move in fo an easy kill. How to unlock the VEL 46 in Warzone 2 If you want to give the best VEL 46 loadout a spin, the weapon is unlocked right from the start in Warzone 2. However, you’ll have to hit Level 4 before the Gunsmith is available and attachments can be swapped out. Best VEL 46 alternatives in Warzone 2 Warzone 2 is full of top-quality SMGs, and the ISO 45 is arguably the cream of the crop. the blistering fast SMG shreds through enemies in close-range engagements and dominates every other class option within 10 meters. For more on Warzone 2, be sure to check out some of our other guides: Do Warzone skins carry over to Warzone 2? | What are Strongholds in Warzone 2? | All Warzone 2 vehicles and Gas Stations | Does Warzone 2 have SBMM? | How do Warzone 2 circles work?

Best VEL 46 MW3 loadout: Class setup, attachments, perks ActivisionThe VEL 46 is one of the few MW2 weapons that has managed to stay relevant in Modern Warfare 3, competing with the best the game has to offer. Here’s the best VEL 46 MW3 loadout to use and dominate multiplayer lobbies with ease. Based on the real-world MP7, the VEL 46 is a compact personal defense weapon designed for mobility and close-quarters engagements. It lives up to this role both in Modern Warfare 2 where it first appeared and in Modern Warfare 3 where its legacy has continued. Though MW2 guns were not worth using at launch, some are now competitive and the VEL 46 is one of the best examples of this. It is a powerful primary with some of the best mobility and handling of any available weapon. To dominate with this underutilized SMG you’ll want to use this best VEL 46 MW3 loadout, optimized to make it as mobile as possible while keeping it nice and accurate. Contents Best VEL 46 MW3 loadout – Best VEL 46 MW3 loadout: Perks and equipment – How to unlock the VEL 46 – Best VEL 46 alternatives – Best VEL 46 loadout in Modern Warfare 3 Muzzle: L4R Flash Hider – Optic: Quarters Classic Reflex – Stock: Demo RXT Stock – Underbarrel: DR-6 Handstop – Magazine: 50 Round Mag – This loadout is designed to be used as a traditional SMG, with it benefitting from an aggressive playstyle and keeping gunfights either up close or at medium range. The most important stats for this are mobility and handling which can be greatly boosted using the DR-6 Handstop underbarrel. These key stats are further improved by the Demo RXT Stock, another attachment you’ll want to be using. Though this does marginally increase recoil, this is negligible and doesn’t make the VEL 46 any less accurate in practice. Though the VEL 46 is an accurate gun regardless, it is still a good idea to use a muzzle that reduces recoil such as the L4R Flash Hider. This particular muzzle is fantastic as it hardly affects handling, keeping the VEL 46 feeling snappy. The extended 50 Round Mag is an easy choice as it bumps up the VEL 46’s magazine capacity significantly with no real downside. Finally, a close-range optic like the Quarters Classic Reflex makes it easier to keep targets in sight thanks to the clear reticle it provides. Best VEL 46 MW3 loadout: Perks and equipment Vest: Ninja Vest – Gloves: Assault Gloves – Boots: Climbing Boots – Gear: Hijacked IFF Strobe – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Stim – When it comes to Perks in Modern Warfare 3, the vest is the most important of all. You’ll want to use the Ninja Vest with this class as it eliminates footsteps letting you sprint behind and flank enemies without them noticing. To make moving around the map easier it’s also recommended to equip the Climbing Boots. These improve mantle speed a lot letting you scale great heights in an instant. Partner these with the Assault Gloves to make pushing other players easier and give you the best chance possible of winning a face-off. When you are feeling it with this class it’s possible to go on lengthy killstreaks. To avoid losing these streaks to unavoidable damage, use the Hijacked IFF Strobe. This gear makes it impossible for AI targeting systems to lock on, protecting you from threats like the Overwatch Helo and VTOL Jet. Equipment-wise, Semtex is an easy-to-use lethal that deals big damage and can even kill through EOD Padding on a direct stick. Meanwhile, a Stim is fantastic for instant healing when in a tricky situation. How to unlock the VEL 46 in Modern Warfare 3 The VEL 46 can be unlocked in MW3 by reaching level 55 and then completing its Unlock Challenge. However, if you already played Modern Warfare 2 then the VEL 46 will already be available right away. Best VEL 46 alternatives in Modern Warfare 3 The best VEL 46 alternative is the WSP Swarm, another mobile personal defense weapon that deals incredible damage up close but isn’t as competitive at medium to long range. That’s all for the best VEL 46 MW3 loadout. To improve more of your Modern Warfare 3 loadouts check out these guides on the SMG’s strongest alternatives: Best MW3 guns: Ultimate Tier List | Best Rival-9 Loadout | Best AMR9 Loadout | Best Striker Loadout | Best WSP-9 Loadout | Best Striker 9 Loadout | Best HRM-9 Loadout | Best RAM-9 Loadout | Best WSP Swarm loadout | Best BP50 loadout | Best MTZ-556 loadout

Best Vaznev-9K Warzone 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks ActivisionThe Vaznev-9K is a deadly SMG that’s incredibly powerful in close quarters or even at larger distances when outfitted with certain attachments. This is our best meta Vaznev-9K loadout for Warzone 2 Season 3 Reloaded including attachments, setup, and perks. The Season 3 Reloaded update has seen the Vaznev-9K establish itself as one of the best SMGs in Warzone 2. It has become a fan favorite thanks to its incredible damage, fire rate, adaptability, and easy to control recoil. Regardless of if you’re playing aggressively and pushing another team or playing defensively and holding down a building, the Vaznev-9K is the best gun for the job. This is reflected by its incredible 14.3% pick rate which places it second in popularity only behind the Kastov 762. Here’s the best Vaznev-9K loadout for Warzone 2 equipped with the right attachments and Perks to go ruthless and dominate the competition. Contents Best Vaznev-9K Warzone 2 loadout – Best Vaznev-9K Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the Vaznev-9K in Warzone 2 – Best Vaznev-9K alternatives in Warzone 2 – Best Vaznev-9K Warzone 2 loadout Attachments Muzzle: Lockshot KT85 – Barrel: KAS-1 381mm – Stock: Otrezat Stock – Magazine: 45 Round Mag – Rear Grip: True-TAC Grip – This Vaznev-9K Warzone 2 loadout focuses on making the SMG as accurate as possible without sacrificing too much handling. The Lockshot KT85 muzzle provides a big reduction to horizontal recoil whilst also noticeably improving vertical recoil. Combining that with the True-TAC Grip makes the Vaznev-9K extremely accurate and able to outgun enemy players even in mid-range gunfights. To improve its mid-range further, it’s also best to use the KAS-1 381mm barrel as this improves damage range and bullet velocity. To avoid slowing down the Vaznev too much it’s worth equipping the Otrezat Stock. This stock attachment greatly improves aim walking speed and sprint speed keeping the Vaznev mobile and feeling like an SMG. Finally, the 45 Round Mag is a must as the Vaznev-9K’s default 30 round magazine isn’t ideal for Warzone. The extra rounds provided by this attachment make it much easier to down multiple enemies before having to reload. Best Vaznev-9K Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Double Time – Base Perk 2: Tracker – Bonus Perk: Spotter – Ultimate Perk: High Alert – Lethal: Throwing Knife – Tactical Equipment: Heartbeat Sensor – Double Time increases the duration of Tactical Sprint which can be crucial while trying to escape a gunfight or chasing down enemies. It gels well with the Vaznev-9K’s high mobility. Meanwhile, Tracker gives you the intel on where enemy teams have been recently making it easier to figure out where to go. Spotter is the ideal Bonus Perk as it helps you to spot enemy equipment, Field Upgrades, and Killstreaks through walls. The last thing you want whilst pushing a team is to be downed by a well-placed Proximity Mine or Claymore. And lastly, for the Ultimate Perk, High Alert is the best option as it gives you the opportunity to react when an enemy is aiming at you. This is fantastic for aggressive playstyles as it makes you less likely to be punished whilst running around in the open. For lethal equipment, a Throwing Knife is ideal for finishing off downed enemies without having to waste ammo. This works well with a Heartbeat Sensor which can track any players not using Ghost up to 50 meters. How to unlock the Vaznev-9K in Warzone 2 You can unlock the Vaznev-9K by getting the Kastov-74u to Level 15 in Warzone 2, Modern Warfare 2, or DMZ. Doing so will automatically unlock the Vaznev-9k Receiver. After that, you can start leveling up the Vaznev-9K for the loadout mentioned above. Best Vaznev-9K alternatives in Warzone 2 The Fennec 45 and the PDSW 528 are some of the best Vaznev-9K alternatives in Warzone 2. The Fennec 45 gives you an edge over your enemies with its rate of fire and exceptional close-range damage. Meanwhile, the PDSW 528 sacrifices raw damage in favor of extraordinary mobility which is perfect for aggressive playstyles. That’s all for our Vaznev-9K loadout! For more of our Warzone 2 coverage, check out these guides below: Warzone 2 & Modern Warfare 2 Season 1 Battle Pass | Best TAQ-56 Warzone 2 loadout | Best M4 Warzone 2 loadout | All new Warzone 2 features explained | Best SP-R 208 Warzone 2 loadout | All Warzone 2 vehicles and Gas Stations | Does Warzone 2 have SBMM? | Do Warzone skins carry over to Warzone 2? | What are Strongholds in Warzone 2?

Best Vaznev-9k Modern Warfare 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments & Perks ActivisionModern Warfare 2’s Vasnev-9k is one of the best SMGs in the game, it’s also one of the most adaptable guns as it can transform into a mid-range rifle with the right loadout. This is our best meta Vaznev-9K loadout for MW2 Season 3 Reloaded including attachments, setup, and perks. The Vaznev-9k received the slightest of nerfs in the Season 3 Reloaded update, but it definitely was not enough to dethrone it as one of the best guns in the game. Modern Warfare 2 is filled with strong Snipers, LMGs, Assault Rifles and so much more. One of the most popular weapons is the Vaznev-9k, which has a shorter range but is still a high-powered SMG. However, that high power can only be achieved with the best Vaznev-9k loadout in Modern Warfare 2. So, we’ve put together all the best perks, equipment, and attachments for the Vaznev-9k to get you back to the top of the leaderboard. Alternatively, if you’re looking for a powerful Warzone 2 Vaznev-9k loadout instead, we’ve got a perfect choice. Contents Best Vaznev-9k Modern Warfare 2 loadout – Best Vaznev-9k Modern Warfare 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the Vaznev-9k in Modern Warfare 2 – Best Vaznev-9k alternatives in Modern Warfare 2 – Best Vaznev-9k Modern Warfare 2 loadout Muzzle: Bruen Pendulum – Laser: Schlager Peq Box IV – Optic: Cronen Mini Red Dot – Stock: Otrezat Stock – Rear Grip: True-Tac Grip – We start our best Vaznev-9k loadout with the Bruen Pendulum which offers a substantial boost to both horizontal and vertical recoil control, helping you keep your shots on target. Then we’ve gone for the Schlager Peq Box IV Laser, buffing ADS speed to ensure you always get the first shot in. Mobility is vital when using an SMG in MW2, so the Otrezat Stock is a great option to increase sprint speed and how fast you move while aiming. This pairs nicely with the True-Tac Grip, which reduces the ADS and sprint-to-fire speed. Last up is the Cronen Mini Red Dot, a clean Optic that makes the Vaznev-9k far more accurate without cluttering up the screen. Best Vaznev-9k Modern Warfare 2 class: Perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Scavenger – Base Perk 2: Bomb Squad – Bonus Perk: Hardline – Ultimate Perk: High Alert – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Stim – Since you’ll be running around the map with the Vaznev-9k, Scavenger is an ideal Perk as it allows you to restock ammo on the fly. Then we recommend Bomb Squad to soak up damage from any explosives that come your way. For the Bonus Perk you can’t go wrong with Hardline, reducing the cost of Killstreaks which can be vital towards the end of a match. You’ll also want to remain hidden while moving around the map, so Ghost will keep you off the enemy UAV. When it comes to equipment, Semtex is straightforward Lethal that’s perfect for clearing an objective quickly, while Stims can offer a health boost when times are tough. How to unlock the Vaznev-9k in Modern Warfare 2 The Vaznev-9k is unlocked in Modern Warfare 2 via the Kastov Platform by getting the Kastov-74u to level 15. Doing this will automatically unlock the Vaznev-9k Receiver, so you can begin leveling up the SMG and building the ideal loadout. Best Vaznev-9k alternatives in Modern Warfare 2 There are plenty of other SMGs that are strong in Modern Warfare 2, such as the PDSW 528 (P90) or VEL 46 (MP7). But if you want something a bit more versatile, then you could for an Assault Rifle like the STB 556 or Lachmann-556. For more on Modern Warfare 2, be sure to check out our other guides: Modern Warfare 2 new equipment guide: Lethals and Tacticals explained | How to Slide Cancel in Modern Warfare 2 | How to unlock Oni Operator & Blueprint in Modern Warfare 2 | All Modern Warfare 2 Killstreaks | What is Modern Warfare 2 Spec Ops mode? | All Modern Warfare 2 perks | All Modern Warfare 2 Field Upgrades

Best Vargo-S Warzone loadout: Class setup, Attachments, Perks ActivisionThe new Vargo-S is accurate and great for long-ranged combat. We’ve got the strongest attachments and Perks for the Vargo-S to get you that swift Warzone Victory. As one of the more recent additions to Season 4 of Warzone and Vanguard, the Vargo-S is a fantastically accurate AR that lovers of the Vargo-52 will adore. Thanks to the new update, it’s quickly established itself as a unique Assault Rifle that is great when used correctly. Focusing more on long to medium-range combat, the Vargo-S is one of the most accurate Assault Rifles currently in the game. However, it can only be accurate and powerful in the right hands and with the correct loadout. Here’s a rundown on everything you need to make the best Vargo-S Warzone loadout. Contents Best Vargo-S Warzone loadout – Best Vargo-S Warzone setup (Perks & Equipment) – How to unlock the Vargo-S in Warzone – Alternatives to the Vargo-S Warzone loadout – Best Vargo-S Warzone loadout Muzzle: Mercury Silencer – Barrel: Mirzoyan 414mm Custom – Optic: Slate Reflector – Stock: Gabrielyan LP 33 – Underbarrel: Carver Foregrip – Magazine: 6.5mm Sakura 45 Round Drums – Ammo Type: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Taped Grip – Perk 1: Hardscope – Perk 2: Fully Loaded – When building the best Vargo-S Warzone loadout you need to be focusing on the accuracy and range. This is not the best gun for close-quarters and works best as an aid for a Sniper or for long to medium-ranged shots. The Mercury Silencer is the staple for Warzones Assault Rifles. It’s stealthy enough while still allowing you to pack enough of a punch to down the enemy quickly and safely. When it comes to needing good ADS speed and stability, the Mirzoyan 414 Custom is the best Barrel to go for. This gun thrives on accuracy so increasing that will only aid you in your battle. The Slate Reflector optic is an ideal scope for an Assault Rifle like this one. It may not have the best zoom in the world but it’s one of the few optics with no negative effects. As for the Gabrielyan LP 33 stock, this will again increase stability and control when firing, allowing each shot to count. The Carver Foregrip underbarrel is the easiest and most effective underbarrel you can get for the weapon while it’s at low levels. The Magazine needs to be filled with power, and enough bullets to take down a whole team without needing to reload. This is why the pairing of Lengthened and a 6.5mm Sakura 45 Round Drum works so well. The last true attachment is the Taped Grip which increases stability and movement speed, something that’s vital for a game like Warzone. When it comes to weapon Perks, Hardscope and Fully Loaded are perfect. They increase the accuracy and give you a little bonus to ammo. Best Vargo-S Warzone setup (Perks & Equipment) Perk 1: E.O.D – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Secondary: Marco 5 – Lethal: Frag Grenade – Tactical: Stim – The Perks are perfect for pretty much any loadout you choose to have. E.O.D, Overkill, and Amped are the standard and give you the speed and power you need as well as another option if you find yourself in close-quarter fights. When looking into the long-ranged preferences of the Vargo-S, it’s important to have an SMG that can do similar damage with a bit more variety. This is where the deadly Marco 5 come in. As for the Lethal and Tactical equipment, there’s nothing better than the Frag Grenade and Stims combo. After all, cooking up a Frag grenade when you need to storm a room full of people is a perfect entrance and could quickly give you the advantage you need. As for stims, having extra health regen when you need it is never a bad thing. It’s quite literally a lifesaver and will let you stay in that fast-paced battle a little longer. How to unlock the Vargo-S in Warzone Thankfully, there are three different ways you can unlock the Vargo-S in Warzone. There is a different way for everyone so if you don’t fancy spending money or playing a specific game mode, fear not because you can still get this awesome Assault Rifle. The first, and quickest way to unlock the Vargo-S in Warzone is to pick up the Seven Voyages bundle for 1,200 CoD points. This will unlock the blueprint as well as some stickers and a calling card. Alternatively, you will need to get 15 close-range kills or kill 20 or more Zombies without being hit 50 times. This may be a little time-consuming but is much cheaper than the bundle. Alternatives to the Vargo-S Warzone loadout If the long-ranged accuracy Assault Rifle is not what you want from a weapon then it’s worth looking for a more powerful style. We recommend the mid-range powerhouse that is the NZ-41. It’s got power, speed and will shred through the enemy when you need it to. That’s the best loadout for the Vargo-S currently. While it may be the strongest build now, it could change with new updates so be sure to check regularly as we’ll keep this updated regularly. For now, why not take a look at some other great Warzone loadouts: Best streamer loadouts | Mac-10 loadout | Top class setups and best weapons | Automaton loadout | MP40 loadout | Best BAR Warzone loadout | Best Kilo 141 Warzone class loadout | Best Cooper Carbine Warzone loadout | Best MAC-10 Warzone loadout

Best Vargo 52 Warzone class loadout: Setup, Attachments, Perks Treyarch/ActivisionThe Vargo 52 Cold War AR arrived in Warzone on March 4 and the community is already praising the weapon for its power at long range, but which loadout maximizes the gun’s strengths? When it comes to adding new weapons, the Warzone community usually expects them to arrive during significant updates which often come in the form of new seasons. So, with Season 2 bringing the Whitley LMG and KG M40, players certainly weren’t expecting Treyarch to drop a surprise update for Cold War on March 4, 2022. This patch even included a new AR in the form of the Vargo 52, a powerful gun that excels in medium to long-range gunfights. However, as with every weapon in Warzone, you’ll need to run the best loadout to get the most out of the Vargo 52, and luckily, we’ve got you covered. Contents Best Vargo 52 loadout for Warzone – Best Vargo 52 setup (Perks & Equipment) – How to unlock the Vargo 52 in Warzone – Alternative Vargo 52 Warzone loadout – Best Vargo 52 loadout for Warzone Attachments Muzzle: GRU Supressor – Barrel: 18.6″ Task Force – Optic: Axial Arms 3x – Underbarrel: Spetsnaz Grip – Ammunition: Spetsnaz 60 Rnd – First of all, you’ll want to equip the GRU Suppressor and the 18.6″ Task Force Barrel to increase the Vargo’s effective damage range, bullet velocity, and recoil control. These attachments are extremely important and will allow you to constantly beam down enemies at long range. After that, make sure to utilize the Axial Arms 3x optic so you have a clear and pinpoint view of enemies from a distance, giving you the chance to hit as many shots as possible. Finally, round off the loadout with the Spetsnaz Grip to bolster the Vargo’s recoil control and the Spetsnaz 60 Rnd mag so you can take out multiple enemies without having to reload. Keep in mind, if you’re taking the gun into Solos or Rebirth, it may be worth going for a mag with a lower bullet count, so adjust the attachment to fit your needs. Best Vargo 52 setup (Perks & Equipment) Perks & Equipment Perk 1: E.O.D. – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Stim – When it comes to perks, our loadout runs the standard meta choices with EOD protecting you from explosive blasts, and Amped increasing your weapon swap speeds during intense gunfights. While you can run Ghost with this loadout, we recommend taking Overkill so you can run the Vargo with your favorite SMG. This will allow you to take on enemies at close-range, giving you a versatile and powerful setup. Finally, round off the loadout with a Semtex to clear our stationary opponents and the Stim for a boost of health when you need it most. How to unlock the Vargo 52 in Warzone As the Vargo 52 isn’t part of a battle pass, unlocking it is slightly more difficult and may take players more time than most guns. To unlock the Vargo, you’ll need to deal 1000 damage in 15 different completed matches using assault rifles. We recommend completing this task in multiplayer, but if Warzone is the only game you have, it may take a little more time. Alternative Vargo 52 Warzone loadout If the Vargo 52 doesn’t fit your playstyle, it may be worth checking out the most popular AR in the entire game at the moment: the Cooper Carbine. This incredibly strong Vanguard weapon packs a punch at long range and is perfect for beaming down enemies from afar. With the correct attachments, the gun has minimal recoil making it pinpoint accurate. So, if you want to try out the Cooper Carbine in-game for yourself, consider checking out our dedicated loadout for the weapon. That rounds off our Vargo 52 loadout guide for Call of Duty: Warzone. Don’t forget to adjust any attachments based on your preference, as it’s all about experimenting until you find a build for you.

Best Vanguard loadouts to dominate Ranked Play: SMGs, ARs & Snipers Sledgehammer GamesVanguard Ranked Play can be a grueling affair if you’re not properly prepared, but our guide to the best SMGs, ARs, and Snipers, will have you frying the competition like never before. This year’s Ranked Play playlist has been a hit with pros and casual fans alike. From the ability to climb the ranks from Specialist to Master to banning out some of the game’s more overpowered killstreaks, the mode aims to transform an otherwise chaotic experience into something a little more controlled and contained. Made up of the three Call of Duty League approved game modes (Hardpoint, Search and Destroy, and Control) players are assigned a visible skill ranking. On top of that, they are given a smaller ladder placement that helps identify exactly which of the six skill tiers you fall under as a player. If you’ve been placed lower than you might have expected, these are the guns that are going to help you begin your climb and take the leaderboards by storm. Best Vanguard Ranked Play loadouts As noted above, there are three main categories of weapons to worry about: Assault Rifles, Submachine Guns, and Snipers. In most COD titles, there are only one or two guns from each of these categories that truly reign at the top of their class, so we’ll be focusing exclusively on those for this guide. Best AR loadout in Vanguard Ranked Play Best Automaton class Muzzle: F8 Stabilizer – Barrel: Anastasia Sniper – Underbarrel: M1941 Hand Stop – Optic: Slate Reflector – Stock: Zac Skeletal – Ammo Type: Lengthened – Rear Grip: GRU Elastic Wrap – Proficiency: Tight Grip – Kit: On Hand – The Automaton has been the favored long-range option for the entirety of the competitive season so far. Its impressive rate of fire combined with a lack of recoil makes it the clear standout right now. This is only enhanced by attachments like the F8 Stabilizer and Anastasia Sniper barrel which elevate the gun from good to great. Best Volk class Muzzle: T1 Flash Hider – Barrel: Krausnick 428MM 05v – Underbarrel: M1941 Hand Stop – Optic: Slate Reflector – Stock: Reisdorf 22v Adjustable – Ammo Type: FMJ Rounds – Rear Grip: Stippled Grip – Proficiency: Fleet – Kit: On Hand – The Volk is a relative newcomer to the scene. It only gained some prominence after CDL pro Spart won MVP honors at CDL Major 2 despite being a last-minute substitute for eventual champions Los Angeles Guerrillas. He put on such a spectacular show with the weapon that the gun may ultimately be banned from professional competition going forward. This is definitely a pick that’s harder to shoot than the Auto, but skilled players will be able to put it to use with unmatched effect. Best SMG loadout in Vanguard Ranked Play MP40 class Muzzle: No. 3 Rifle Brake – Barrel: Krausnick 317MM 04B – Underbarrel: SMLE Pistol Grip – Stock: Krausnick 33M Folding – Ammo Type: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Stippled Grip – Proficiency: Brace – Kit: Quick – There is only one choice for SMG players in the current meta and it’s the MP40. This gun is the undeniable king of the category thanks to a lightning-fast time-to-kill and an easy-to-understand recoil pattern. While the base version of the gun is easy enough to use, you could also swap the Rifle Brake out for the F8 Stabilizer, which just like the Volk, has also been banned by the pros. Best Sniper loadout in Vanguard Ranked Play KAR98k class The Kar98k is a staple of the Call of Duty franchise. It has appearances in 10 of the mainline games and also shows up in several spinoffs and the ever-popular Call of Duty Mobile. What makes this incarnation so good is its large one-shot-kill hitbox. When you’re playing against the best talent in the world, you need something that will reliably kill people fast and there’s just no question which sniper does that the best. That’s all for the most efficient weapons in Vanguard ranked play! Put these four workhorses to the test and begin your climb towards the coveted Top 250.

Best Uzi loadouts for Warzone and Modern Warfare Modern Warfare and Warzone are two very different experiences, so you’ll need different weapon attachments depending on which you’re playing. Here, we break down your best options when using the Uzi SMG. Its position as floor loot in Season 3 of Warzone saw the Uzi rise up many people’s ladders in terms of viable weapons. We’ve also seen it in the hands of Chicago Huntsmen’s Dylan ‘Envoy’ Hannon in Call of Duty League matches, showing just how highly it’s now thought of. While perhaps not as strong as an MP5 or MP7, the right attachments can boost this gun massively. You’ll need completely different set ups for Warzone and multiplayer. Best Uzi loadout for Warzone Monolithic Suppressor – 16.5″ Factory Carbine – FORGE TAC Ultralight – Merc Foregrip – 50 Round Mags – The strongest part of the Uzi is its damage, so this loadout focuses mostly on extending its range while making the recoil more manageable. Key to this is the Merc Foregrip and the 16.5″ Factory Carbine, which both reduce recoil considerably. The barrel also combines with the Monolithic Suppressor to buff the gun’s range significantly, all while keeping players off enemy radars. The 50 Round Mags are also incredibly useful in Warzone, allowing you to rip through an enemy’s armor and finish them off quickly. The FORGE TAC Ultralight stock rounds off this class, making you a harder target while ADS. If you’d prefer a sight on your Uzi, this is the attachment to swap out for one. Best Uzi loadout for Modern Warfare Tac Laser – 13.1″ First Responder – Stippled Grip Tape – Commando Foregrip – Sleight of Hand – Because of the faster pace of Modern Warfare’s multiplayer, this Uzi is geared towards frequent close-range gunfights. The 13.1″ First Responded barrel boosts your range and reduces recoil, but has a significantly lower impact on your ADS time that other barrels. The Tac Laser and Stippled Grip Tape reduce ADS time considerably, with the former also boosting hip fire accuracy. The Commando Foregrip aids recoil without slowing ADS time, while Sleight of Hand will help you get back in the action faster after a gunfight. It should be said that, given the Uzi’s slower rate of fire and moderate recoil, you shouldn’t be looking to take on enemies at longer ranges – in Warzone or Modern Warfare. For that, stick to the AR or Sniper. If you want to try out some different weapons in Warzone or even Multiplayer, check out our full list of best loadouts for every gun. That rounds off our best Uzi loadouts for Warzone and Modern Warfare! What attachments have we missed? Tweet us @DexertoIntel to let us know what you think!

Best UGR Warzone loadout: Class setup, Attachments, Perks ActivisionThe UGR SMG is the newest addition to Warzone and it’s already making some waves. If you’re itching to try the gun out for yourself, we’ve got the best loadout compiled right here for you. From the best attachments to all the right perks, this is everything you need to know before dropping into the fight. Warzone’s SMG meta has been stale for a while now. Raven Software took a shot at changing things up with the Season 3 Classified Arms update, but even nerfs to the MP40 and Owen Gun was not enough to crown a new king of the hill. It seemed like things were destined to stay that way at least until the Season 3 Reloaded update arrives this summer, but then the UGR hit the scene and has the potential to shake things up a bit. If you want to pick up the gun and make a determination for yourself, this setup is an excellent place to begin. Best UGR Warzone loadout – Best UGR Warzone class – How to unlock the UGR in Warzone – Alternative to the UGR Warzone loadout – Best UGR Warzone loadout Attachments Barrel: 14.5″ Liberator – Optic: Microflex LED – Stock: KGB Skeletal Stock – Underbarrel: Bruiser Grip – Magazine: Flechette Rounds – The Bruiser Grip has become the go-to option for most SMGs and the UGR is no different. Combined with the KGB Skeletal Stock, the added shot of movement speed keeps you light on your feet and maximizes the gun’s natural mobility stats. The 14.5″ Liberator and Explosive Flechette rounds also synergize to make this high power sub a threat at all distances. The extra damage range from the rounds paired with the bullet velocity of the barrel means enemies will have a hard time getting away from your hail of bullets no matter how far away they are. Best UGR Warzone Class Perk 1: E.O.D. – Perk 2: Ghost – Perk 3: Amped – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Stim – This setup has been a staple for much of the game’s lifespan, but that’s because it’s just that effective. E.O.D keeps you protected from throwables and other explosives, which as a run-and-gun setup, is a necessary feature. A well-placed claymore or mine will put a real damper on your gameplay if you’re not running this perk. Ghost and Amped also work hand in hand to keep your game speed up. By keeping you off the radar, Ghost gives you the ability to run directly at opposing squads without worrying about if they’re hiding in a building waiting for you to come in. The weapon-swap speed of Amped means you’ll be able to get quick damage with the UGR and switch to your secondary in a flash to finish off any survivors. Finally, the Semtex will help you clear out any rooms with multiple people or knock stubborn players off of headglitches, and Stim will give you a safe way to get back to cover after each fight. How unlock the UGR in Warzone The UGR is unlocked by scoring kills against a player who has been revealed by Spy Plane, UAV, or Field Mic in 15 different matches. Plunder is by far the easiest way to knock this out in Warzone. All you have to do is play long enough to get a UAV and then hunt down a kill. After you get the elimination, just back out to the main menu and repeat the process. If that’s too much work, you could always boot up Black Ops Cold War and complete the challenge over there. Alternative to the UGR in Warzone If something about the UGR isn’t working for you but you’re looking for something similar, Cold War’s Bullfrog lines up very similarly. Both of them have high natural damage stats with easy-to-control recoil, making them a pretty compatible gameplay experience. We’ve got a loadout guide for it here that should make the switch even easier to manage overall. The UGR might not break through the meta barrier right away but it does seem to have promise in the early days of its release. If you want to keep updated with all the latest Warzone and Vanguard news and updates, then be sure to check out our Call of Duty page.

Best UGM-8 Warzone loadout: Attachments, Perks, Setup ActivisionThe best UGM-8 Warzone loadout can give you a competitive edge over your foes in Season 5 Reloaded, so here are all the attachments you should be using. The Warzone Season 5 Reloaded update is finally here, and the UGM-8 has maintained its spot in the top 10 most selected guns. Unlike other weapons in the LMG category, the UGM-8 provides high mobility with a lightning-fast fire rate. This enables it to compete with the game’s best Assault Rifles and SMGs – an area that is incredibly important when playing on Caldera and Fortune’s Keep. After all, having a gun you can rely on in close to mid-range firefights will give you huge amounts of kill potential. The strength of the UGM-8 is reflected in its pick rate, which is currently sitting at an impressive 4.9%, making it the fourth most used gun in Warzone. So, if you’re looking for the best UGM-8 Warzone loadout, then our build guide will have you frying your foes in no time. Contents Best UGM-8 Warzone loadout – Best UGM-8 setup (Perks & equipment) – How to unlock the UGM-8 in Warzone – Alternative to the UGM-8 loadout – Best UGM-8 Warzone loadout Muzzle: MX Silencer – Barrel: Bernard XL214 736mm – Optic: SVT-40 PU Scope 3-6X – Stock: Mercier WT Ancre – Underbarrel: M1930 Strife Angled – Magazine: 6.5mm Sakura 125 Round Box – Ammo Type: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Hatched Grip – Proficiency: Tight Grip – Kit: Fully Loaded – The best UGM-8 loadout raises the LMG’s accuracy and control, which enables you to constantly barrage squads with ease. Guns with minimal recoil have always been popular in Warzone, which makes this UGM-8 build incredibly potent. First up is the MX Silencer, Bernard XL214 736mm, and Tight Grip. All of these attachments greatly improve the UGM’s accuracy, which makes it an absolute laser across mid to long-range engagements. In fact, when the LMG is kitted out with the above attachments it barely moves when fired. This means you can simply focus on your positioning without the need to constantly wrestle for control. The added recoil reduction enables you to zero in on your targets with the SVT-40 PU Scope 3-6X and light them up with the 6.5mm Sakura 125 Round Box. Pair this with the added damage from Lengthened and the max staring ammo from Fully Loaded, and you have a recipe for success. Best UGM-8 setup (Perks & equipment) Perks & Equipment Perk 1: E.O.D. – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Secondary: Armaguerra 43 – Lethal: Throwing Knife – Tactical: Stim – Similar to many Warzone setups, our UGM-8 loadout utilizes E.O.D, Amped, and Overkill. E.O.D greatly reduces the damage taken from non-killstreak explosives and fire, which, in a game like Warzone, is a great addition to your setup. Amped allows you to switch between weapons faster, making it particularly useful if you do run out of bullets mid-fight. Lastly, Overkill allows you to equip the meta Armaguerra 43 as your secondary. While the UGM-8 does have decent mobility and speed, having access to one of the best Warzone SMGs will only increase your kill potential further. After all, having an SMG with quick ADS speeds and high damage should be a top priority for any aggressive player. To round off this loadout, we’ve utilized the Throwing Knife and the Stim in the Lethal and Tactical slots. The Throwing Knife is great at instantly killing downed enemies, while the Stim gives you the ability to stave off any major damage – giving you the ability to stave off death itself. How to unlock the UGM-8 in Warzone In order to unlock the UGM-8 in Warzone, you’ll need to reach Tier 31 of the Season 4 Battle Pass. Simply play games of Warzone or Vanguard and the gun will be yours in no time. Of course, you can always utilize tier skips to speed up this process. Alternative to the UGM-8 loadout If you’re looking for an alternative to the UGM-8 loadout, then consider using the PKM. This classic Modern Warfare weapon may not be as mobile, but it really packs a punch when kitted out with the best attachments. The slower approach to combat may not be for everyone, but LMG aficionados will likely enjoy slinging bullets at their targets with this beefy weapon. Just remember to pack a quick-firing secondary to help with those close-range engagements. So, there you have it, the best UGM-8 loadout you should be using in Warzone Season 4. Make sure you check out our Warzone page and weapon loadouts below to get ahead in the new update. Best streamer loadouts | Most popular Warzone weapons| Best Assault Rifles | Top 20 highest-earning players | Welgun | MP40 || PPSh-41 | AK-47 | Best controller settings | Top 10 best class setups and loadouts | Highest-earning Warzone players | Armaguerra 43 | Swiss K31 | Best STG44

Best UGM-8 Vanguard loadout: Attachments, Perks, Setup ActivisionThe UGM-8 is a brand-new LMG for players to get to grips with in Vanguard Season 4, offering them a more lightweight, mobile option in that category. Here’s our best Vanguard UGM-8 loadout to help you make the most of this new weapon. Vanguard Season 4 has landed and there’s plenty for players to be excited about. There’s a fresh Battle Pass crammed with shiny unlockables to work towards, as well as the return of the iconic Shi No Numa map to Zombies mode. There are also two brand-new weapons available from day one, one of which is the UGM-8. This mobile LMG allows players to make use the of huge ammo clips the category is known for, without having to sacrifice too much movement. But before you take the gun into a multiplayer, it’s best to have the right build equipped. We’ve got you covered with the best UGM-8 loadout in Vanguard, right here. Contents Best UGM-8 Vanguard loadout – Best UGM-8 Perks & equipment in Vanguard – How to unlock UGM-8 in Vanguard – Alternatives to UGM-8 in Vanguard – Best UGM-8 Vanguard loadout Muzzle: Recoil Booster – Barrel: Bernard XL214 736mm – Optic: Slate Reflector – Stock: Bernard Forte VII – Underbarrel: M1941 Hand Stop – Magazine: 6.5mm Sakura 125 Round Box – Ammo Type: Subsonic – Rear Grip: Fabric Grip – Proficiency: Tight Grip – Kit: Fully Loaded – The UGM-8 is incredibly fast firing compared to other Vanguard guns in its class, so our build plays to its strengths while also keeping some of its recoil under control. To kick things off, we’ve gone for the Recoil Booster and for a boost in fire rate which lowers the overall TTK. Next up we have the Bernard XL214 736mm, Bernard Forte VII, and M19141 Hand Stop. These two drastically improve the UGM’s accuracy to make it far more effective at range and also give the fire rate another nudge. The Tight Grip Proficiency also helps massively in the accuracy department. When it comes to the Magazine, 6.5mm Sakura 125 Round Boxes are the clear standout thanks to huge buffs in recoil control, on top of extra ammo capacity to make it feel more like a normal LMG. We then load them with Subsonic rounds to stay off the minimap and use the Fully Loaded Kit to ensure we have max ammo. LMGs have a notoriously slow ADS speed, so the Fabric Grip will help to ease that problem slightly. Optics largely come down to personal preference, but we chose the Slate Reflector as it’s the cleanest and easiest to use. Best UGM-8 Perks & equipment in Vanguard Perk 1: Fortified – Perk 2: Forward Intel – Perk 3: Lightweight – Secondary: Machine Pistol – Lethal: MK2 Frag Grenade – Tactical: Stun Grenade – Field Upgrade: Armor Plates – This new LMG is geared towards to players who like to rush around the map, so we’ve picked a selection of Perks that fit a similar playstyle. First, we’ve gone for Fortified, allowing you to tank explosive and fire damage as you tear into enemy territory. In the second slot, Forward Intel lets you know where enemies are spawning, so can quickly assume the best position. Lastly, you’ll want to choose Lightweight for even more mobility, so you can zip around the map picking off enemies before they can react. Equipment-wise you can’t go wrong with the combination of Frag Grenades and Stun Grenades. Then the Armor Plates Field Upgrade is perfect for soaking up even more damage and giving you a slight edge in close fights. How to unlock UGM-8 in Vanguard Unlocking the UGM-8 is pretty straightforward, all you have to do is reach Tier 31 of the Vanguard Season 4 Battle Pass. Even better, this is one of the free tiers, so you don’t have to splash any of your own money to unlock the new weapon. Simply hit the right level and it’s all yours. Alternatives to UGM-8 in Vanguard If the UGM-8 isn’t quite cutting it for you, then perhaps the DP27 will suit you better. This is another highly mobile LMG with impressive damage that has established itself as the best in its class since Vanguard launched. If you want something that packs more of a punch, the MG42 could be the way to go. It’s much bulkier than its peers but is ideal for mounting on a wall to hold down a position on the map. For more on CoD Vanguard, be sure to check out our other loadout guides:

Best TYR Warzone loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks In the Warzone meta, a good revolver can do a lot to help you hold your own. The TYR makes a strong case to be your option. Unlock the full potential of these pocket shotguns with the best loadout for maximum effectiveness. The TYR is a pistol based on the real world RSh-12, a modern revolver that is known for chambering incredibly powerful rounds. This in-game rendition is no different with it packing one hell of a punch. In Warzone at least, the TYR’s main role is to act as a pocket shotgun using its Snake Shot ammunition. Although this setup lacks in range it absolutely melts up close and is particularly strong in solos and duos where squad wipes without reloading are possible. With that said, this is the best TYR loadout to use in Warzone Season 4 Reloaded. Best TYR Warzone loadout Conversion Kit: JAK Beholder Rifle Kit – Optic: NYDAR Model 2023 – Underbarrel: SL Skeletal Vertical Grip – Trigger Action: Ullr’s Fury – Rear Grip: Frigg’s Embrace – This loadout is centered around the JAK Beholder Rifle Kit that will give the weapon a huge boost to ADS Speed, bullet velocity, and provides recoil control for both horizontal and vertical. You can continue this emphasis on handling with the combination of the Frigg’s Embrace Rear Grip and SL Skeletal Vertical Grip . Together these turn improve the recoil of the revolver even further. Using the NYDAR Model 2023 optic is also going to give you the best accuracy when quickly firing off your shots. To round it all out, the Ullr’s Fury isn’t going to offer you a massive improvement but does give you a great, exclusive firing mechanism feature. TYR Warzone Loadout: Perks and Equipment Perk 1: Double Time increases the duration of your Tac Sprint – – Perk 2: Sleight of Hand enables faster reloading – – Perk 3: Quick Fix starts health regeneration when killing a player or inserting a plate – – Perk 4: Resolute gives you a speed boost when hit by enemy shot – – Lethal: Throwing Knife – Tactical: Smoke Grenade – Double Time lends itself well to the TYR as this gun’s limited range requires you to get up close and personal. Having improved Tactical Sprint to move faster makes that much easier to do. As for Sleight of Hand, its a great choice with the TYR as this revolver’s base reload time is far from ideal. Since you’ll be run and gunning a lot with these sidearms, Quick Fix offers a great option for emergency healing in those particularly tense moments. Just throw on an armor plate and you’ll imediately begin to regen health, perfect for a fast paced playstyle. Resolute has emerged as a popular option for Perk 4 in Warzone thanks to its increased mobility. Being able to sprint out of a firefight when you need to can be the difference between life and death. In the lethal equipment slot, we recommend equipping a Throwing Knife as it deals a ton of damage if you can land the throw. Finally, the best tactical to use is the Smoke Grenade which will offer you cover when you need it in a bind. How to unlock TYR in Warzone The TYR is one of the last weapons you will unlock in Warzone with it only becoming accessible after reaching level 50. Alternatively, you can extract with a TYR in Zombies to skip the grind entirely. Best alternative to TYR in Warzone Despite being a handgun, the TYR’s strongest competition in our recommended configuration is actually a shotgun, the Haymaker. It offers better range and a much larger magazine albeit at a heavy cost to mobility. Playing up-close and personal is a huge part of the Warzone Season 4 Reloaded meta, so check out other close-range options like the Superi 46, FJX Horus, Striker, and AMR9.

Best TYR MW3 loadout: Class setup, attachments, perks Every so often Call of Duty adds a truly unique gun that resonates with players. That’s exactly what the TYR has turned out to be thanks to the addition of one fantastic aftermarket part. Here is the best loadout to get the most out of the TYR in MW3 Season 3. Much like its real-world counterpart the RSh-12, the TYR is a powerful hand cannon capable of taking out enemies in just one shot. However, this comes at the cost of it having a slow fire rate and substantial recoil. Even so, it rewards good aim more so than just about any other weapon in Modern Warfare 3, especially with its unique conversion kit. This is the best TYR loadout to use in MW3 including attachments, perks, and equipment. Contents: Best TYR MW3 loadout – Best TYR class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock TYR in Modern Warfare 3 – How to unlock JAK Beholder Rifle Kit in Modern Warfare 3 – Best TYR alternative in Modern Warfare 3 – Best TYR MW3 loadout Attachments Conversion Kit: JAK Beholder Rifle Kit – Optic: Nydar Model 2023 – Underbarrel: DR-6 Handstop – Ammunition: 12.7x55mm High Grain Rounds – Trigger Action: Ullr’s Fury – The TYR may have started life as a pistol, but it fulfills its true potential when converted into a DMR using the JAK Beholder Rifle Kit. This unique aftermarket part triples the hand cannon’s effective damage range from 6.4m to a whopping 19.3m. Even better, if you can land headshots the TYR will now always kill in one shot at any range which is incredible for a secondary weapon. This sidearm’s damage range can be further improved by equipping the 12.7x55mm High Grain Rounds, resulting in an effective range of 22.2m. Also, this ammunition attachment raises the TYR’s Bullet Velocity by 15% to 534 m/s, making it easier to land headshots from afar. Unfortunately, these range-boosting attachments come at a cost, a lot of mobility and handling stats are lowered. This can be offset by using the DR-6 Handstop which provides a noticeable improvement to key stats like ADS Speed, Movement Speed, and Sprint To Fire Speed, keeping the TYR feeling snappy. If there’s one absolutely necessary attachment, it’s Ullr’s Fury. This trigger action reduces the delay between when the trigger is pulled and when a shot is fired. Without this, the TYR can be an incredibly frustrating weapon to use. Finally, with this being a precision weapon a meta optic is useful to make landing shots easier, and the Nydar Model 2023 is a great choice. Best TYR MW3 class: Perks & equipment Vest: Infantry Vest Increases Tactical Sprint duration and reduces refresh time. – – Gloves: Marksman Gloves Reduced Sway and flinch wild ADS. – – Boots: Lightweight Boots Increases movement and swim speed. Reduces noise while swimming. – – Gear: Mag Holster Improved reload speed. – – Lethal: Frag Grenade Cookable fragmentation grenade. – – Tactical: Flash Grenade Blinds and deafens target. – – The Infantry Vest is a great option to use with the TYR as this loadout has a rapid Sprint To Fire Time of just 75ms. This lets you Tactical Sprint around the map freely without ever being punished as long as you land your shots when they matter most. Marksman Gloves would ordinarily be a strange pick on the TYR but with the JAK Beholder Rifle Kit equipped they make sense. These gloves reduce flinch helping you land that decisive shot which is important given the TYR’s unforgiving, slow fire rate. Speaking of slow, the TYR’s reload time is long but using the Mag Holster speeds this up by around 20% making it a must-use perk. To improve mobility throw on the Lightweight Boots which complement the TYR well by providing various boosts to key stats, including a nice 5% to sprint speed and a huge 30% to swim speed. These all add up to make the TYR much more mobile and enable an aggressive playstyle where it excels. As for equipment, a Flash Grenade and Frag Grenade are classic options that offer an unbeatable combination of lethality and utility. Use these to pressure opponents and win gunfights that you may have otherwise lost. How to unlock TYR in Modern Warfare 3 The TYR is unlocked after reaching level Level 50. Alternatively, the TYR can be acquired by successfully extracting it in MWZ. Once obtained, you’ll have 27 gun levels to work through to get all of its unique attachments. How to unlock JAK Beholder Rifle Kit in Modern Warfare 3 The JAK Beholder Rifle Kit can be unlocked through the Armory by activating the aftermarket part and then either completing 5 Daily Challenges or winning 5 matches in multiplayer. Best TYR alternative in Modern Warfare 3 With the JAK Beholder Rifle Kit equipped, the TYR becomes a precision DMR much like the MTZ Interceptor which is one of the best weapons in MW3 as long as you are confident in landing headshots. That’s all for the best TYR in MW3. For more Modern Warfare 3 loadouts, check out these gun guides: Best MW3 Guns: Ultimate tier list | Best COR-45 loadout | Best Renetti loadout | Best WSP Stinger loadout

Best Type 63 Warzone class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Setup Activision / TreyarchThe Type 63 has been absolutely dominating players in Warzone, so find out the best loadout you should be using to get a competitive advantage. While the Type 63 proved a popular choice in Black Ops Cold War’s standard multiplayer, the gun has only recently been getting attention over in Warzone. This is partly down to a new SMG-style build that has been uncovered by popular Warzone streamers like JGOD. Not only does this new loadout capitalize on the gun’s incredibly damage output, it greatly enhances the Type 63’s rate of fire. In fact, players are now using the Tactical Rifle as a deadly secondary option. While it may not be a conventional pick, the Type 63 is making waves in Season 5 lobbies. Whether you’re looking to try out this overpowered build for yourself or just wish to switch out your MAC-10 for a new secondary, then you can’t go wrong with this best Type 63 loadout, making it a close-range menace. Contents Best Type 63 Warzone loadout – Best Type 63 setup (Perks & equipment) – How to unlock the Type 63 in Warzone – Alternative Type 63 loadout – Best Type 63 Warzone loadout Muzzle: GRU Silencer – Barrel: 16.4” Titanium – Laser: Tiger Team Spotlight – Stock: KGB Pad – Rear Grip: GRU Elastic Wrap – The most popular Type 63 loadout current bolster’s the guns fire rate, mobility, ADS speed, and control. First up is the 16.4” Titanium, which drastically increases the gun’s rate of fire. This attachment enables you to effortlessly barrage your foes with some blisteringly fast trigger action. We’ve also attached the GRU Silencer to help with the rifle’s bullet velocity, damage range, vertical recoil control. The added sound suppression also ensures you can fire away at your foes without ever giving away your position. Read More: Aydan unveils best EM2 Warzone loadout – Both the Tiger Team Spotlight and KGB Pad also bolster mobility, adding to your movement speed and sprint to fire time. This effectively enables you to compete against the ever-popular SMG and shotgun loadouts that crop up across Verdansk. As this particular loadout is tailored around dominating in close-quarter scenarios, the GRU Elastic Wrap is a perfect choice. After all, having an attachment that boosts ADS speeds and aids overall stability is unparalleled. Best Type 63 setup (Perks & equipment) Perk 1: EOD – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Secondary: Krig 6 – Lethal: Throwing Knife – Tactical: Heartbeat Sensor – Our Type 63 loadout uses EOD to keep you safe from any explosives, while Amped enables you quickly switch between your weapons. These perks are found on all of our meta loadouts, especially since they increase your overall survivability. The Overkill perk enables the use of the Krig 6 – which still remains the best AR in Warzone. This versatile setup enables you to remain competitive across all engagement ranges, giving you the tools needed to go for those high kill count games. Lastly, both the Throwing Knife and Heartbeat Sensor give you the tools needed to hunt enemy players and quickly kill downed enemies. How to unlock the Type 63 in Warzone Fortunately, those looking to add the Type 63 to their loadouts won’t have to grind out any annoying challenges. Instead, you’ll simply need to reach Level 4. This is incredibly easy to do and won’t take long to achieve. Alternative Type 63 loadout If you’re looking for an alternative to the Type 63, then check out our MAC-10 loadout. While it may not be a Tactical Rifle, this pint-sized SMG melts opponents in close-quarters scenarios. The Type 63’s playstyle can take some getting used to, so if you’re after a more conventional secondary pick, then you can’t go wrong with the MAC-10. This deadly SMG is incredibly easy to use and offers great speeds across the board. There’s a reason why this Cold War SMG has consistently remained in the top 10 loadout rankings. Looking for more of the best Warzone loadouts? Check out our list of guides below: Grau 5.56 | Kilo 141 | Krig 6 | CR-56 AMAX | M4A1 | FFAR 1 | Mac 10 | MP5 | Kar98k | HDR

Best Type 63 Black Ops Cold War loadout: Class, attachments, setup & perks Activision / TreyarchThe Type 63 is capable of dishing out some incredible damage thanks to its methodical firing pattern and excellent precision. Here’s a powerful class that will net you more Cold War kills in no time. If you’re a fan of Black Ops Cold War’s Tactical Rifle class or a player that prefers a more methodical approach to combat, then the Type 63 is one weapon you’ll want to use. While burst fire weapons like the M16 and AUG continue to dominate the game, this reliable rifle is still a decent pick. Despite its slower rate of fire, the Type 63 is capable of killing an enemy in just two shots (one body shot and one headshot). The Type 63 is a great option for those that want the damage of a sniper, but wish to be more active in their playstyle. If you have a good trigger finger and decent aim, you’ll definitely want to add the Type 63 to your collection. Best Type 63 loadout Here are the best attachments you can use on your Type 63 in Black Ops Cold War, filling every slot thanks to the Gunfighter wildcard: Muzzle: GRU Silencer – Barrel: 16.4″ Titanium – Optic: Axial Arms 3x – Underbarrel: Spetsnaz Ergonomic Grip – Ammunition: 38 Rnd Speed Mag – Perks Perk 1: Flak Jacket – Perk 2: Scavenger – Perk 3: Ghost – Equipment Lethal: Grenade – Tactical: Stimshot – Field Upgrade: Field Mic – Wildcard Law Breaker – Similar to the ever-popular Monolithic Suppressor, the GRU Silencer makes the Type 63 perform better at range, while also keeping you off the minimap. Other suppressors work unfavorably against the weapon, making your shots that much more difficult to land. Working alongside the suppressor, though, is the Axial Arms 3x scope, allowing you to efficiently snap on to enemy sniper-glints to ensure your survival. To alleviate the Type 63’s horizontal and vertical recoil, we’ve attached the Spetsnaz Ergonomic Grip. To further bolster this incredible loadout are is the 38 Rnd Speed Mag. These two ammo types are both equally effective, but using one or the other depends upon what feels most comfortable to you. One gives you more shots at the expense of slower ADS, whereas the other increases your ADS for a decrease in shot capacity. These attachments make the Type 63 incredibly accurate across all ranges, allowing you to beam opponents with laser-like precision. The bullets will always form in a tight circle around your target, so there’s no need to wrestle with any recoil. Simply point and shoot. As you may know by now, visibility in Black Ops Cold War can be rather poor. Even if you follow our visibility guide, there will still be times where you get caught out by pesky head glitches. Fortunately, you can always use the KGB Target Designator, which adds 60% Reveal Distance when aiming down sights. If you want to keep updated with all the latest Call of Duty news and updates, then follow us over on @DexertoIntel.

Best Type 11 Warzone loadout: Class setup, Attachments, Perks ActivisionThe best Type 11 Warzone loadout comes packed with unlimited range, huge amounts of ammo, and solid damage. This makes it an interesting pick for those looking to for a successor to the Bren in Season 1 on Caldera. Up to this point, the Type 11 has been living in the shadow of both the Bren and Warzone’s best Assault Rifles. Now that some major nerfs have arrived, this could be the moment that the former second-class LMG gets a moment in the sun. Featuring one of the highest accuracy stats in the game, our pick for the best Type 11 loadout will get you into the action and shredding through the opposition regardless of how far away they are. Contents Best Type 11 Warzone loadout – Best Type 11 Warzone class – How to unlock the Type 11 in Warzone – Alternative to the Type 11 Warzone loadout – Best Type 11 Warzone loadout Attachments Muzzle: F8 Stabilizer – Barrel: Sakura 487mm Shrouded – Optic: G16 2.5x – Stock: Warubachi Type 33 – Underbarrel: m1941 Hand Stop – Magazine: 6.5mm Sakura 90 Round Drum – Ammo Type: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Fabric Grip – Perk: Brace – Perk: Fully Loaded – The G16 2.5x scope is the most popular long-range scope choice on Type 11 but the M19 4.0x Flip could also work in its place. This is the part of the build that has the most flexibility, so choose whatever you’re comfortable with. As for bullets, the Type 11 is all about long range, so Lengthened only makes the gun better at its biggest strength. The Warubacchi Type 33, m1941 Hand Stop, F8 Stabilizer, and the Sakura 487mm Shrouded barrel complement that by making it easier to hit your shots at long distances, and they ensure that you’re doing max damage when the shots land. Next up, throw on the Fabric Grip to get your ADS speed up just a touch, and follow that with Brace and Fully Loaded perks to pad your accuracy and keep a good amount of ammo on hand from the jump. Best Type 11 Warzone class: Perks & Equipment Perk 1: E.O.D. – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Lethal: Throwing Knife – Tactical: Stim – This class falls in line with the current Warzone trends. Both EOD and Amped keep you safe from any explosive blasts, while also giving increased speed when swapping to your secondary weapon. Ghost also helps keep you hidden from enemy squads. Alternatively, you could replace Ghost with Overkill if you’re uncomfortable working with a floor-loot secondary, but you will be more exposed to enemy intel that way. For your Lethal and Tactical slots respectively, a Throwing Knife and a Stim are the quickest ways to finish off opponents and get back into the fight as fast as possible. How to unlock the Type 11 in Warzone Unlocking the Type 11 in Warzone and Vanguard is a bit of a task. Players will need to reach level 37 before the LMG is available for use. Your best bet for getting this done quickly is to play Vanguard public matches and pop some 2x XP tokens along the way. Alternatives to the Type 11 in Warzone If the Type 11 isn’t working out for you, then maybe give this MG42 loadout a try. It provides the same high-powered damage potential but might feel better for players that are used to picking it up as ground loot. That’s it for the best Type 11 class in Warzone Pacific! If you’re interested in seeing more of our Warzone content, check out some of these guides and lists below: Best streamer loadouts | Most popular Warzone weapons| Best Sniper Rifles | Mac-10 loadout | Top 20 highest-earning players | Top class setups and best weapons | 10 best Warzone players

Best Type 11 CoD Vanguard class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Proficiency, Setup ActivisionThe Type 11 is one of CoD Vanguard’s most versatile LMGs and with the right build, it can absolutely shred through lobbies without a hassle. So from the ideal attachments to the very best Perks, here’s a complete guide to our ultimate Type 11 loadout. When you think of LMGs in any CoD title, you often think of slow and sluggish weapons with larger magazines. While it’s certainly slower than an SMG, Vanguard’s Type 11 is the most versatile in its category, making it a strong pick even for AR mains. With the right set of attachments, it can fry from any range and have you piling up the killstreaks across every map and mode. So to get you tearing through entire teams in the blink of an eye, use our ultimate Type 11 loadout in CoD Vanguard to make the most of the powerful LMG. Contents Best Type 11 CoD Vanguard loadout – Best Type 11 CoD Vanguard loadout (Perks & Equipment) – How to unlock the Type 11 in CoD Vanguard – Alternative to the Type 11 CoD Vanguard loadout – Best Type 11 CoD Vanguard loadout Muzzle: F8 Stabilizer – Barrel: Sakura 487MM Shrouded – Optic: ZF4 3.5x Rifle Scope – Stock: Warubachi Type 33 – Underbarrel: M1941 Hand Stop – Magazine: 8MM Klauser 45 Round Hopper – Ammo Type: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Stippled Grip – Proficiency: Sleight of Hand – Kit: Fully Loaded – While the Type 11 is already strong in its own right, its accuracy from long range is what truly sets it apart. Therefore, it’s key to put the right attachments around it that help elevate its best stats, rather than trying to make it a more agile LMG, for instance. So starting off we have the F8 Stabilizer Muzzle, a strong pick for just about every automatic weapon in Vanguard today. Not only is the 7.1% boot to horizontal recoil control a great place to begin, but an added 10% damage range helps form the strongest LMG possible. Next is the Sakura 487MM Shrouded Barrel, perhaps the most important attachment of this entire build. While most stat boosts range from 10%-30%, this Barrel provides a staggering 640.7% buff to damage range. Put simply, you’ll be dealing max damage from anywhere on the map with this attachment. That’s without mentioning it also provides huge recoil control improvements as well. As for the Optic, we’ve settled on the ZF4 3.5x Rifle Scope. Others may provide better zoom or faster ADS speeds, but this particular attachment actually gives you better recoil. There’s no reason to pick against it when this attachment will keep your shots on point. In the next slot is the Warubachi Type 33 Stock, another must-have attachment on the Type 11. With an added 20% flinch resistance, your accuracy will still be intact, even while under fire. Similarly, the M1941 Hand Stop Underbarrel adds a further boost to your LMG’s accuracy, making it an essential pick. When it comes to the Magazine, there’s no looking past the 8MM Klauser 45 Round Hopper, a clear standout in the category. A whopping 33.3% damage increase alongside 20% extra Bullet Velocity is just too strong to pass up. Although it does impact your recoil, we’ve already selected the right attachments to help compensate. There’s also nothing better than the Lengthened Ammo Type for this Type 11 build. Bullet Velocity is key and this is one of the simplest ways to help boost that stat. Keeping in line with previous picks, the Stipple Grip Rear Grip is another solid option to further help improve recoil control. When all 10 attachments combine in this Type 11 loadout, you’ll be firing with near-perfect accuracy. Rounding it all out we have the Sleight of Hand Proficiency along with the Fully Loaded Kit. The former drastically reduces reload time, helping you prepare for the next gunfight in just a matter of seconds. While the latter is great for LMGs if you’re ready to hunker down, as the extra ammo can keep you in one spot longer than usual. Best Type 11 CoD Vanguard loadout (Perks, Equipment, & Field Upgrade) Perk 1: Ghost – Perk 2: Piercing Vision – Perk 3: Double Time – Secondary: 1911 – Lethal: Thermite – Tactical: Stim – Field Upgrade: Armor – For the rest of this Type 11 build, the right Perks, Equipment, and Field Upgrade all go a long way to keeping you ahead of the curve. To start out, we’ve gone with Ghost, Piercing Vision, and Double Time as our three Perks. Ghost has long been an optimal pick in just about any CoD title as it helps keep you hidden when Spy Planes are in the air. Meanwhile, Double Time is a solid pick to get you back into a gunfight off spawn quicker than usual. As the final option, Piercing Vision is one of the more unique picks but it can’t be overlooked. You’ll constantly be mowing down targets with this Type 11 LMG, but if you only happen to land one or two bullets before an enemy gets away, this Perk will keep them in your sights. A bright outline will let you keep on firing through walls with perfect accuracy. Equipping a 1911 as your Secondary is always handy if reloading isn’t an option. LMGs have the slowest reload speeds of anything in Vanguard, thus, having a quick pistol at the ready can always be helpful. Thermite and Stim are both powerful options for lethal and tactical equipment here as the former deals damage over a wide area, while the latter will quickly heal you back up after a heated gunfight. Closing things out is the Armor Field Upgrade that complements the LMG playstyle perfectly. Having extra health is never a bad thing so running this option with your Type 11 is all but essential. How to unlock the Type 11 in CoD Vanguard Unlocking the Type 11 in CoD Vanguard couldn’t be simpler as this gun becomes available at level 37. It may take a good few days of grinding to reach that level, but using Double XP codes are a great way to help. Grinding in fast-paced playlists is also a solid idea so that you’re always earning experience. Alternative to the Type 11 loadout in CoD Vanguard While the Type 11 LMG is one of the more versatile in Vanguard, it certainly doesn’t fit every playstyle. If you’re rather run and gun, the strongest MP40 loadout would be more up your alley. Read More: Best controller settings for CoD Vanguard – As the standout SMG early into Vanguard’s meta, it’s easily enough to get you atop the scoreboards. With mobility as the key focus, you’ll be running through any given map much faster than if you had an LMG in hand. So that’s everything there is to know about our ultimate Type 11 loadout in CoD Vanguard. But with new updates coming almost every week, we’re sure to see plenty of balance adjustments over time. We’ll keep you updated right here with an updated build following every big patch. For now, be sure to check out some other top-tier Vanguard loadouts before you jump back in: Best Automaton loadout | Best Itra loadout | Best M1928 loadout | Best STG44 loadout | Best Bren loadout | Best 3-Line Rifle loadout | Best NZ-41 loadout

Best Type 100 Warzone loadout: Class setup, Attachments, Perks Treyarch/ActivisionThe MP40 is the go-to SMG for the majority of Warzone players in the current meta, but it may be time to pick up the Type 100, a powerful gun that’s only recently started garnering attention. When it comes to picking an SMG in Warzone, most players will gravitate towards the most popular option, which is currently the MP40 with a 7% pick rate. While popularity is definitely a strong metric, it can lead the community to choose a weapon by default, instead of evaluating all the available options. One gun that’s certainly gone under the radar until now is the Type 100, a lethal SMG capable of melting enemies at close to medium range. Despite this, you’ll need to run a meta loadout if you want to get the most out of the weapon, and luckily, we’ve got you covered. Contents Best Type 100 Warzone loadout – Best Type 100 Warzone class – How to unlock the Type 100 in Warzone – Alternative to the Type 100 Warzone loadout – Best Type 100 Warzone loadout Attachments Muzzle: Recoil Booster – Barrel: VDD 189mm Short – Optic: Slate Reflector – Stock: Warubachi Grip Folding – Underbarrel: SG98 Compact – Magazine: .30 Russian Short 36 Round Mag – Ammo Type: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Grooved Grip – Perk: Fleet – Perk2: Quick – First of all, you’ll want to run the Recoil Booster muzzle and VDD 189mm Short barrel to significantly increase the weapons’ fire rate and overall damage. While this build does lack a silencer to keep you off radars, it’s well worth it as the boost in fire rate takes the Type 100’s TTK to a new level. After that, utilize the Warubachi Folding, SG98 Compact, and Grooved Grip to bolster the SMG’s recoil, as well as improve sprint to fire time and ADS speed. These attachments combined with the Slate Reflector will allow you to lock onto targets and eliminate them in an instant. When it comes to bullets, make sure you run Lengthened to increase the Type 100’s damage at range, as well as the .30 Russian 36 Round Mag so you can take out multiple opponents without having to reload. Finally, finish off the loadout with Fleet and Quick to keep the mobility high. Best Type 100 Warzone class Perks & Equipment When it comes to perks, our loadout runs the standard meta choices with Amped increasing your weapon swap speeds during intense gunfights, and EOD protecting you from explosive blasts While Ghost can be a strong choice, we recommend running Overkill so you can equip a sniper or long-range AR as your secondary. This will allow you to remain competitive in any gunfight, no matter where the enemy is located. Finally, round off the loadout with a Throwing Knife to finish off downed opponents and the Stim for a boost of health when you need it most. How to unlock the Type 100 in Warzone Unlike some of the other Vanguard weapons on the arsenal, the Type 100 is relatively easy to unlock and shouldn’t take you too long. All you need to do is reach an overall level of 39 and the weapon is yours, so it’s just a case of grinding out matches. Alternative to the Type 100 Warzone loadout If you’re looking for an alternative to the Type 100, it may be time to follow the crowd and pick up Warzone’s most popular SMG, the MP40. With a deadly TTK and impressive mobility, the weapon is easily capable of taking over a match on Caldera, as long as you land your shots and avoid taking long-range skirmishes. Of course, you’ll need a loadout to get the most out of the MP40, and luckily, we’ve got a class guide that goes over the best setup in the current meta. If you want to keep updated with all the latest Warzone and Vanguard news and updates, then be sure to check out our Call of Duty page.

Best Type 100 Vanguard class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Proficiency, Setup Activision/Sledgehammer GamesThe best Type 100 loadout can net you plenty of close-quarter kills in no time if you use this lethal Call of Duty: Vanguard loadout. Find out which attachments and perks you should equip to make the strongest SMG build. While CoD Vanguard lobbies are dominated by STG44, Automaton, and MP40 loadouts, the Type 100 is another viable option for those looking to go on close-quarter tears. This Japanese SMG features high speeds, fantastic accuracy, and great firepower. When the Type 100 is kitted out with the game’s best attachments, you’ll be able to clean up enemies on Das Haus and secure plenty of multi-kills. Whether you’re grinding out the Atomic weapon camo or just want a laser, this SMG loadout will give you plenty of damage. Contents Best Type 100 Vanguard loadout – Best Type 100 Vanguard class (Perks, Equipment, & Field Upgrade) – Best Type 100 class Vanguard tips – How to unlock the Type 100 in Vanguard – Alternative to the Type 100 Vanguard loadout – Best Type 100 Vanguard loadout Muzzle: M1929 Silencer – Barrel: Warubachi 134MM Rapid – Optic: Slate Reflector – Stock: Warubachi Skeletal – Underbarrel: M1930 Strife Angled – Magazine: .30 Russian Short 30 Round Mags – Ammo Type: Hollow Point – Rear Grip: Fabric Grip – Proficiency: Vital – Kit: Fully Loaded – The best Type 100 loadout is tailored around boosting the gun’s firepower and ammo capacity. First up on the list is the M1929 Silencer – a staple choice on Vanguard meta SMGs. This muzzle keeps your shots silenced and increases the gun’s accuracy, while the M1930 Strife Angled underbarrel also improves this area even further. Having attachments that aid the Type 100’s accuracy is incredibly important, especially since they help counter the recoil from using the .30 Russian Short 30 Round Mags. However, the added damage, bullet velocity, range, and penetration from this Magazine are well worth the tradeoff. Adding to the damage range is the Warubachi 134MM Rapid barrel, which helps give you a fighting chance during mid-range firefights. The Slate Reflector also provides you with a clean sight without any obstructions to your vision. The Type 100’s main damage increase comes from both the Hollow Point rounds and Vital Proficiency attachments. Not only do these increase limb damage, but they also apply the headshot damage bonus to bodyshots. This greatly increases your DPS and turns the Type 100 into an absolute monster. Meanwhile, the Warubachi Skeletal and Fabric Grip enhance the gun’s ADS speed and overall mobility, enabling you to aggressively rush down your foes and react to incoming threats. Pair this with Fully Loaded and you have an SMG that can mow down multiple enemies in the blink of an eye. Best Type 100 Vanguard class (Perks, Equipment, & Field Upgrade) Perk 1: Ninja – Perk 2: Radar – Perk 3: Lightweight – Secondary: Machine Pistol – Lethal: MK2 Frag Grenade – Tactical: Stim – Field Upgrade: Dead Silence – The best Type 100 loadout uses Ninja, Radar, and Lightweight as its perk choices. Just like previous CoD titles, Ninja quietens your footsteps, which enables you to go for those sneaky flanks behind enemy lines. Next up is Radar. Lots of players are still unsure of how to be properly suppressed and silenced in Vanguard. So Radar will help flush out players that aren’t properly hidden from the minimap when firing. Lightweight is a great choice for any close-quarters loadout as it enables you to quickly close the gap, while the added movement speed makes you harder to hit. The Machine Pistol is also a solid secondary and can deliver plenty of kills if you run out of Type 100 ammo. Lastly, both the Stim and Dead Silence help maximize your movement and survivability, enabling you to turn the tide of even the fiercest of firefights. Best Type 100 class Vanguard tips While the Type 100 may not be the most popular SMG in Vanguard, that doesn’t mean it can’t be highly effective in the right hands. Its fast fire rate and high mobility, as well as the class we created for it, makes this SMG extremely deadly and underrated. Here are a few tips on how to maximize our best Type 100 Vanguard loadout: This weapon is an SMG, you should focus on getting into close-ranged gunfights as much as possible. Assault Rifles and LMGs will always have the advantage at medium to long ranges. – The Type 100 has a fast fire rate which makes it even deadlier up close and at point-blank ranges. Take advantage of this in game. – The perk “Ninja” quietens your footsteps and “Lightweight” gives you additional movement speed. Use this combo to flank enemies faster, while also being stealthy. – The field upgrade “Dead Silence” completely removes your footstep audio from the equation. During this limited window, you can either choose to flank enemies, escape sticky situations, or make a stealthy play for the objective. – Also, remember to always develop a playstyle that feels the best for you. With that said, if you’re still struggling to succeed with the Type 100, these tips should be helpful. How to unlock the Type 100 in Vanguard In order to unlock the Type 100 in CoD Vanguard, you’ll need to reach Rank 39. This shouldn’t take too long if you make use of Double XP tokens and play on 24/7 playlists featuring Das Haus and/or Shipment. Meanwhile, the higher density of players in the Blitz Combat Pacing can also help you secure more kills per game. Alternative to the Type 100 Vanguard loadout If you’re looking for an alternative loadout to the Type 100, check out our best M1928 loadout. This iconic SMG comes packed with even higher speeds, firepower, and great ammo capacity than the Type 100. Despite being unlocked earlier than the Japanese SMG, the M1928 is a solid replacement for those who prefer having more ammo at their disposal. This also makes it a great pick on maps with higher volumes of enemy players. So, there you have it, the best Type 100 loadout that can quickly melt enemies in close-quarter firefights. Make sure you check out our other Vanguard loadout guides to get a competitive edge over your foes: Best BAR loadout | Best Itra loadout | Best MP40 loadout | Best STG44 loadout

Best TR-76 Geist Warzone loadout: Class setup, attachments & perks The new TR-76 Geist is a versatile primary that is perfectly suited to Warzone but to get the most out of it you’ll need a meta class. Here’s the best TR-76 Geist loadout for Warzone including attachments and perks. Based on the Ukrainian Malyuk, the TR-76 Geist is a new bullpup assault rifle introduced in Warzone Season 6. It offers fantastic long-range capabilities while being accurate and still holding its own up close. This highly versatile automatic primary is perfectly suited to Warzone and has quickly established itself as one of the best guns in COD’s battle royale. With the new AR being a top-tier option you’ll want to use it so we’ve put together the best TR-76 Geist loadout to use in Warzone. Contents Best TR-76 Geist Warzone loadout – Best TR-76 Geist Warzone class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the TR-76 Geist in Warzone – Best TR-76 Geist alternatives in Warzone – Best TR-76 Geist Warzone loadout Attachments Muzzle: SA Leveler 55 – Barrel: Bruen Bridle 60 – Optic: Aim OP-V4 – Underbarrel: FTAC Ripper 56 – Magazine: 45 Round Mag – With the TR-76 Geist being one of the most accurate ARs in Warzone it’s best to build on that strength. To further reduce recoil and turn it laser accurate it’s best to use the SA Leveler 55 muzzle and FTAC Ripper 56 underbarrel. These keep it stable and easy to control at just about any range. Equally, a clear optic is desirable to make tracking targets at long range easier. There are a few solid options but the Aim OP-V4 remains the best overall choice due to the low amounts of visual recoil it produces. The Bruen Bridle Bridle 60 barrel is a great choice too as it improves both recoil and bullet velocity. These are key stats in Warzone as many of your gunfights will take place over long distances where accuracy is a must. Finally, running the 45 Round Mag is useful to secure multiple downs and kills without having to reload. Without this attachment, you’ll often get caught out with an empty magazine leaving you vulnerable in crucial moments. Best TR-76 Geist Warzone class: Perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Overkill – Base Perk 2: Double Time – Bonus Perk: Fast Hands – Ultimate Perk: High Alert – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Smoke Grenade – As with most Warzone loadouts, Overkill is a must to make your class more versatile. Even though the TR-76 Geist excels in a wide range of situations it’s still best to partner it with an SMG or shotgun for close-range gunfights. Double Time is another Warzone staple, especially when using heavier weapons like the Geist. It doubles the duration of tactical sprint letting you move around the map faster and escape any would-be pursuers. We like Fast Hands as a Bonus Perk to minimize time spent reloading and maximize time spent securing kills for your team. As for the Ultimate Perk, Ghost provides immunity from enemy radars making it less likely that other teams will be able to track you down. A Smoke Grenade remains the best Tactical equipment as it can be used to create impromptu cover and cross otherwise dangerous areas. The Lethal slot is more flexible but a Semtex works well as it can be thrown quickly to pressure enemies trying to heal. How to unlock the TR-76 Geist in Warzone The TR-76 Geist can be unlocked in Warzone by reaching and completing Sector F7 of the Season 6 Battle Pass. This requires a minimum of 20 Battle Pass Tokens starting from F1. Alternatively, Warzone players can obtain the TR-76 Geist by successfully extracting it in a DMZ game. This can be done with any blueprint dropped by either an enemy player or teammate. Best TR-76 Geist alternatives in Warzone If it’s an accurate, long-range assault rifle you want then there’s no harm opting for the classic pick before the TR-76 Geist was released, the M13B. It doesn’t hit quite as hard but that M13B is an easy weapon to use at any range. For something less accurate that has the same punchiness as the Geist consider using the Kastov 762. The AK-inspired AR has been a strong choice in Warzone since launch and remains a powerful option to this day. That’s everything you need to know about the best TR-76 Geist loadout in Warzone. For more information on COD check out some of our other content: Best Warzone weapons: Ultimate tier list with meta loadouts | Call of Duty 2024: Early leaks, concept art, Warzone 2.0, Treyarch & more | Call of Duty: Modern Warfare III — Everything we know | Best M4 Warzone 2 loadout | Best Modern Warfare 2 weapons: Ultimate tier list with the best classes | Modern Warfare 2 best settings on PC for FPS, graphics, visibility, more

Best TR-76 Geist Modern Warfare 2 class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Setup The TR-76 Geist is the 15th and final assault rifle added to MW2 before its sequel is released. Despite being such a late addition it’s a seriously strong option that players won’t want to miss out on, so here’s the best TR-76 Geist loadout in Modern Warfare 2 multiplayer. Modern Warfare 2 Season 6 has introduced two new guns, the ISO 9mm & TR-76 Geist. This latter is a hard-hitting bullpup assault rifle based on the real-world Malyuk, also known as the Vulcan-M. This Ukrainian AR trades off fire rate in favor of damage output and effective range with it being able to outgun most other weapons at a distance. Although best in medium to long-range gunfights the Geist still holds its own up close making it remarkably versatile. To get the most out of the TR-76 Geist you’ll want to use our best Modern Warfare 2 loadout for multiplayer as it makes the new assault rifle great in just about every situation. Contents Best TR-76 Geist MW2 loadout – Best TR-76 Geist MW2 loadout: Perks & Equipment – How to unlock the TR-76 Geist in Modern Warfare 2 – Best TR-76 Geist alternatives in Modern Warfare 2 – Best TR-76 Geist MW2 loadout Attachments Muzzle: FT Titan Silencer – Laser: Accu-Shot 5mW Laser – Stock: Expedite Grid Pad – Underbarrel: FTAC Ripper 56 – Rear Grip: Stip-66 Grip – Given that it’s chambered in 7.62 you’d probably expect the TR-76 Geist to kick a lot but in reality, it’s actually a very accurate gun. Thanks to this you don’t need to use a recoil-reducing muzzle and can get away with a suppressor instead like the FT Titan Silencer. Although recoil control isn’t a huge priority with the TR-76 it still doesn’t hurt to equip the Stip-66 rear grip. This provides a nice reduction to vertical recoil with little downside letting you remain as accurate as possible at long range. Since long-range engagements are so important with this weapon you’ll want the best Aiming Stability possible. To get this it’s best to use both the FTAC Ripper 56 underbarrel and Accu-Shot 5mW Laser. The laser comes with the additional bonus of speeding up the Geist’s ADS too which is always nice. Finally, the TR-76 Geist’s mobility isn’t all that great so it’s recommended to use the Expedite Grip Pad stock. When equipped this stock speeds up both Aim Walking Speed and Sprint Speed making it easier to play more aggressively and move around the map. Best TR-76 Geist MW2 loadout: Perks & Equipment Base Perk 1: Bomb Squad – Base Perk 2: Extra Tactical – Bonus Perk: Cold-Blooded – Ultimate Perk: Ghost – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Stim – Bomb Squad offers a fantastic choice for a Base Perk as it can directly save your life. This synergizes well with Extra Tactical which can be used to get multiple Stims to rapidly heal yourself back up after Bomb Squad keeps you alive. For Bonus Perk, Cold-Blooded is an obvious choice to use with a silencer to stay stealthy and avoid getting taken out by enemy killstreaks. Equally, Ghost is the best Ultimate Perk as it also plays into the stealthy playstyle by keeping you off the enemy radar when UAVs are called in. The best equipment to use is Semtex for Lethal and Stim for Tactical. A Semtex is great as it can be quickly thrown to pressure enemies and gain the edge in a gunfight, and Stims are used to heal up quickly when under pressure. How to unlock TR-76 Geist in Modern Warfare 2 The TR-76 Geist can be unlocked in MW2 by reaching and completing Sector F7 of the Season 6 Battle Pass. This requires a minimum of 20 Battle Pass Tokens starting from F1. Alternatively, Modern Warfare 2 players can obtain the TR-76 Geist by successfully extracting it in any DMZ game. This can be done with any blueprint dropped by either an enemy player or teammate. Best TR-76 Geist alternatives in Modern Warfare 2 The Kastov 762 is another hard-hitting assault rifle that can compete with most other guns at medium and long range. It’s harder to control than the TR-76 Geist but its higher fire rate makes the Kastov more forgiving. Another interesting alternative to the TR-76 Geist is the Cronen Squall. It also dominates at long range despite having a slower fire rate than most guns. Even after the numerous nerfs it has received the Squall remains one of the best primary weapons in Modern Warfare 2. That’s everything you need to know about the best TR-76 Geist loadout in MW2 multiplayer. For more information on COD check out some of our other content: Best Warzone weapons: Ultimate tier list with meta loadouts | Call of Duty 2024: Early leaks, concept art, Warzone 2.0, Treyarch & more | Call of Duty: Modern Warfare III — Everything we know | Best M4 Warzone 2 loadout | Best Modern Warfare 2 weapons: Ultimate tier list with the best classes | Modern Warfare 2 best settings on PC for FPS, graphics, visibility, more

Best Torque 35 ammo type in MW3 & Warzone DexertoMW3 and Warzone received yet another new weapon in Season 5 Reloaded, with the Torque 35 adding a powerful bow to the game’s ever-growing armory. With it being a compound bow of all things, it’s easy to assume the Torque 35 is just a gimmick. However, this launcher is seriously strong, especially in multiplayer, where it can one shot at any range. What makes the bow so good is its unique ammunition, as the Torque 35 can equip five different types of arrows. Each of these offers unique effects that either make them deadlier or provide utility to better fulfill its role as a secondary. How you use the Torque 35 affects which arrows are best. Despite this, there are clear standouts that make it as effective as possible and others that aren’t even worth considering. Best Torque 35 ammunition in Modern Warfare 3 The best ammunition to use in multiplayer is the Ripper Arrows. These greatly boost damage, allowing the Torque 35 to one shot at any range. This makes them extremely strong and capable of beating even meta snipers in the right hands. However, there are cons to this attachment. Both the velocity and fire rate are reduced when using Ripper Arrows, which can make the bow less forgiving. Even so, the increased damage is simply too good to pass up on. Best Torque 35 ammunition in Warzone The best ammunition to use in Warzone is the Snapshot Arrows. These perform similarly to the regular ammo, with the added bonus of scanning enemies similar to a Snapshot Grenade, revealing the locations of anyone nearby. Furthermore, they travel at the same velocity as the standard ammunition, making them more effective at long range. This is essential in a game like Warzone, where gunfights frequently take place over long distances. All Torque 35 ammo types There are six ammo types that you can use with the Torque 35. Each of these offers different benefits, with some increasing damage and others providing utility. Here are the six arrow types you can use with the Torque 35: Standard Arrow: Standard-issue ammunition that offers a balance of damage and ease of use. – Ripper Arrow: These arrows fly slower but deal massive damage on impact. – Blastcap Arrows: Explosive arrows that deal area damage and are effective against vehicles. – Blaze Arrow: Thermite-tipped arrows that stick to targets and burn on impact. – Caustic Arrow: Arrows with tear gas canisters equipped that detonate on impact. – Snapshot Arrow: Advanced arrows that ping and reveal nearby enemies on impact. – To unlock the Torque 35, you’ll need to complete weekly challenges. While you work on those, consider also getting the Spear, a powerful melee weapon added in Season 5 Reloaded. To see how both of these fit into the meta, be sure to check out the best MW3 weapons and best Warzone loadouts.

Best Top Break Warzone loadout: Class setup, Attachments, Perks ActivisionThe best Top Break Warzone loadout can obliterate your foes in close-quarter engagements, giving you the edge in late-game circles. Vanguard’s Top Break handgun has proven incredibly popular amongst the game’s pro and casual players alike. After all, having a deadly secondary you can rely upon in close-quarter firefights is incredibly important. Not only does the Top Break deliver huge amounts of damage, but they are also extremely easy to use. These punchy Akimbo pistols can down a fully armored enemy in just a few shots, which makes the Top Break an extremely viable option in Warzone Season 1. In order to get the most out of this deadly secondary, we’ve put together the best Top Break loadout that will give you a competitive edge over your foes. Contents Best Top Break Warzone loadout – Best Top Break setup (Perks & equipment) – How to unlock the Top Break in Warzone – Alternative to the Top Break Warzone loadout – Best Top Break Warzone loadout Attachments Muzzle: F8 Stabilizer – Barrel: Wilkie W-4 Stub – Trigger Action: Hair Trigger – Magazine: 30. Russian Short – Ammunition: M15 Shot Shell – Rear Grip: Fabric Grip – Perk 1: Akimbo – Perk 2: Quick – The best Top Break Warzone loadout boosts the gun’s damage and fire rate, which allows you to quickly eliminate opponents before they can even react. First up are the F8 Stabilizer, Wilkie W-4 Stub, and 30. Russian Short mags. All three of these attachments drastically increase the Top Break’s damage and bullet velocity. When this is combined with the added fire rate from the Hair Trigger and damage radius from the M15 Shot Shell, you have an incredibly hard-hitting secondary. Once you get within range of your target, simply spam your shots and watch as your foe’s health bar drops to zero. Read More: Best Cooper Carbine Warzone loadout – If that wasn’t good enough, the added mobility and sprint to fire speed from Quick and the Fabric Grip enables you to aggressively rush enemy squads. Of course, the main thing that makes the Top Break so oppressive is the Akimbo perk. This enables players to use two handguns, giving the user even greater DPS. This does come at a sacrifice to accuracy and range, but the close-quarters kill potential more than makes up for these negatives. Best Top Break setup (Perks & equipment) Perks & Equipment Perk 1: E.O.D. – Perk 2: Ghost – Perk 3: Amped – Primary: STG44 – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Stim – Our best Top Break Warzone loadout utilizes EOD, Ghost, and Amped. EOD and Amped keep you safe from explosive blasts, while also giving increased speed when swapping to your secondary weapon. The latter is incredibly important as you’ll be switching to the Top Break in close-quarter engagements. Lastly, Ghost keeps you hidden from enemy UAVs and Heartbeat Sensors. Read More: Best STG44 Warzone loadout – As the Top Break lacks any form of range, we recommend using the STG44 or Automaton ARs. Both these loadouts deal fantastic damage in mid-range firefights, which enables you to remain effective across the majority of Caldera’s environments. Lastly, both the Semtex and Stim will give you the tools needed to flush out pesky campers and survive any lethal damage. How to unlock the Top Break in Warzone In order to unlock the Top Break in Warzone, you’ll need to reach level rank 12 in Warzone or Vanguard. This means most players will already have access to this handgun, but for those that don’t, you’ll simply want to play matches in Warzone or Vanguard’s multiplayer. Once you’ve got your hands on the Top Break, you’ll be able to start grinding out the best attachments. Alternative to the Top Break Warzone loadout While the Top Break is currently the best handgun in Warzone, players who enjoy having an SMG in their back pocket will want to utilize the MP40. This WW2 SMG is currently one of the most popular close-range options in Warzone Season 1. Read More: Best BAR Warzone loadout – This is thanks to its high rate of fire, great damage, and fantastic hipfire accuracy. In fact, the MP40 can take down multiple enemies when kitted out with the right attachments. If you want to maximize your damage, then be sure to check out our best MP40 Warzone loadout. So, there you have it, the best Top Break loadout that can give you an edge in Warzone. If you want to keep updated with all the latest Warzone and Vanguard news and updates, then be sure to check out our Call of Duty page.

Best things to buy in Call of Duty: Warzone battle royale Call of Duty players have now had over a day to get themselves acclimated with Warzone. There is still lots to figure out, of course, and among them are the best things to buy with your hard-earned cash. Unlike other battle royale games, cash is king in Call of Duty: Warzone. Having enough cash is often the difference between victory and defeat. In addition to being able to buy your squadmate back into the game, there an array of other killstreaks and general help you can purchase. The question is though, which are the most important and useful to buy. What’s the most important thing to buy? Before we discuss which are the best and most important, here is a list of everything you can currently purchase from a Buy Station. These are sporadically dotted around the Warzone map and aren’t too difficult to find. Armor Plate Bundle – $1,500 – Shield Turret – $2,000 – Cluster Strike – $3,000 – Gas Mask – $3,000 – Precision Airstrike – $3,500 – UAV – $4,000 – Self-Revive Kit – $4,500 – Munitions Box – $5,000 – Loadout Drop Marker – $6,000 – Redeployment – $4,500 – Deciding what you should buy first is down to opinion. Nevertheless, there does seem to be some purchases which you should prioritize. At the top of that list should be squad buyback, where you bring a squadmate back into the game. You will only need to use this should they have failed in their Gulag fight or have been killed for a second time. It will cost you $4,500 – so it’s not cheap – but there’s nothing worse than having to sit on the sidelines. After all, you’d want to the favor reciprocated. It’s also highly beneficial to have an extra player with you. A self-revive kit is also high up on the list. Again, it costs a noteworthy $4,500 but can be the difference between death and survival. It’s probably worth holding onto if you’re confident a squadmate can get you up. Elsewhere, a UAV is also far from cheap. At $4,000 it will no doubt put some players off but in those final circles, it’s incredibly useful to have. Finally, armor plates don’t scream buy me but they are essential – especially if you’re getting into a lot of fights. In close battles, the player who has more armor will often win the gunfight. At $1,500 it is more than a justifiable purchase. Dr Disrespect, Nadeshot, and more have been sharing their first impressions of CoD: Warzone ? What’s your opinion on #Warzone so far? pic.twitter.com/XGhNw1irhu — DEXERTO Call of Duty #Warzone (@DexertoIntel) March 11, 2020 How to get more money Considering you start any given match with no money in the bank, you’ll need to get hold of cash quickly. Unfortunately, there is no magical way to get hold of lots quickly (otherwise everyone would be doing it) but you can certainly tip the odds in your favor. Firstly, scurrying around the map and looting is a great way to pick random batches of cash. These vary between $500 and into the multiples of thousands. This alone may not get what you want from the buy stations, though. The way to accumulate the most money is through killing others – although this is, of course, risky business. Finish a downed player and you’ll be able to take the entirety of their cash. Finally, your team can find contracts around the map. The contract will ask you and your team to perform a random task which you’ll be paid x amount of $ for completing. The meta for Warzone may change over time and there may even be new items introduced. For the moment, however, the above items seem to be the ones you should focus on.

Best Tempus Torrent Warzone 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments & perks ActivisionSeason 2 Reloaded introduced a new marksman rifle and it’s already making a huge impact in the Warzone 2 meta. In order to maximize this gun’s potential, we’ve got the best Tempus Torrent loadout in WZ2 for you to use on Al Mazrah and Ashika Island. DMRs dominated Warzone 1, as the DMR 14 Tactical Rifle took over battle royale lobbies for months following Black Ops Cold War’s integration. Some community members still consider the classes reign of terror one of the most overpowered metas in Warzone history. The class has failed to make similar waves in WZ2 due to LMGs becoming the go-to choice for long-range engagements. However, a new contender emerged in Season 2 Reloaded with the introduction of the Tempus Torrent Marksman Rifle. Here’s everything you need to know about getting the most out of Warzone 2’s latest weapon. Contents Best Tempus Torrent Warzone 2 loadout – Best Tempus Torrent Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the Tempus Torrent in Warzone 2 – Best Tempus Torrent alternatives in Warzone 2 – Best Tempus Torrent Warzone 2 loadout Attachments Barrel: 14″ Chroma LRS – Optic: AIM OP-V4 – Underbarrel: Phase-3 Grip – Ammunition: 7.62 High Velocity – Magazine: 30 Round Mag – In the Season 2 Reloaded blog post, the developers described the Tempus Torrent as offering the “versatility of the M4 platform and the velocity and impact of 7.62 rounds.” Marksman rifles require precise accuracy, and the Phase-3 Grip improves aiming idle stability and recoil stabilization. In the Season 2 Reloaded update, the developers reduced the ADS penalty on barrel grips, making the Phase-3 Grip even stronger. Best Tempus Torrent Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment Season 2 removed perk packages. With the freedom to choose any perks in Warzone 2, we recommend using Battle Hardened, Fast Hands, and High Alert. As for equipment, we recommend using a Drill Charge for the lethal category to take care of annoying campers or vehicles. Smoke Grenades are the perfect tactical selection for moving between cover. How to unlock the Tempus Torrent in Warzone 2 To unlock the Tempus Torrent Marksman Rifle in Warzone 2, players can complete its Weapon Challenge, which requires you to get 25 Double Kills with a Marksman Rifle. This challenge will be easier to complete in multiplayer in the Close Quarters playlist or whichever small map playlist is available. Additionally, players can simply purchase the weapon with real money via a Store Bundle available after the update. Best Tempus Torrent alternatives in Warzone 2 If the Tempus Torrent does check all of the boxes for you, we recommend using the TAQ-M or EBR-14. The TAQ-M is accurate, strong, and easy to use with the right attachments. While the EBR deletes foes with its impressive damage output.

Best Tempus Torrent Modern Warfare 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments & perks ActivisionModern Warfare 2 introduced a new marksman rifle, and the Tempus Torrent wreaks havoc in multiplayer. For our best loadout, we’re going to show you the best attachments and Perks you should be running with it. Marksman rifles don’t fare too well in Warzone 2 but dominate multiplayer in the right hands. The class provides a perfect hybrid for aggressive sniper users. Devastating power and blistering fast ADS speed make Marksman rifles incredibly difficult to counter. However, most marksman rifles are single-shot weapons, so it can be unforgiving if you miss your shots. A rare exception is the TAQ-M, which boasts fully automatic capabilities. A marksman rifle damage profile and fast fire rate make it the best class option for some players. Season 2 Reloaded introduced a new semi-automatic marksman rifle that has the potential to dethrone the TAQ-M. Contents Best Tempus Torrent Modern Warfare 2 loadout – Best Tempus Torrent Modern Warfare 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the Tempus Torrent in Modern Warfare 2 – Best Tempus Torrent alternatives in Modern Warfare 2 – Best Tempus Torrent Modern Warfare 2 loadout Muzzle: Sakin Tread-40 – Underbarrel: Edge-47 Grip – Rear Grip: Sakin ZX Grip – Stock: Ravage-8 – Laser: Schlager PEQ Box IV – In the Season 2 Reloaded blog post, the developers described the Tempus Torrent as offering the “versatility of the M4 platform and the velocity and impact of 7.62 rounds.” The semi-automatic weapon is much easier to use than other class offerings. We went for a build that helps alleviate the weapon’s recoil difficulties yet maintains a fast and mobile feel. The Sakin Tread-40 muzzle, Edge-47 Grip, and Sakin ZX Grip all help recoil control. The Season 2 Reloaded update reduced the ADS penalty on all under-barrel grips making the attachment even more important. As for mobility, the Ravage-8 stock and Schalger PEQ Box IV improve movement speed and ADS time. The laser we chose is probably your best bet, as it doesn’t give away your location to enemies. Best Tempus Torrent Modern Warfare 2 class: Perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Bomb Squad – Base Perk 2: Battle Hardened – Bonus Perk: Fast Hands – Ultimate Perk: High Alert – Lethal: Drill Charge – Tactical: Stim – Double Time is an extremely popular base perk selection, but the Tempus Torrent does not require running around too much. This weapon thrives by positioning yourself in good spots to hold down lanes. With that being said, we recommend using Bomb Squad and Battle Hardened to reduce the effects of tactical and lethal grenades. As for the Bonus Perk, Fast Hands blows other options out of the water, allowing players to reload, use equipment, and swap weapons faster. And finally, for the Ultimate Perk, High Alert pulses when an enemy spots you, making it easier to hold an angle without the fear of getting shot from behind. Drill Charges will come in handy for dealing with campers, and using a stim will save your life when your back is against the wall. How to unlock the Tempus Torrent in Modern Warfare 2 To unlock the Tempus Torrent Marksman Rifle in Warzone 2, players can complete its Weapon Challenge, which requires you to get 25 Double Kills with a Marksman Rifle. This challenge will be easier to complete in multiplayer in the Close Quarters playlist or whichever small map playlist is available. Additionally, players can simply purchase the weapon with real money via a Store Bundle available after the update. Best Tempus Torrent alternatives in Modern Warfare 2 If the Tempus Torrent does check all of the boxes for you, we recommend using the TAQ-M or EBR-14. The TAQ-M is accurate, strong, and easy to use with the right attachments, while the EBR deletes foes with its impressive damage output. That wraps up our Modern Warfare 2 loadout guide for the Tempus Torrent, so check out some of our other content we have for the game: Modern Warfare 2 weapon | Best Modern Warfare 2 weapons | Can you play Modern Warfare 2 on Steam Deck? | Call of Duty 2023: Early leaks, Modern Warfare 2, Warzone 2, more | Best Kastov 762 Modern Warfare 2 loadout | Best Expedite 12 Modern Warfare 2 loadout | Best M4 Modern Warfare 2 loadout | Best Vaznev-9k Modern Warfare 2 loadout

Best Tempus Razorback Warzone loadout: Class setup, attachments & perks ActivisionLongtime COD fans will remember the Razorback SMG from Black Ops 3, but the new Tempus Razorback is a much different animal. In order to maximize the Season 4 AR’s potential, we’ve put together the best Tempus Razorback loadout in Warzone. Season 4 fundamentally changes gunfights in Warzone by increasing base player health from 100 to 150. With full armor plates, the total combined health equals 300. The update also increased health regeneration time to 7 seconds, up from five. Infinity Ward explained that this change increases the number of bullets it takes to down an enemy but still gives players a chance to “capitalize on their damage done,” thanks to the delayed regeneration. Players will need to be more accurate as it takes more shots to down an enemy, and the devs just so happened to add a perfect AR suited to changes made. Let’s jump right into the best Tempus Razorback loadout in Warzone. Contents Best Tempus Razorback Warzone loadout – Best Tempus Razorback Warzone class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the Tempus Razorback in Warzone 2 – Best Tempus Razorback alternatives in Warzone 2 – Best Tempus Razorback Warzone loadout Attachments Muzzle: Harbinger D20 (+0.89, +0.63) – Barrel: 16″ TANKR-V (+0.40, +0.34) – Optic: Aim-OP V4 (-2.13, -1.65) – Underbarrel: FTAC Ripper 56 (+0.64, +0.31) – Magazine: 60 Round Mag – Our Tempus Razorback loadout in Warzone 2 is focused on dominating at mid-range. To achieve this, you’ll want to equip the Harbinger D20 muzzle to enhance recoil control. To improve the AR’s stability, we recommend using the FTAC Ripper 56 underbarrel to bolster the AR’s kickback. This added stability makes it simple to land all your shots, and maximize the Razorback’s TTK. Best Tempus Razorback Warzone class: Perks & equipment Season 2 removed perk packages. With the freedom to choose any perks in Warzone 2, we recommend using Battle Hardened, Fast Hands, and High Alert. As for equipment, we recommend using a Drill Charge for the lethal category to take care of annoying campers or vehicles. And Smoke Grenades are the perfect tactical selection for rotating in the final few circles. How to unlock the Tempus Razorback in Warzone To unlock the Tempus Razorback in MW2 and Warzone, you’ll need to reach Sector D13 in your Season 4 Battle Pass. Thankfully, that section is a free tier, so you won’t need to spend any CoD points to unlock the new weapon. Once you’ve reached the D13 sector, you’ll be able to grab the Tempus Razorback, and it’ll be ready to use. Best Tempus Razorback alternatives in Warzone JGOD tested the time-to-kill statistics after the latest health increase and pointed out the HCR 56 as a potential new leader for the long-range meta category. The HCR 56 boasts an impressive 768 ms TTK at long range and deals 2250 damage per magazine. Make sure to check out our best Warzone HCR 56 Loadout. That’s all for our Tempus Razorback loadout! For more of our Warzone coverage, check out these guides below: Do Warzone skins carry over to Warzone 2? | What are Strongholds in Warzone 2? | All Warzone 2 vehicles and Gas Stations | Does Warzone 2 have SBMM? | How do Warzone 2 circles work?

Best Tempus Razorback Modern Warfare 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments & Perks The Tempus Razorback is a fully automatic assault rifle added in Modern Warfare 2 Season 4. If you’re looking for a top-tier setup to dominate with we’ve got just the thing, here’s our best Tempus Razorback loadout in MW2. Introduced in Season 4, the Tempus Razorback is a bullpup AR based on the real-world VHS-K2, also known as the Springfield Hellion. This is the first appearance of the Croatian assault rifle in Call of Duty. The Razorback is a rifle with a high fire rate and great handling, possessing characteristics more commonly seen in SMGs than ARs. Although not the easiest gun to use it’s a fantastic choice for those looking for an assault rifle that compliments a more aggressive playstyle. Here’s the best loadout for the Tempus Razorback, including the attachments, perks, and equipment to use. Contents Best Tempus Razorback MW2 Loadout – Best Tempus Razorback MW2 class: Perks & Equipment – How to unlock the Tempus Razorback in MW2 – Best Tempus Razorback alternatives in Modern Warfare 2 – Best Tempus Razorback MW2 Loadout Attachments Muzzle: Sakin Tread-40 – Laser: Schlager PEQ Box IV – Optic: Cronen Mini Pro – Stock: TR Preamble – Rear Grip: ERG-X1 – The Tempus Razorback excels when used as an assault rifle-SMG hybrid focusing on close to mid-range engagements. Although it can still be effective at long range there are better ARs to fill that role like the TAQ-56 and ISO Hemlock. Whilst the Razorback’s recoil is predictable, it is fairly high in magnitude. To lessen recoil and make this AR more manageable it’s recommended to use both the Sakin Tread-40 muzzle and ERG-X1 Rear Grip. We prioritize improving vertical recoil as that’s where the Razorback kicks most. Since this gun is best used aggressively it’s important to not slow down its handling too much. To avoid this we use the Schlager PEQ Box IV laser to improve Aim Down Sights Speed while the TR Preamble stock bumps up both Aim Walking Speed and Sprint Speed with little downside. To make tracking moving targets easier it’s best to use a good close-range optic like the Cronen Mini Pro. However, the Tempus Razorback’s iron sights aren’t that hard to use so some players may prefer running the 5.56 Armor Piercing rounds to improve bullet penetration instead. Best Tempus Razorback MW2 class: Perks & Equipment Base Perk 1: Double Time – Base Perk 2: Bomb Squad – Bonus Perk: Cold-Blooded – Ultimate Perk: Ghost – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Shock Stick – Since you’ll want to prioritize taking close to medium-range engagements with the Tempus Razorback it’s important to be able to close the gap on enemies. Double Time is excellent for this as it doubles the duration of tactical sprint letting you move faster for longer. Bomb Squad is a great choice for your second Base Perk as it provides resistance to most explosives. This is one of the few perks in MW2 that can directly save your life helping you tank a grenade hit or incoming rocket. For Bonus Perk, Cold-Blooded works well when playing aggressively as it keeps you hidden from pesky killstreaks. This is especially powerful when paired with Ghost, an Ultimate Perk that stops you from showing up on enemy UAVs, perfect for flanking and playing more aggressively. A Semtex is our choice for lethal equipment as it can be thrown quickly yet has impressive killing potential. For tactical we opt for a Shock Stick to force enemies to retreat or risk emptying their whole magazine giving you the chance to turn an unfavorable gunfight on its head. How to unlock the Tempus Razorback in MW2 The Tempus Razorback can be unlocked in Modern Warfare 2 by completing Sector D9 of the Season 4 Battle Pass. This requires a minimum of 20 Battle Pass tokens to reach and complete. Once Season 4 comes to a close the Tempus Razorback will be available through a future in-game challenge. Best Tempus Razorback alternatives in Modern Warfare 2 Those looking for a gun similar to the Tempus Razorback should consider using the Kastov-74u. Much like the Razorback it’s an AR-SMG hybrid that excels in close to medium-range gunfights. Alternatively, the M13B is another fast-firing assault rifle that can be extremely forgiving. It’s a good option for players looking for a similar gun to the Razorback that is better suited to long-range. That’s all for our best Tempus Razorback loadout! For more of our MW2 & Warzone 2 coverage, check out these guides below: Best MW2 weapons: Ultimate tier list | MW2 & Warzone 2 Season 4 Ranked Play rewards | How to unlock ISO 45 SMG | How to unlock Tempus Razorback | Weapon buffs & nerfs in MW2 and Warzone 2 Season 4 | Can you play Modern Warfare 2 on Steam Deck? | How many people play Warzone 2? Modern Warfare 2 player count | CDL 2023 season: Standings, schedule, teams, more

Best TAQ V Warzone 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks ActivisionAfter a brief hiatus, the TAQ V is back and better than ever in Warzone 2. Here’s our best TAQ-V meta loadout for Warzone 2 including the best attachments, perks, and equipment. Battle rifles dominate Warzone 2’s long-range meta in Season 5. The TAQ V and Cronen Squall sit comfortably atop the popularity rankings and for good reason. But its fully automatic firing style combined with the high damage is perfect for a game like Warzone 2, where a fast TTK is essential, especially at medium to long range. The TAQ-V’s lethal 7.62mm rounds easily tear through squads, but its unstable recoil makes it harder to approach than some other weapons. Fortunately for you, we have the perfect TAQ-V loadout to help carry your squad to victories on Al Mazrah and bolster its kickback. Contents Best TAQ-V Warzone 2 loadout – Best TAQ-V Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the TAQ-V in Warzone 2 – Best TAQ-V alternatives in Warzone 2 – Best TAQ-V Warzone 2 loadout Attachments Muzzle: Sakin Tread-40 (+0.54, +0.19) – Optic: 18″ Precision-6 Barrel (-0.42, +0.35) – Underbarrel: FTAC RIpper (+0.52, +0.28) – Magazine: 50 Round Drum – Ammunition: 7.62 High Velocity (-0.43, -4.94) – Our loadout focuses on mitigating the weapon’s extreme recoil. Starting off with the Sakin Tread-40, which improves horizontal and vertical recoil control. We also recommend using the FTAC Ripper for added Aiming Idle Stability and Recoil Stabilization to keep those shots true. To further improve damage range and bullet velocity with the TAQ-V, it’s best to use the 18″ Precision-6 Barrel. Partnering this barrel with 7.62 High Velocity ammo maximizes the hard-hitting battle rifle’s time-to-kill speed. 20 bullets per magazine won’t really cut it in a battle royale like Warzone 2, so we recommend bumping that up to a 50-Round Drum. Our loadout does hinder mobility and handling, but increasing the weapon’s accuracy makes it far easier to use at longer range engagements. Best TAQ-V Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Double Time – Base Perk 2: Bomb Squad – Bonus Perk: Resupply – Ultimate Perk: High Alert – Lethal: Grenade – Tactical Equipment: Stun Grenade – Al Mazrah is a very big map, so Double Time makes it easier to traverse freely, improving the duration of your tactical sprint. Nothing is worse than getting bombarded with Lethal grenades while holding down an angle in Warzone 2, but Bomb Squad reduces the damage taken from non-Killstreak explosives. Resupply will come in handy over the duration of a long Warzone 2 match, as you start with an additional Lethal and equipment recharges over 30 seconds. Finally, High Alert may save your life on one or two occasions, as vision pulses alert you when an enemy spots you. To round off the setup, we recommend using a Semtex for flushing opponents out of cover, and Flash Grenades for clearing enclosed spaces. How to unlock the TAQ-V in Warzone 2 In order to get your hands on this powerful Battle Rifle in Warzone 2 you’ll need to level up the TAQ-56 to Level 11. Best TAQ-V alternatives in Warzone 2 If the TAQ-V recoil is too much to handle, but you still want a powerful fully automatic weapon, look no further than the Cronen Squall. The dominant battle rifle has a similar damage profile but has a slightly better recoil pattern. Numerous nerfs have not done enough to knock down the weapon from being a top-tier option. It’s perfect for laser-beaming foes from afar, especially if you kit out the weapon for maximum stability. That’s all for our TAQ-V loadout! For more of our Warzone 2 coverage, check out these guides below: Do Warzone skins carry over to Warzone 2? | What are Strongholds in Warzone 2? | All Warzone 2 vehicles and Gas Stations | Does Warzone 2 have SBMM? | How do Warzone 2 circles work? | What is reverse boosting

Best TAQ-V loadout Modern Warfare 2: Class setup, attachments & perks Call of DutyThe Modern Warfare 2 TAQ-V Battle Rifle often flies under the radar compared to other long-range weapons, but it can still shine with the right loadout. Here’s the best TAQ-V loadout in MW2, complete with attachments, Perks, and equipment. When it comes to Modern Warfare 2, Battle Rifles are one of the less popular categories. However, that doesn’t mean the TAQ-V is something you should avoid. In fact, this weapon’s time-to-kill speed is in line with most series entries and brings in automatic power, perfect for medium-range engagements. The TAQ-V resembles the SCAR-H from previous games and packs that same nostalgic punch – but you still need the right loadout for this fantastic weapon. With that in mind, here’s the best TAQ-V loadout along with the best attachments, perks, and equipment. Contents Best TAQ-V Modern Warfare 2 loadout – Best TAQ-V Modern Warfare 2 class – How to unlock the TAQ-V in Modern Warfare 2 – Alternative to the TAQ-V Modern Warfare 2 loadout – Best TAQ-V Modern Warfare 2 loadout Optic: Cronen Mini Red Dot – Rear Grip: Demo Cleanshot Grip – Barrel: 18″ Precision-6 Barrel – Underbarrel: XTEN Drop Grip – Magazine: 30-Round Mag – Receiver: TAQ-V – The Cronen Mini Red Dot optic makes the weapon more mobile, reducing its ADS time and helping increase accuracy at range. You can use other scopes for longer-range engagements, but we believe keeping the weapon mobile is essential. Also increasing mobility and ADS time, the Demo Cleanshot Rear Grip and XTEN Drop Grip help make the TAQ-V feel less bulky when running around with it. The 18″ Precision-6 Barrel increases bullet velocity at the cost of decreased mobility. However, the other attachments help offset the penalty. Using a 30-Round Mag is not a necessary attachment, but extra bullets are always more helpful in a gunfight. Best TAQ-V Modern Warfare 2 class Base Perk 1: Tracker – Base Perk 2: Battle Hardened – Bonus Perk: Fast Hands – Ultimate Perk: Dead Silence – Lethal: Drill Charge – Tactical: Stim – Tracker allows you to see the footsteps of enemies, resulting in easy kills on unsuspecting players. Battle Hardened essentially nullifies the effects of any thrown equipment — including those positon-revealing Snapshot Grenades. Hopefully, the 30-Round Mag helps make reloading less frequent, but when you do need to, Fast Hands speeds up the process. As for the Ultimate Perk, Dead Silence enables you to maneuver around maps more easily, silencing your footsteps. If you are struggling with campers in a room or holding down a “head glitch” position, the Drill Charge pierces through walls and deals with any issues. A Stim could save your life if you need a quick pick-me-up during a gunfight. How to unlock the TAQ-V in Modern Warfare 2 In order to get your hands on this powerful Marksman Rifle in Modern Warfare 2, you’ll need to level up the TAQ-56 to Level 11. You should unlock the TAQ-V Reciever after doing this! Equip the TAQ-56 Assault Rifle – Use it until it reaches Level 11 – You can now equip the TAQ-V Reciever. – Alternative to the TAQ-V Modern Warfare 2 loadout If you want a weapon that performs similarly but offers a little more mobility, look no further than the TAQ-56 under the same weapon platform. The TAQ-56 or SCAR-L has emerged as the go-to Assault Rifle for pro players, and it is not a mystery why. The versatile AR dominates in all ranges, but especially in mid-range engagements. You will need to level this gun up to the TAQ-V, so you will get first-hand experience. Now that you have the best TAQ-V loadout, you can check out some other guides we’ve compiled for Modern Warfare 2: How to use Modern Warfare 2’s Gunsmith: Receivers and Blueprints explained | Modern Warfare 2 new equipment guide: Lethals and Tacticals explained | How to Slide Cancel in Modern Warfare 2| How to unlock Oni Operator & Blueprint in Modern Warfare 2 | All Modern Warfare 2 Killstreaks | What is Modern Warfare 2 Spec Ops mode? | All Modern Warfare 2 perks | All Modern Warfare 2 Field Upgrades

Best TAQ-M Warzone 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments, perks ActivisionThe TAQ-M hits like a tank and deserves to be in your rotation of Warzone 2 loadouts. Here are the weapon’s best attachments, perks, and equipment. The TAQ-M fails to garner the same attention as its TAQ-56 and TAQ-V counterparts, but the underrated marksman rifle truly shines in Warzone 2. Al Mazrah’s expansive desert landscape provides the perfect playground for long-range engagements. You would think that would play right into the hands of sniper rifle users, but Warzone 2 players demanded a buff to fix the underpowered rifles. The battle royale’s fast TTK and reliance on mobile weapons actually favor marksman rifles, and we have just the weapon for you. The TAQ-M is accurate, strong, and easy to use with the right attachments. The marksman rifle boasts an impressive 243ms TTK speed and 345 damage per second. It is also tied with the popular EBR-14 for class-best ADS speed. Without further ado, let’s jump into everything you need to know about the TAQ-M. Contents Best TAQ-M Warzone 2 loadout – Best TAQ-M Warzone 2 perks & equipment – How to unlock the TAQ-M in Warzone 2 – Best TAQ-M alternatives in Warzone 2 – Best TAQ-M Warzone 2 loadout Attachments Stock: TV Ballast Stock – Underbarrel: Demo IMP-44 Grip – Magazine: 15 Round Mag – Rear Grip: FSS Combat Grip – Laser: FSS OLE-V Laser – Our loadout aims to maximize the weapon’s ability in mid-range and long-range firefights without sacrificing too much mobility. First off, the TV Ballast Stock increases sprint speed and ADS speed. The Demo IMP-44 Grip improves aiming stability and recoil stabilization. Weapon sway in Warzone 2 feels more aggressive than in other battle royale titles, so it’s important to improve recoil stabilization wherever you can. The FSS Combat Grip improves recoil control, making the weapon even more lethal in long-range fights. We recommend using a 15-round Mag to avoid constantly having to reload. Finally, the FSS OLE-V Laser allows you to ADS faster, as well as stabilizes your aim, which we mentioned earlier as being a key focal point of this loadout. Best TAQ-M Warzone 2 perks & equipment Perk Package: Scout Base Perk 1: Scavenger – Base Perk 2: Strong Arm – Bonus Perk: Focus – Ultimate Perk: Ghost – Lethal: Semtex Grenade – Tactical Equipment: Flash Grenade – The scout perk package was perfectly crafted for marksman rifle loadouts. Sniper rounds can be hard to come by while looting on Al Mazrah, so the Scavenger perk replenishes ammo on dead enemies. Strong Arm comes in handy if you are getting pushed while holding a sniping angle or attempting to push players out of cover. The perk allows you to throw equipment items further and see where they will land. Using a marksman rifle requires pinpoint accuracy. Focus reduces flinch when aiming down sights and extends hold breath duration, allowing players to line up a difficult shot better. Ghost will help you stay off the mini-map in the final circle, as enemies will use heartbeat sensors to find you. Finally, rounding off the setup with Semtex for flushing opponents out of cover and Flash Grenades for clearing encloses spaces. How to unlock the TAQ-M in Warzone 2 To unlock the TAQ-M marksman rifle, you’ll first need to get to player level 19. Then, you’ll unlock the TAQ-56 assault rifle. Use that until it gets to level 20, and you will unlock the TAQ-M. With a few XP tokens or a couple of successful Warzone 2 games, you should be well on your way to unlocking the TAQ-M. Best TAQ-M alternatives in Warzone 2 If you are a fan of the classic SCAR-H, you will feel right at home using the TAQ-V. The powerful battle rifle is fully automatic, making it play like a heavier-hitting AR, and that’s exactly the type of firepower needed in Warzone 2. The TAQ-V’s lethal 7.62mm rounds easily tear through squads, and we recommend giving it a go if the TAQ-M isn’t cutting it for you. Now that you have the best TAQ-M loadout, you can check out some other guides we’ve compiled for Warzone 2. Do Warzone skins carry over to Warzone 2? | What are Strongholds in Warzone 2? | All Warzone 2 vehicles and Gas Stations | Does Warzone 2 have SBMM? | How do Warzone 2 circles work?

Best TAQ-M Modern Warfare 2 loadout: Class setup, Attachments & Perks ActivisionModern Warfare 2’s TAQ-M Marksman Rifle is a powerful weapon, capable of taking down the trickiest of enemies in a variety of situations – but only with the best loadout. Here’s the best TAQ-M loadout along with the best attachments, perks, and equipment. There are six Marksman Rifles to choose from in Modern Warfare 2 and each has its own positives and negatives. That being said, the TAQ-M feels like it has a lot more positives than it does negatives. It’s got a good range, fantastic damage, and great accuracy. The only issue is its mobility. Luckily, that can be easily fixed with a great loadout. We’ve got the best loadout for the games TAQ-M and what equipment and perks you should choose to get to the top of that leaderboard. Contents Best TAQ-M Modern Warfare 2 loadout – Best TAQ-M Modern Warfare 2 class – How to unlock the TAQ-M in Modern Warfare 2 – Alternatives to the TAQ-M Modern Warfare 2 loadout – Best TAQ-M Modern Warfare 2 loadout Barrel: LR1:7 20.5” Barrel – Laser: FSS OLE-V Laser – Rear Grip: Demo Cleanshot Grip – Stock: TV Ballast Stock – Magazine: 15 Round Mag – The TAQ-M is a beast when it comes to power and range, but lacks in speed and mobility. That’s why we’ve started off our best loadout for the TAQ-M with the Demo Cleanshot Grip and the TV Ballast Stock. Both serve to increase your ADS speed, sprint speed, crouch movement, and aim walking speed. Allowing you to get around the Modern Warfare 2 maps a lot quicker. Next, we recommend using the LR1:7 20.5” Barrel which increases your damage range and bullet velocity because more power is good power. Lastly, although optional attachments, we suggest trying out the FSS OLE-V Laser and the 15 Round Mag. The Laser will grant you a great boost to your ADS and sprint to fire while the 15 Round Mag will give you a little bit extra when you just need to get one more shot in. Best TAQ-M Modern Warfare 2 class Base Perk 1: Overkill – Base Perk 2: Battle Hardened – Bonus Perk: Fast Hands – Ultimate Perk: Ghost – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Stim – While Marksman Rifles are undeniably powerful, you will need a few Perks to help you on your way to the top of the leaderboard. We recommend using Overkill and Battle Hardened. Overkill will help you tackle any situation with the right weapon and Battle Hardened will keep you a little safer against those frustrating flash grenades. Then, to complement the Overkill perk, we suggest using Fast Hands to speed up your reloads, weapon changes and so much more. As for the Ultimate Perk, Ghost is never a bad decision. It’s arguably one of the best Perks in the game and will keep you safe from the many UAVs scanning from the sky. Lastly, when it comes to your equipment, you can’t go wrong with Semtex and Stims. Semtex will deal fantastic damage to the enemy while Stims will keep you alive when you just need one more shot. How to unlock the TAQ-M in Modern Warfare 2 To unlock the TAQ-M Marksman Rifle you’ll first need to get to player level 19. Then, you’ll unlock the TAQ-56 Assault Rifle. Use that until it gets to level 20 and you will unlock the TAQ-M. With a few XP tokens or a couple of successful multiplayer games, you should be well on your way to unlocking the TAQ-M. Alternatives to the TAQ-M Modern Warfare 2 loadout If you’re looking for an alternative to the TAQ-M that packs a great punch but is a little quicker, then the TAQ-56 is a great choice. It’s powerful, quick, and easy to get hold of. It’s also the weapon you need to level up so you could always just stick with it. Alternatively, if you’re looking for another Marksman Rifle to try out, the SA-B 50 is an excellent weapon that keeps you in the same category and style. That’s the best TAQ-M loadout in Modern Warfare 2, you can get right back to taking down the enemy. While loading up a new game, take a look at some of our other handy Modern Warfare 2 guides: How to use Modern Warfare 2’s Gunsmith: Receivers and Blueprints explained | Modern Warfare 2 new equipment guide: Lethals and Tacticals explained | How to unlock MP5 SMG loadout in Modern Warfare 2 | How to Slide Cancel in Modern Warfare 2 | How to unlock Oni Operator & Blueprint in Modern Warfare 2 | All Modern Warfare 2 Killstreaks | What is Modern Warfare 2 Spec Ops mode? | All Modern Warfare 2 perks | All Modern Warfare 2 Field Upgrades

Best TAQ Evolvere Warzone loadout: Class setup, attachments, perks The TAQ Evolvere is undoubtedly one of the best weapons in Warzone with the LMG dominating the meta for awhile, and this is the best loadout to use to make it as deadly as possible in Season 4 Reloaded. After a surprise buff during Season 2, the TAQ Evolvere quickly became the most-used gun in Warzone. However, it was nerfed shortly after with Raven revealing its recoil didn’t “function as intended,” following the initial buff. It was the TAQ Evolvere’s spectacular accuracy that made it meta in the first place, but even after the nerf it remains the most popular weapon. Though no longer laser accurate, this LMG is still amongst one of the best weapons in Warzone and is remarkably easy to use regardless of skill level. Due to this, players want to know the best TAQ Evolvere Warzone loadout, and we’ve got you covered. Best TAQ Evolvere Warzone loadout Muzzle: VT-7 Spiritfire Suppressor – Barrel: LRF Righteous Long Barrel – Optic: Corio Eagleseye 2.5x – Stock: Rampart Heavy Stock – Underbarrel: Bruen Pivot Vertical Grip – We are going to want to reel in the recoil of this weapon, which starts with the VT-7 Spiritfire Suppressor to not only help with vertical and horizontal recoil control, but also boost damage range and bullet velocity. This is also going to be true with the LRF Righteous Long Barrel while also giving a bump to your ADS speed and movement speed. ADS speed is also a focus for the Corio Eagleseye 2.5x and the Rampart Heavy Stock, and even a little bit more recoil control. Further, the optic will improve your accuracy so that you can land your shots more effectively. Finally, ADS speed gets more attention with the Bruen Pivot Vertical Grip. TAQ Evolvere Warzone Loadout: Perks and Equipment Perk 1: Double Time increases the duration of your Tac Sprint – – Perk 2: Sleight of Hand faster reloading – – Perk 3: Quick Fix start health regeneration when killing a player or inserting a plate – – Perk 4: Resolute get a boost of speed when hit with an enemy bullet – – Lethal: Throwing Knife – Tactical: Smoke Grenade – You will want to use Double Time and Resolute to give yourself better movement speed in each match. Both can get you to cover before getting gunned down, or even repositioned before your enemy can reach your position. Then Sleight of Hand is going to help you get your gun ready to go as fast as you can, while using Quick Fix is going to make health regeneration much easier. The Throwing Knife is a meta choice for your lethal equipment thanks to its high damage, though you will have to be able to land your throws. The Smoke Grenade is a great way to provided cover when you need it. How to unlock TAQ Evolvere in Warzone The TAQ Evolvere is unlocked through the Armory by activating the LMG and then completing 3 Daily Challenges. Prior to Season 2, it was instead unlocked by completing specific weekly challenges but these are no longer available. Best alternative to TAQ Evolvere in Warzone Given its similarities, it’s no surprise that the TAQ Evolvere has a lot in common with the Pulemyot 762. Both are accurate LMGs that excel at medium to long-range are are best known for their ease of use. With so many meta options in Warzone Season 4 Reloaded, you will need to read up on some of the best loadouts for Assaults Rifles, SMGs, and Sniper Rifles, including the ones that can down an enemy in one shot.

Best TAQ Evolvere loadout for MW3: Class setup, attachments, Perks & more A huge buff in Season 2 has elevated the TAQ Evolvere to one of the strongest weapons in MW3. Here is the best TAQ Evolvere loadout to dominate using this meta LMG. The TAQ Evolvere had an unspectacular debut when it was first added to multiplayer in the Season 1 Reloaded update. Though solid it was not meta-defining by any means with it failing to stand out. However, a surprise buff in the February 13 patch has seen the LMG become much more popular. It is now one of the strongest weapons in Modern Warfare 3 and well worth using. Here is the best TAQ Evolvere loadout to use in MW3 multiplayer to get the most out of this buffed light machine gun. Contents Best TAQ Evolvere loadout – TAQ Evolvere Loadout: Perks and Equipment – How to unlock TAQ Evolvere – Best alternative to TAQ Evolvere – Best TAQ Evolvere MW3 loadout Muzzle: JAK BFB – Optic: Mk.3 Reflector – Stock: Assault-60 Stock – Underbarrel: SL Skeletal Vertical Grip – Magazine: 100 Round 556 Belt – Following its rework the 100 Round 556 Belt magazine is now an unbelievably strong attachment. It provides improvements to ADS Speed, Sprint to Fire Speed, mobility, and a remarkable 71% boost to fire rate. This gives the TAQ Evolvere one of the best TTKs in MW3 at close to medium range. A huge downside to the 5.56 conversion after its rework is that it does increase overall recoil fairly significantly. To fix this we recommend equipping the JAK BFB muzzle which provides the biggest improvement to recoil of any attachment in Modern Warfare 3. It’s also worth using both the Assault-60 Stock and SL Skeletal Vertical Grip underbarrel to improve the TAQ Eradicator’s handling. With these attachments, the buffed LMG handles fast enough to compete at close range often outgunning even SMGs. The final attachment slot isn’t essential but a close to medium-range optic like the Mk.3 Reflector makes it easier to track moving targets. Alternatively, those who like the TAQ Eradicator’s iron sights should consider using a laser of choice instead. TAQ Evolvere MW3 Loadout: Perks and Equipment Vest: Assassin Vest – Gloves: Commando Gloves – Boots: Covert Sneakers – Gear: Mag Holster – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Stim – The Assassin Vest is a powerful choice with it providing the benefits of Ghost T/V Camo without having to use up a gear slot. However, keep in mind the JAK BFB prolongs how long you show up on the minimap after firing so be sure to only pull the trigger when a kill looks certain. With it being an LMG, the TAQ Evolvere’s reload time leaves a lot to be desired especially given MW3’s fast-paced gameplay. To fix this problem both the Commando Gloves and Mag Holster gear should be used which not only speed up reloads but also let you reload while sprinting. Covert Sneakers stand out as the strongest option in the Boots slot with them silencing footsteps. Alongside the Assassin Vest, this makes you stealthy and helps offset the main downside to using the otherwise excellent JAK BFB muzzle, being that it marks you on the minimap like an Advanced UAV is present when firing, compared to the standard red dot ping. For equipment, a Semtex is an excellent lethal as it can be quickly thrown to pressure or take out enemies without having to waste shots. Finally, a Stim is a strong choice as it provides instant healing during difficult situations where you’d otherwise fall. How to unlock TAQ Evolvere in Modern Warfare 3 The TAQ Evolvere can be unlocked through the armory by activating the LMG, and then completing either 3 Daily Challenges or winning 3 matches. Alternatively, you can extract it in Zombies to instantly unlock it. Best alternative to TAQ Evolvere in Modern Warfare 3 Although it’s a battle rifle and not an LMG, the BAS-B shares a lot in common with the TAQ Evolvere with both chambering high-caliber ammunition, having competitive TTKs, and excelling at medium to long range. Be sure to check out our other Modern Warfare 3 content to stay ahead: Best MW3 Guns: Ultimate tier list | Best Bruen Mk9 loadout | Best Holger 26 loadout | Best Pulemyot 762 loadout | Best DG-58 LSW loadout | Best TAQ Eradicator loadout | Best SVA 545 loadout | Best WSP-9 loadout | Best MCW loadout | Best XRK Stalker loadout | Best RAM-9 loadout | Best BP50 loadout

Best TAQ Eradicator Warzone loadout: Class setup, attachments, perks, more As far as LMGs go, nothing can beat the TAQ Eradicator, with it easily being one of the best weapons in Warzone right now, especially when used with a meta loadout. Light machine guns have always been strong, with them either being top-tier or at least viable in just about every meta. The LMGs that tend to perform the best are those that are easy to use at long range and laser-accurate. Therefore, it’s no surprise that the TAQ Eradicator is such a strong option, having both low recoil and decent mobility. Also, its high rate of fire makes it unique and much more forgiving than most of its competitors. Additionally, this LMG now has a great TTK, with a massive damage buff in Season 5 elevating it to the very top of the meta. This buff gives it damage comparable to the most powerful weapons in Warzone, cementing itself as a top-tier pick. Best TAQ Eradicator Warzone loadout Muzzle: Quartermaster Suppressor – Barrel: Conquer-70 Long Barrel – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Stock: Tactique Brute Stock – Underbarrel: Bruen Heavy Support Grip – The main reasons to use the TAQ Eradicator are its low recoil and competitive TTK. To make the most of this, you’ll want to use attachments that minimize gun kick, like the Tactique Brute Stock and Quartermaster Suppressor, with the silencer providing the bonus effect of hiding your location when you fire. Using the Bruen Heavy Support Grip makes the LMG even more accurate by reducing both recoil gun kick and horizontal recoil. This attachment also improves aiming idle sway and firing aim stability, making the TAQ Eradicator’s recoil much more predictable. All the recoil control in the world means nothing if you can’t deal damage, which is where the Conquer-70 Long Barrel comes in. This barrel attachment boosts damage range by 25% and bullet velocity by 30%, turning this build into an incredible option for long-range gunfights. Last but certainly not least, the JAK Glassless Optic is a must. It provides a clear reticle that’s easy to use, while also further improving firing aim stability, a key reason why it has become the preferred optic for so many Warzone players. Best TAQ Eradicator Warzone class: Perks and equipment Perk 1: Double Time – Perk 2: Sleight of Hand – Perk 3: Quick Fix – Perk 4: Resolute – Lethal: Throwing Knife – Tactical: Smoke Grenade – Using the Double Time perk allows you to Tac Sprint for longer and reposition during gunfights more easily. Outrunning an enemy’s aim, getting behind cover, or reaching the safe zone before the gas can reach you is paramount to survival. Sleight of Hand helps keep you ready to fire whenever you need to. As you engage in combat, you can replenish your ammo while staying on the move. It’s a great benefit to not have to stop moving to reload, especially with a gun like the TAQ Eradicator that has such a long reload time. Quick Fix will help keep your health as high as possible. This simple but effective perk starts health regen whenever you use an Amor Plate or kill an enemy player, often providing a clutch heal in a tense situation. Finally, the Resolute perk allows you to get to safety if an enemy player hits you by boosting movement speed by 5%. This is particularly useful on a heavy weapon like the TAQ Eradicator, which isn’t the most mobile on its own. How to unlock the TAQ Eradicator The TAQ Eradicator is unlocked through the Armory by activating it and earning 3 armory unlock points. One point is earned every time you finish a daily challenge or survive for a set period of time in Warzone matches, so unlocking the LMG shouldn’t take too long. Best TAQ Eradicator alternative in Warzone The Pulemyot 762 has a lot in common with the TAQ Eradicator since both are LMGs with great accuracy, range, and decent mobility. If you enjoy using one, the other one will likely work for you too, given their similarities. These aren’t the only LMGs that are dominating the Warzone meta, with the Holger 26 also proving equally strong. Those who want to try something unusual should instead try out either the Bruen Mk9 or DG-58 LSW, both of which are underrated options that can hold their own.

Best TAQ Eradicator MW3 loadout: Class setup, attachments, perks The TAQ Eradicator is an underrated option that can hold its own against the strongest meta weapons in Modern Warfare 3. To stay competitive though you’ll need an optimized build like this best TAQ Eradicator loadout for MW3 Season 3. When it was first introduced in MW3’s opening season, the TAQ Eradicator didn’t exactly take over the multiplayer meta. It saw significant use in Warzone but was largely overlooked in MW3. This may have been a mistake though as this LMG has since proven itself to be among the best in its category. It is surprisingly versatile and can be built to suit a wide range of playstyles, largely thanks to its exceptionally fast fire rate. To help you get the most out of this light machine gun we’ve made the best TAQ Eradicator loadout possible to use as of MW3 Season 3. Contents: Best TAQ Eradicator MW3 loadout – Best TAQ Eradicator class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock TAQ Eradicator in Modern Warfare 3 – Best alternative to TAQ Eradicator in Modern Warfare 3 – Best TAQ Eradicator MW3 loadout Attachments Muzzle: Shadowstrike Suppressor – Barrel: Conquer-70 Long Barrel – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Stock: Tacverte Core Stock – Magazine: 45 Round Mag – With it being an LMG, the TAQ Eradicator handles fairly slowly, a bad match for the fast-paced gameplay of MW3. To fix this you’ll need to use the 45 Round Mag which improves almost every Handling and Mobility stat while still offering a larger magazine than most other weapons. This effectively turns the TAQ Eradicator into an LMG-AR hybrid with great damage range and reasonably fast Handling. The TAQ Eradicator has an incredibly unique recoil pattern as it has almost zero recoil for __ shots before it kicks hard vertically. While the initial recoil is accurate enough to not need improving at all, later shots can prove troublesome without an attachment like the Tacverte Core Stock which reduces gun kick by 23%. Another two attachments worth using are the Conquer-70 Long Barrel and Shadowstrike Suppressor muzzle. The muzzle suppresses gunfire without giving any penalties while the barrel provides a sizable boost to Damage Range and Aiming Idle Stability. This makes it easier to take out enemies at long range and make the most of the TAQ Eradicator’s strengths. Finally, since the TAQ Eradicator excels at long range using one of MW3’s meta optics helps a lot. There are several good options bu the JAK Glassless Optic is currently the best overall choice in MW3 Season 3. Best TAQ Eradicator class: Perks & equipment Vest: Assassin Vest Immune to UAV and enemy radar effects plus kills don’t display enemy skulls. – – Gloves: Commando Gloves Reload while sprinting. – – Boots: Covert Sneakers Eliminates footstep sounds. – – Gear: Hijacked IFF Strobe Undetectable by AI targeting systems, and thermal optics. – – Lethal: Semtex Timed sticky grenade. – – Tactical: Stun Grenade Slows victim’s movement and aiming. – – Starting with the Vest, the Assassin Vest is a great choice for this TAQ Eradicator loadout as it compliments the Shadowstrike Suppressor well acting as a passive version of Ghost T/V Camo. It’s actually better than Ghost since this vest also keeps you hidden from enemy UAVs while standing still and not just when moving. Continuing the theme of stealth, the Covert Sneakers silence your footsteps letting you play more aggressively without being punished. This is useful for taking advantage of the TAQ Eradicator’s above-average handling for an LMG in MW3. Similarly, the Hijacked IFF Strobe prevents enemy streaks from targeting you letting you move around the map more freely. The gloves slot is flexible with none of them standing out on this loadout. Even so, the Commando Gloves make sense as they let you reload while sprinting. This is great on the TAQ Eradicator as it doesn’t have the fastest reload by any means, taking over 3 seconds to reload from empty even with the 45 Round Mag equipped. For equipment, a Semtex is never a bad option in the lethal slot as it can be thrown quickly to pressure and take out opponents. Finally, a well-placed Stun Grenade will leave enemies immobilized giving you the chance to swoop in for a free kill. How to unlock TAQ Eradicator in Modern Warfare 3 The TAQ Eradicator is unlocked through the Armory by activating it and then either completing 3 Daily Challenges or winning 3 matches. If you aren’t a fan of the Armory, the TAQ Eradicator can also be unlocked in MW3 via Zombies by successfully extracting with the LMG. Best alternative to TAQ Eradicator in Modern Warfare 3 Unsurprisingly, the TAQ Evolvere shares a lot in common with the TAQ Eradicator with both being LMGs from the same family of weapons. The Evolvere is a more mobile version of the Eradicator with a lower fire rate but is extremely capable at long range, especially if you land headshots. If you enjoyed this TAQ Eradicator loadout, check out these other MW3 classes for more meta setups: Best MW3 Guns: Ultimate tier list | Best Bruen Mk9 loadout | Best Holger 26 loadout | Best Pulemyot 762 loadout | Best DG-58 LSW loadout

Best TAQ-56 Warzone 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks ActivisonThe TAQ-56, known as the Scar to veterans of Call of Duty, is a solid AR that somewhat fell out of favor with the community, but a good meta TAQ-56 Warzone 2 loadout can make it shine, so here’s our suggestion. Warzone 2’s Season 3 update has shaken up the meta and added a huge amount of new content. Despite this, the main priority for players is choosing a top-tier weapon and setup to dominate their opponents on the battlefield. Well, if you’re looking for raw firepower, manageable recoil control, and a solid amount of mobility, it’s time you picked up the classic TAQ-56, otherwise known as the Scar. With a 4.3% pick rate, the AR is one of the most popular guns in Warzone 2, and it’s easy to see why. However, to push this AR to its limits, the TAQ-56 needs the best attachments equipped and luckily, we’ve got you covered. Contents Best TAQ-56 Warzone 2 loadout – Best TAQ-56 Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the TAQ-56 in Warzone 2 – Best TAQ-56 alternatives in Warzone 2 – Best TAQ-56 Warzone 2 loadout Attachments Muzzle: Harbinger D20 – Barrel: 17.5″ Tundra Pro Barrel – Rear Grip: FSS Combat Grip – Underbarrel: FTAC Ripper 56 – Magazine: 60-Round Mag – Kick off your build with the Harbinger D20 and the 17.5″ Tundra Pro Barrel, these will significantly increase the TAQ-56’s damage range and bullet velocity. As a result, you’ll be able to melt opponents at medium range with ease, and the added sound suppression from the muzzle is a huge bonus. Following that, equip the FFS Combat Grip and the FTAC Ripper 56, to increase the overall stability of the weapon. This enhanced recoil control will make landing all of your bullets on foes incredibly simple, especially when utilizing the TAQ-56’s clean iron sight. Finally, round off the loadout with the 60 Round Mag to ensure you never run out of ammo and can wipe out an entire squad without having to reload. Best TAQ-56 Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment Perk Package: Weapon Specialist Base Perk 1: Overkill – Base Perk 2: Strong Arm – Bonus Perk: Spotter – Ultimate Perk: Survivor – Lethal: Grenade – Tactical Equipment: Stun Grenade – While the correct attachments on a weapon are key, so is your choice of perk package as each bundle offers distinct advantages while navigating Al Mazrah. We’ve opted for Weapon Specialist as it suits the TAQ-56 perfectly and is great for aggressive players. For starters, Overkill is solid in Warzone 2 as the ability to wield a second primary immediately adds more versatility to your loadout. Whether you run an aggressive SMG or a sniper to pick off opponents from afar, both would elevate your class to the next level. Next, Strong Arm allows you to be more precise with your throwables and toss them longer distances. On top of that, Spotter ensures you’ll never be caught off guard by enemy equipment, killstreaks, or field upgrades. For the Ultimate Perk, Weapon Specialist uses Survivor which pings any enemies you get downed by and allows allies to revive you quicker. Finally round off the setup with Semtex for flushing opponents out of cover and Flash Grenades for clearing encloses spaces. How to unlock the TAQ-56 in Warzone 2 The TAQ-56 can be unlocked in Warzone 2 by reaching level 19, so it shouldn’t take you long at all to get your hands on the powerful AR. It’s worth noting you can do this in Modern Warfare 2 multiplayer, which will likely be quicker than doing it through BR matches. Best TAQ-56 alternatives in Warzone 2 If the TAQ-56 doesn’t fit your style of play, consider checking out the M4, another devastatingly powerful AR to dominate your foes on Al Mazrah. The M4’s accuracy makes it extremely simple to control and lock onto enemies, allowing you to rack up kills with ease. We’ve even laid out a guide for the best attachments, setup, and perks for the M4 in Warzone 2, so check it out here. That’s all for our TAQ-56 loadout! For more of our Warzone 2 coverage, check out these guides below: Do Warzone skins carry over to Warzone 2? | What are Strongholds in Warzone 2? | All Warzone 2 vehicles and Gas Stations | Does Warzone 2 have SBMM? | How do Warzone 2 circles work?

Best TAQ-56 MW2 loadout: Class setup, Attachments, Perks ActivisionThe TAQ-56 is a powerful AR that currently dominates the meta, but to get the most out of it you’ll need a top tier loadout. Here’s our best TAQ-56 loadout in MW2 including the best attachments, Perks, and equipment. Otherwise known as the SCAR-L in previous Call of Duty titles, the TAQ-56 is one of the hardest-hitting weapons currently in Modern Warfare 2. It’s got the power, recoil control, and fire rate to take down the enemy with ease at minimal risk to the user. The TAQ-56’s strengths have seen it become the most-used gun in MW2 and by far the most popular weapon in Ranked Play. So, we’ve compiled the best TAQ-56 loadout in MW2 to get you at the top of your game with a gun that excels regardless of the situation. Contents Best TAQ-56 MW2 loadout – Taq-56 MW2 loadout: Perks & Equipment – How to unlock the TAQ-56 in Modern Warfare 2 – Alternatives to the TAQ-56 MW2 loadout – Best TAQ-56 MW2 loadout Muzzle: Komodo Heavy (+0.44, +0.10) – Barrel: 17.5″ Tundra Pro Barrel (+0.08, +0.00) – Stock: TV Cardinal Stock (+1.68, -1.01) – Underbarrel: Edge-47 Grip (+0.21, -0.12) – Rear Grip: Demo Cleanshot Grip (+0.29, -0.09) – We start off our best TAQ-56 loadout with the Komodo Heavy muzzle. What you sacrifice for handling you gain back tenfold with the recoil. This is the most impactful attachment on the TAQ-56 turning it into a laser accurate rifle. Despite there only being two options for the TAQ-56’s Barrel, we recommend you opt for the 17.5″ Tundra Pro due to its increased power, range, and accuracy. On the topic of accuracy, the Edge-47 Grip offers a nice boost to recoil stabilization and aiming stability without slowing down handling too much. We also recommend using the Demo Cleanshot Grip to improve both Aiming Stability and ADS. These improvements help the TAQ-56 work well as both a traditional AR but also for a more aggressive playstyle typically reserved for SMGs and shotguns. Finally, to improve mobility we use the TV Cardinal Stock which increases sprint speed and Aim Walking Speed. These are both important stats for moving around the map effectively and being able to take gunfights on your own terms. Taq-56 MW2 loadout: Perks & Equipment Base Perk 1: Tracker – Base Perk 2: Scavenger – Bonus Perk: Fast Hands – Ultimate Perk: Hardline – Lethal: Frag Grenade – Tactical: Flash Grenade – Tracker and Scavenger are fantastic perks that allow players to watch an enemy’s movements by following their footprints and picking up any ammo off their bodies when they find them. This is a fantastic combination for going on lengthy streaks. Fast Hands will keep you in the fight even when the frantic pace of the game makes it impossible to reload. Meanwhile, Hardline will make it easier to have a big impact on the map, letting you call in more frequent killstreaks. The Frag and Flash Grenade are staple picks that suit any class that plays aggressively. They offer universal protection in the moments when your gun simply isn’t enough. How to unlock the TAQ-56 in Modern Warfare 2 The TAQ-56 isn’t unlocked in MW2 through a specific weapon tree. Instead, players will only gain access to the TAQ-56 when they reach level 19. This shouldn’t take too long to accomplish when completing matches. However, while waiting, there are many great alternatives to try out. Alternatives to the TAQ-56 MW2 loadout The M4 is a fantastic alternative for players who want the long-range capabilities of an AR like the TAQ-56 but also want some extra mobility to dominate up close. Alternatively, if you want to branch out of the Assault Rifle category, the TAQ-V Battle Rifle is a powerful alternative. This is also a great choice to use while leveling up enough to try out the other weapons for yourself. That’s all for our TAQ-56 loadout! For more of our MW2 coverage, check out these guides below: All Modern Warfare 2 maps and game modes | How to use Modern Warfare 2’s Gunsmith: Receivers and Blueprints explained | Modern Warfare 2 new equipment guide: Lethals and Tacticals explained | How to unlock MP5 SMG loadout in Modern Warfare 2 | How to Slide Cancel in Modern Warfare 2 | How to unlock Oni Operator & Blueprint in Modern Warfare 2 | All Modern Warfare 2 Killstreaks | What is Modern Warfare 2 Spec Ops mode? | All Modern Warfare 2 perks | All Modern Warfare 2 Field Upgrades

Best Tanto .22 loadout in Black Ops 6 beta: Class setup, attachments, perks DexertoThe Tanto .22 is a powerful SMG in Black Ops 6 that deals high damage but has a slow fire rate, and it requires a unique loadout to get the most out of it. Introduced in the beta’s second weekend, the Tanto .22 feels a lot like the WSP-9 from Modern Warfare 3. It has a highly competitive TTK if you hit your shots, but its slow rate of fire makes missing especially punishing. Regardless, its damage alone makes it one of the strongest guns you can use, especially once you get attachments to make it more accurate. With the right build, it can even outgun assault rifles like the AMES 86 and XM4 at long range, despite being a submachine gun. However, you will need to use a specific loadout to make the most of the Tanto .22, with our recommended attachments making it one of the best guns in the game. Best Tanto .22 Black Ops 6 loadout Optic: Merlin Reflex – Muzzle: Suppressor – Barrel: Long Barrel – Underbarrel: Vertical Foregrip – Rear Grip: Quickdraw Grip – To make the most of the Tanto’s impressive range, you’ll want to use the Long Barrel, which boosts damage range significantly. Likewise, a meta optic like the Merlin Reflex makes tracking targets at a distance much easier, which is essential given the gun’s slow fire rate. The SMG becomes really good at long range once you equip the Vertical Foregrip, an underbarrel attachment that reduces horizontal recoil. With these three attachments, the Tanto .22 is one of the most accurate guns in Black Ops 6. Since this is a submachine gun, there will be plenty of opportunities to run around the map and flank the other team, so it’s recommended to use a Suppressor. This stops you from appearing on the enemy’s radar when you shoot, making it much harder for the other team to predict your next move. Round off the build with the Quickdraw Grip, a rear grip that improves aim down sight speed. This makes sure that the Tanto feels snappy and responsive, which is always useful for an SMG. If you intend to run and gun with this weapon, this attachment is a must. Best Tanto .22 class: Perks, Equipment & Combat Specialty Recon is a strong combat specialty that lets you see enemies through walls after spawning. This complements a mobile gun like the Tanto .22 well, as you can chase them down to secure easy kills. Here are the perks and equipment you’ll want to run to gain the benefits of Recon: Wildcard: Perk Greed – Perk 1: Ghost – Perk 2: Tracker – Perk 3: Cold-Blooded – Perk 4: Ninja – Lethal: Frag – Tactical: Concussion – Field Upgrade: Trophy System – You’ll need to use three blue perks to gain the Recon specialty. This isn’t a problem, as these perks improve fast-paced playstyles that work best with the Tanto .22. Ghost is the most impactful of these, as it keeps you hidden by making you undetectable by enemy UAVs and radar pings. For the other two regular perk slots, use both Tracker and Cold-Blooded, which make it easier to hunt down enemies. Tracker highlights their footsteps, giving you additional intel, while Cold-Blooded stops pesky killstreaks from targeting you and ruining a bigtime flank. With Perk Greed, you can select a fourth perk to make this class even better for flanking. This extra slot is best used on Ninja, which silences your footsteps, letting you sneak up on the other team without being noticed. In combination with Ghost and the suppressor, this creates the most stealthy setup possible. For equipment, a Frag offers a deadly lethal that can be cooked to explode at just the right moment, and a Concussion leaves opponents stunned, letting you swoop in for an easy win. Finally, a Trophy System is a strong field upgrade that blocks enemy equipment, letting you capture and hold objectives more easily. How to unlock Tanto .22 The Tanto .22 is unlocked by reaching level 30, the highest level possible in the Black Ops 6 beta. It will take a good amount of playtime to get access to it, but the gun’s impressive damage makes it worth the grind. Best Tanto .22 alternative in Black Ops 6 The Jackal PDW has dominated the beta, with it being the most versatile gun in the game. It offers similar range to the Tanto .22, but its faster rate of fire makes it much easier to use in close quarters. For more content, check out our Black Ops 6 tier list to see where all the other guns rank, as well as the best controller settings and PC settings you need to use to make your game run as smoothly as possible.

Best Swordfish loadout for Call of Duty: Mobile ActivisionThe Swordfish is the latest Tactical Rifle that has been added in CoD Mobile’s Season 9 update, and there are some attachments you’ll need to use to take it to the next level. The best Swordfish loadout will enable you to get plenty of kills across CoD Mobile’s Season 9 update. Like most Tactical Rifles in the game, the Swordfish comes packed with fantastic accuracy and great range damage. This makes it particularly useful if you’re aiming to claim mid to long-range kills. This four-round burst weapon first appeared in Black Ops 4, and while it may have a slow rate of fire, it is capable of killing an enemy in just a few rounds. If you’ve managed to unlock the Swordfish via the Season 9 Battle Pass, then you’ll want to use this lethal loadout. Best Swordfish loadout in CoD: Mobile Barrel: MP Light – Stock: OWC Skeleton Stock – Laser: OWC Laser – Tactical – Underbarrel: Tactical Foregrip A – Rear Grip: Stippled Grip Tape – This Swordfish loadout comes from CoD Mobile YouTuber Jokesta, who uses the above attachments to increase the rifle’s kill potential. In fact, the attachments above greatly enhance the Tactical Rifle’s accuracy, range, mobility, and control. Read More: Best M13 loadout for Call of Duty: Mobile – While this burst-fire rifle may not be as quick as its fully-auto counterparts, the added damage range can easily outgun close-quarters weapons. If you do happen to find yourself in a more intimate firefight, the 73 points of mobility will help keep you competitive. The Halberd Mag may increase vertical recoil by 45%, but the 100% damage range is a small trade-off. The default sights are also very clean, giving you a decent magnification of your enemies, which pairs nicely with the added range from this loadout. For perks, the standard combination of Lightweight, Toughness, and Dead Silence will increase your survivability and kill potential. In terms of equipment, stuns and grenades will help you flush out any pesky campers that may be lurking in the corners of the map. Whether the Swordfish has what it takes to become one of the best Tactical Rifles in the meta remains to be seen, but for now, this Black Ops 4 seems to be a decent pick.

Best Swordfish class setups in Black Ops 4 Multiplayer after Nov 13 buffs While most players gravitate towards assaults rifles and SMGs in Black Ops 4, it might be time to take a look at a lesser known tactical rifle. Many weapons received nerfs and buffs in the November 13 update to Black Ops 4, but the Swordfish is one, in particular, that saw a buff that could help its viability. The update reduced the delay between bursts, reduced the idle sway, and made it so that the Penta Burst Operator Mod implements a standard burst delay. Popular Call of Duty YouTuber ‘TheXclusiveAce’ has done a deep dive on the weapon and discovered the best ways to optimize the weapon to tap into its full potential. TheXclusiveAce starts out with a general overview of the weapon’s stats, concluding that the Swordfish has a Time to Kill (TTK) of about 400-460 milliseconds without attachments of any kind. He admits that this is quite long for Black Ops 4 since most guns have TTKs between 300 and 400ms. Once you add in different attachments and the Operator Mod, however, this TTK can become as low as 180ms. With that in mind, TheXclusiveAce has broken down the best class setups to use that will help you get all that you can out of this weapon. As far as optics, he says he prefers the normal scope that comes with the gun and doesn’t use any optical attachments. In terms of other attachments, at least one of the Quickdraws and High Caliber are ones he likes to run in almost every class. TheXclusiveAce does note, however, that without the attachments or the Operator Mod, the weapon is a bit underwhelming. Despite the grind that it takes to get to those key attachments, though, he says the weapon is very solid and worth the grind that is required.

Best SWAT 5.56 loadout in Black Ops 6 beta: Class setup, attachments, perks Activision / DexertoThe SWAT 5.56 is by far the best marksman rifle you can use in the Black Ops 6 beta and with the right loadout it can prove dominant. Ever since the Black Ops 6 beta kicked off on August 30, the Jackal PDW SMG has quickly become the best gun, and the XM4 has been crowned the best all-round AR. However, the SWAT 5.56 has since emerged as a worthy marksman alternative. The SWAT 5.56 is a three-round burst rifle, which, if built correctly, can be incredibly strong for small-medium range gunfights in BO6 thanks to its low TTK and low recoil. Here’s the ultimate SWAT 5.56 loadout in the Black Ops 6 beta, including all the best attachments, perks, and equipment you need for your setup. Best Black Ops SWAT 5.56 loadout Muzzle: Compensator or Suppressor – Underbarrel: Vertical Foregrip – Rear Grip: Quickdraw Grip – Fire Mods: Rapid Fire Note: Rapid Fire is worth it for the lower TTK, but can take a while to unlock. If you are yet to unlock this, the Light Stock can be equipped to increase hipfire and strafing movement speed. – – Optic: Redwell Reflex – Despite it being a marksman rifle, the best way to build it is to create a classic run-and-gun style loadout to dominate both close-range and medium-range combat. Muzzle choice comes down to personal preference and playstyle. Choose the Compensator if you don’t mind making noise as you navigate across the map to give you increased Vertical recoil control, or the Suppressor to stealthily keep you hidden from enemy minimaps. The Redwell Reflex Optic gives you a decent sight to make shooting at range easier, while not being too much of a sniper scope to still be effective for close-quarters combat. However, Optics are always widely debated in CoD, so play around with what suits you best. Despite opting for the Rapid Fire mod to increase the fire rate and the Quickdraw Grip to buff your ADS time, the Vertical Foregrip balances it out to give you some extra recoil control. If you also choose the Compensator Muzzle, then this will help you out even more. Best Perks, Equipment & Combat Specialty for SWAT 5.56 loadout The Enforcer Class Specialty and the SWAT 5.56 are the ideal combination. You’ll be able to run through opponents and score kills with ease thanks to its benefits of granting a momentary boost to your movement speed and health regeneration. To obtain these benefits, you will need to be equipped with the following Perks and have the Perk Greed Wildcard activated to make the ultimate Perk and Equipment combination: Perk 1: Flak Jacket/Ghost – Perk 2: Dexterity – Perk 3: Double Time – Perk 4: Gung-Ho – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Stim Shot – Field Upgrade: Assault Pack/Trophy System – Secondary: 9mm PM – If you’ve got the Suppressor equipped on your burst rifle, you’ll probably want to select Ghost for your Perk 1 slot to stay off enemy radars while navigating around the map. However, the Flak Jacket will keep you protected from enemy explosives while gunning them down from afar. Dexterity is a no-brainer for the next Perk slot thanks to it reducing motion when you jump, slide, and dive around the map, as well as decreasing fall damage. To round it out, Double Time lets you activate your Tactical Sprint for longer and Gung-Ho allows you to reload while doing it. The SWAT 5.56 rifle doesn’t have an abundance of ammo in its magazine, therefore having the 9mm PM pistol at your disposal is key. This accurate Secondary weapon will allow you to quickly switch to take down your enemies at close range or finish them off at medium range. How to unlock XM4 in Black Ops 6 beta The SWAT 5.56 marksman rifle is unlocked at level 0 and therefore will be instantly available when you load up the Black Ops 6 beta. It’s unclear if this will be the case when the full version of Black Ops 6 releases on October 25. We have also provided the best loadouts for the best weapon in the game, the Jackal PDW SMG, as well as the best AR, the XM4.

Best SVT-40 CoD Vanguard class loadout: attachments, perks, proficiency, setup ActivisionThe SVT-40 is one of the strongest Marksman Rifles and we’ve got the best CoD Vanguard class loadout guide for you. Here’s the perfect build for the SVT-40, from the attachments to the best perks. Marksman Rifles can struggle to find their place in the CoD meta as they are banned in pro play and usually have a low pick rate. However, with some precision these weapons can take down enemies in as little as two bullets, making them extremely viable. So if you are a sharpshooter and want to melt enemies in Vanguard, you will want to try out this SVT-40 loadout. Contents Best SVT-40 Vanguard loadout – Best SVT-40 Vanguard class (Perks, Equipment, & Field Upgrade) – How to unlock the SVT-40 in Vanguard – Alternative to the SVT-40 Vanguard loadout – Best SVT-40 Vanguard loadout Muzzle: F8 Stabilizer – Barrel: Kovalevskaya 800MM BO3 – Optic: Slate Reflector – Stock: Empress Crown – Underbarrel: SMLE Pistol Grip – Ammo Type: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Fabric Grip – Proficiency: Vital – Kit: Fully Loaded – To kick off the best SVT-40 loadout, use the F8 Stabilizer as it will help increase the damage range and give you a higher chance to kill enemies in two bullets. Pair it up with the Kovalevskaya 800MM BO3 because it gives a larger “one-hit-kill area” and recoil control. For the optic, the Slate Reflector works great and makes seeing opponents very simple. The SMLE Pistol Grip increases the aim to fire speed which is essential as most attachments on this weapon slow that time down. Next up, use the Empress Crown as this stock gives the SVT a ton of weapon stability, recoil control, and accuracy. You’ll want to use Fabric Grip as this will give you a faster ADS and sprint to fire speed. For the ammo type, Lengthened is perfect especially for players with a quick trigger finger as the bullets fly out of the gun. To round out the best SVT build use Vital as this Proficiency gives a larger critical damage area, and Fully Loaded to get some extra magazines. Best SVT-40 Vanguard class (Perks, Equipment & Field Upgrade) Perk 1: Ghost – Perk 2: Radar – Perk 3: Double Time – Secondary: Machine Pistol – Lethal: MK2 Frag Grenade – Tactical: No 69 Stun Grenade – Field Upgrade: Dead Drop – For the SVT-40 you will want to use the usual perks you find in other loadouts. Ghost is essential to remain hidden from Spy Planes. Next, use Radar so you can see where enemies are firing from and Double Time to run around the map faster. The Machine Pistol works well with the SVT but if you want to shake it up then using Overkill in the third perk slot and a Combat Shotgun is another way to prevent enemies from getting too close. For the equipment, use the MK2 Frag Grenade and No 69 Stun Grenade as these are great for slowing down enemies and getting more kills. To finish off, use the Dead Drop Field Upgrade because it will save you killstreak progress and you can keep pumping them out. How to unlock SVT-40 in Vanguard To unlock the SVT-40 in CoD Vanguard you just need to reach level 27 and it will be available. Take advantage of the Combat Pacing feature and 24/7 playlists on Shipment and Das Haus to earn XP at the fastest rate possible. Alternatives to SVT-40 Vanguard loadout While trying to unlock the SVT use the game’s first Marksman Rifle the M1 Garand as this is another powerful weapon in the class. But you will definitely want to give the SVT-40 a try when you unlock as it can be the strongest gun in the game as it kills enemies with just two bullets. Looking for more Call of Duty: Vanguard updates and information? Check our list of guides below: Best CoD Vanguard FOV settings | Best MP40 Vanguard loadout | Best M1928 Vanguard loadout | Every CoD Vanguard perk | Best Vanguard controller settings | Unlock Atomic camo

Best SVD loadout in Black Ops 6 beta: Class setup, attachments, perks DexertoSniping in Black Ops 6 is a delight, and the SVD is a good sniper rifle to learn the ropes with. The fast-firing and easy-to-use weapon packs a punch and has pinpoint accuracy. Movement is king in BO6. Operators can fly around the map, over ledges, and around corners thanks to the new omnimovement system. As such, SMGs have dominated the beta, as players can weave in and out of their opponents. In saying that, sniper rifles provide a perfect counter. Players can dive around all they want, but there isn’t much you can do to avoid a sniper holding down a lane. Let’s jump right into what makes the SVD special. Best Black Ops 6 SVD loadout Optic: Blandwell 7x Scope – Magazine: Fast Mag I – Comb: Quickdraw Riser – Stock: Heavy Stock – Fire Mods: Rapid Fire – Our loadout focuses on improving speed and mobility without losing the firepower that makes sniper rifles unique. Black Ops 6 eliminates most cons from attachments, making it easier than ever to make an agile sniper class. To start, Fast Mag I improves reload quickness, aim down sight, and sprint to fire speed at the small cost of magazine ammo capacity. Choosing an optic comes down to personal preference. We enjoyed the Blandwell 7x Scope as it provides a clean sightline for both medium and long-range engagements. Similarly, Quickdraw Riser delivers a massive boost to aim down sight speed. Operating under that logic, Rapid Fire improves the weapon’s fire rate. If you get fired at in this title while using a sniper rifle, a significant amount of flinch makes it hard to fight back accurately. With that in mind, the Heavy Stock helps with flinch resistance. Best Perks, Equipment & Combat Specialty for SVD Although challenging, pulling off sniper trick shots in Black Ops 6 is more fun than ever thanks to ominovment. Its possible to dive off ledges and shoot enemies while in mid-air, and these Perks help make that task easier. Dexterity, for example, reduces weapon motion while jumping, sliding, and diving, while Double Time increases the duration of tactical sprinting. And since we have three red Perks equipped, this unlocks the Enforcer Speciality, which grants a movement boost and quicker health regeneration after every kill. To gain these benefits, you’ll want to use these perks and equipment: Wildcard: Perk Greed – Perk 1: Ghost – Perk 2: Gung-Ho – Perk 3: Double Time – Perk 4: Dexterity – Lethal: Thermo Grenade – Tactical: Concussion – Field Upgrade: Trophy System – How to unlock SVD in Black Ops 6 Beta The SVD is unlocked by reaching level 16, making it one of the harder weapons to unlock in the beta, but it shouldn’t be too difficult as all experience rates are doubled. For more meta builds, check out our Black Ops 6 gun tier list, as well as the best Jackal PDW and best C9 loadouts, both of which are dominating the beta. Also, you’ll want to optimize your controller settings before jumping into a match.

Best SVA 545 Warzone loadout: Class setup, attachments, perks The SVA 545 has maintained its spot at the top of the Warzone meta for some time now, and to help you get the most out of this dominant assault rifle, here’s the best loadout including attachments and perks. Throughout Warzone’s seasons, the SVA 545 has always been a competitive option. Regardless of whether it is absolute meta or not, there’s never been a time when this AN-94-inspired AR hasn’t been good. It continues to be a go-to option for players in Season 4 Reloaded, offering not only great accuracy but also a competitive TTK, great damage range, and even solid mobility. The SVA 545 is truly a well-rounded weapon that will never let you down. Those wanting to try out the SVA 545 in Warzone will need a meta loadout, so here’s the best class you can use with the meta assault rifle. Best SVA 545 Warzone loadout Here’s the best loadout to make the SVA 545 as accurate as possible, while making sure that it still feels fast and responsive: Muzzle: VT-7 Spiritfire Suppressor – Barrel: STV Precision Barrel – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Underbarrel: Bruen Heavy Support Grip – Magazine: 60 Round Drum – While the SVA 545 isn’t a laser by any means, it can be made to be extremely accurate with the right build. That starts with the VT-7 Spiritfire Suppressor, an attachment that boosts damage range, ADS speed, and bullet velocity, while also helping with recoil control. Additionally, its reduction to shot noise helps you stay incognito and avoid attracting unnecessary attention. You can get even better damage range and bullet velocity with the STV Precision Barrel, while the Bruen Heavy Support Grip further improves recoil control. This latter attachment comes with a slight penalty to vertical recoil, but this is more than made up for by its other accuracy benefits. To make your shots as accurate as possible, the JAK Glassless Optic is a fantastic optic to use. The optic has become one of the most popular optics in Warzone thanks to its clear lines of sight and accurate shots. Finally, the 60 Round Mag rounds off this loadout as a must-use attachment, with it doubling the SVA 545’s magazine capacity. Best SVA 545 Warzone class: Perks and Equipment The following perks and equipment lean into the SVA 545’s strengths of being a mobile assault rifle: Perk 1: Double Time – Increases Tac Sprint duration and reduces refresh time. – Perk 2: Sleight of Hand – Reload faster. – Perk 3: Quick Fix – Killing players or inserting a plate immediately starts health regeneration. – Perk 4: Resolute – When taking damage from gunfire, grants a short bonus to movement speed. – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Battle Rage – Double Time will give you more Tactical Sprint to run faster, perfect for covering ground in Warzone’s open maps. The 60 Round Mag doesn’t greatly harm your reload speed, but Sleight of Hand will make sure you’re always ready for gunfights with faster reload times and make up for the slower speed that is there. Quick Fix is one of the best perks in Warzone, provided you enjoy aggressive play and are always looking for engagements. Either killing an enemy player or inserting an armor plate will immediately start health regeneration, which is highly beneficial when you’re in a close fight. The last perk you’ll want to use is Resolute, which has proven itself to be an excellent Perk 4 option throughout Warzone’s seasons. When this perk is equipped, you gain a 5% movement buff after taking damage, which leans into the SVA 545’s excellent mobility. For lethal equipment, a Semtex is a strong option that can be thrown quickly to pressure an enemy player trying to take cover or heal up. Then Battle Rage works well in the tactical slot, boosting several key stats when active, such as damage resistance and Tac Sprint regeneration speed. How to unlock SVA 545 in Warzone To unlock the SVA 545 in Warzone all you have to do is reach Level 4, as that’s when you get access to Create a Class and can first make custom loadouts. However, you’ll still need to grind out 30 weapon levels to use all of the SVA 545’s attachments. Best alternative to SVA 545 in Warzone The BP50 is another mobile yet highly accurate assault rifle that has seen plenty of use in the current meta. While it isn’t quite as easy to use as the SVA 545 at extreme ranges, the BP50’s incredible handling makes it a great option for those who want to play more aggressively. There’s also the Holger 556 and MTZ-556, both of which are strong options right now in the assault rifle category. If you’re looking for something a little different, check out the best SMGs and Sniper Rifles that are dominating Warzone’s current meta.

Best SVA 545 Loadout for MW3: Class setup, Attachments, Perks & more ActivisionThe SVA 545 is a formidable weapon despite being the initial assault rifle available to players in MW3. To optimize its performance in Season 4 Reloaded, consider using the following loadout for the best results. Players jumping fresh into Modern Warfare 3 will often run the SVA 545 as their first weapon. Considering it’s the first weapon in the jack-of-all-trades Assault Rifle category, it’s an easy first choice. However, this weapon is still one of the best options for players to run with, even beyond those first few levels. It has some quirks that you have to get used to, but once you do, it becomes a real treat to use in the game. Here is a complete guide to making the best SVA 545 loadout in MW3 Season 4 Reloaded including Class setup, Attachments, and Perks. Best SVA 545 MW3 loadout Stock: Mane V6 Stock – Barrel: NT Quietus Suppressed Barrel – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Rear Grip: Demo 650 Grip – Underbarrel: SL Skeletal Vertical Grip – The SVA 545 has a unique firing sequence. It fires a two-shot burst when you first fire the weapon, followed by an automatic fire rate. While this may feel odd at first, it has proven to be a strong contender due to its high damage and fast TTK. Don’t be afraid to let go of the trigger here and there to burst fire this weapon and maximize your DPS. This loadout begins with the Mane V6 Stock to help curb some of that gun kickback when firing. It gives you better recoil control to make sure that you can land your shots when you need to, and keep the pressure on your target. Next up is the NT Quietus Suppressed Barrel which offers more handling and mobility so that you can get around the map much easier. It also helps you stay off the radar when you fire your weapon, which gives you an added element of stealth. The focus on recoil control and firing stability is continued with the Demo 650 Grip and the SL Skeletal Vertical Grip. Both of these will improve your recoil (though the SL Skeletal will cause some more horizontal issues), and will also give you better overall stability when aiming. Finally, the JAK Glassless Optic is one of the best sights in MW3 thanks to its clarity and excellent sightlines. Best SVA 545 MW3 loadout: Perks and Equipment Vest: Infantry increases the duration of your Tac Sprint and improves its refresh time – – Gloves: Scavenger resupply ammo – – Boots: Stalker increases your ADS and strafing speed – – Gear: Mag Holster increases your reload speed – – Lethal: Frag Grenade – Tactical: Flash Grenade – Field Equipment: Trophy System – Modern Warfare 3 has removed the classic perk system with a new system involving using gear. Check out our complete guide on this if you need an explainer for what each gear item does. In this case, we recommend the Infantry Vest since it increases your Tac Sprint duration and reduces the refresh time. A quick note on the choices here, there are several powerful gloves in MW3 but Scavenger helps since this thing shreds ammo. Additionally, Stalker boots are ideal as they boost your strafe and ADS speeds with the AR. The game is always getting faster, so being able to stay moving is paramount to your success. Mag Holster is also geared towards speed by increasing how quickly you can reload your weapon in a bind. This will help you to get back into the fight at a better pace than before. Your lethal and tactical equipment choices are whatever fits your fancy. That said, after the Season 1 Reloaded and Season 3 patches, the Thermobaric Grenade has become a top contender in the lethal equipment category. How to unlock the SVA 545 in Modern Warfare 3 The SVA 545 is the first AR you get, so you’ll have it from the get-go. That’s everything you need to know to dominate with this weapon. Though its unique burst pattern may take some getting used to, this weapon surely is a fun one to use in-game. Best SVA 545 alternative in MW3 A good alternative to the SVA 545 is the MTZ-556 since both excel at close-range encounters. Alternatively, you could also look at the BAS-B, another consistent despite receiving tons of nerfs. There are a lot more guns that make up the best of the best in MW3, so check out how to make the best loadout for the FJX Horus, BP50, and RAM-9.

Best Superi 46 Warzone loadout: Class setup, attachments, perks, more ActivisionWarzone Season 4 added the Superi 46, an SMG that offers a great balance of mobility and ease of use, and this powerful weapon has taken no time to take over the meta. As expected of a meta SMG, the Superi 46 is a fantastic weapon for those who enjoy a run-and-gun playstyle, with it arguably being the best close-range weapon in the current meta. This Italian submachine gun is remarkably well-rounded, offering incredible mobility, great recoil control, and fast handling. Regardless of whether you are a top player or a complete newbie, it is a great option that will never let you down, as long as you treat it right. The community’s impressions speak for themselves, with the Superi 46 being the most used SMG in Warzone throughout both Season 4 and Season 4 Reloaded. If we know anything about the Warzone community, it’s that when a gun is popular, it’s going to be strong. Best Superi 46 Warzone loadout Muzzle: ZEHMN35 Compensated Flash Hider – Barrel: Zulu OP3 Light Barrel – Stock: Rescue-9 Stock – Underbarrel: XRK Edge BW-4 Handstop – Magazine: 40 Round Mag – It’s possible to build the Superi 46 to have unmatched mobility, and this approach makes sense in multiplayer, where everything is so fast-paced. However, in Warzone, it’s better to make a more well-rounded build that allows the Superi 46 to compete in a wider range of gunfights. To do this, equip both the Zulu OP3 Light Barrel and ZEHMN35 Compensated Flash Hider. When used together, these improve recoil control significantly, making it much easier to keep the shots on target, especially when trying to stretch out the Superi’s range. Since the Superi 46 is an SMG, you’ll also want to improve its handling. Thankfully, running the DR-6 Handstop and Rescue-9 Stock helps do that. The stock is especially strong, providing a huge 9% boost to Sprint Speed, while also improving recoil control, making it one of the best attachments in Warzone. Round off this Superi 46 loadout with the 40 Round Mag. Though it isn’t ideal, this is the largest magazine that can be equipped. While this is a limitation, the Superi 46’s slower fire rate means those 40 rounds last longer than they would with other SMGs. Best Superi 46 class: Perks and Equipment Perk 1: Double Time – Increases Tactical Sprint duration and reduces refresh time. – Perk 2: Mountaineer – Fall from higher heights without taking fatal damage. – Perk 3: Tracker – Enemies leave behind a footprint trail and enemy death markers are visible. Kill markers are hidden from enemy teams. – Perk 4: Birdseye – Your UAV, Portable Radar, or UAV Tower shows the heading of the enemy for your squad and detects players using Ghost. – Lethal: C4 – Tactical: Flash Grenade – With the Superi 46 being so mobile, you’ll want to use perks that play around that strength. For this reason, Double Time and Mountaineer are a great combination, boosting Tactical Sprint and reducing movement penalties after falling. Equally, this SMG’s incredible mobility means you’ll have plenty of opportunities to hunt enemies down for extra kills. To facilitate this, use Tracker, revealing nearby enemy footsteps, and making it practically impossible for other teams to escape. Birdseye partners extremely well with the other three perks in this loadout. It helps hunt down other teams even more effectively by canceling out Ghost. With Tracker revealing their footsteps, and Birdseye countering Ghost, there is no way for other teams to avoid you. Finally, the Superi 46 is at its best when you use equipment that helps with pushing other squads. A C4 works great for pressuring other teams using cover, allowing you to run in for easy kills. Similarly, a Flash Grenade leaves those affected blind and unable to fight back. How to unlock the Superi 46 To get the Superi 46 in Warzone, you’ll need to complete Sector 6 of the Season 4 Battle Pass. This requires a total of 20 Battle Pass tokens if starting from scratch. Once Season 4 concludes, the Superi 46 will be available as an unlock from the Armory instead, requiring either 5 daily challenges or match wins. Best Superi 46 alternative in Warzone Following its buffs in Season 4, the FJX Horus is now a top-tier option as it has great mobility, damage range, and recoil control. It has a lot in common with the Superi 46, with both dominating up close, which is why they have established themselves as Warzone’s best SMGs. For more top-tier SMGs, you should also consider using these meta loadouts for the WSP-9, Striker, and Striker 9. They are all strong options that will increase your odds of winning more Warzone matches.

Best Superi 46 MW3 loadout: Class setup, attachments, perks ActivisionThe Superi 46 was added in MW3 Season 4, bringing with it the most mobile weapon in Modern Warfare 3 to date, and here’s the best loadout to turn this SMG into the ultimate run-and-gun primary. Modern Warfare 3 is no stranger to making its new weapons very strong, with the Kar98k being a prime example. However, the marksman rifle wasn’t the only weapon that dominated when it arrived in Season 4, with the Superi 46 being just as strong . This new submachine gun has incredible mobility, being by far the most mobile weapon in Modern Warfare 3 when built correctly. This does come at the cost of a slower fire rate, but those who don’t mind that are in for a treat. Here’s the best Superi 46 loadout to use in MW3, including the optimal attachments, perks, and equipment to make it the speed demon it was destined to be. Best Superi 46 Modern Warfare 3 loadout Here’s the best Superi 46 loadout to turn the popular MW3 weapon into a hypermobile SMG that’s perfect for playing aggressively: Muzzle: Zehmn35 Compensated Flash Hider – Barrel: Bore 99 Short Barrel – Stock: Rescue-9 Stock – Underbarrel: XRK Edge BW-4 Handstop – Rear Grip: Saking ZX-Grip – The Superi 46 can be built in MW3 to have an absurd level of mobility that betters even the pre-nerf BP50. For those who love the run-and-gun playstyle, this SMG is now the best weapon to use, and it’s not even close. To maximize the Superi 46’s mobility, equip the Bore 99 Short Barrel and Rescue-9 Stock. This incredible combination gives a Movement Speed of 6.3 m/s, a Sprint Speed of 6.8 m/s, and an incredible Tactical Sprint Speed of 8.3 m/s, For context, that’s 10% faster than the quickest WSP Swarm build possible, while also having superior range, better recoil control, and a larger magazine. The new SMG doesn’t just have fast mobility either, its handling is great too. That’s especially true when the XRK Edge BW-4 Handstop is equipped. This meta attachment provides an 7% boost to both ADS and Sprint to Fire Speed, while also further improving key mobility stats like ADS Movement Speed. Given its mobility, you would expect the Superi 46 to be amongst MW3’s hardest-to-control weapons. However, when using both the Zehmn35 Compensated Flash Hider and Sakin ZX Grip, it actually has great recoil control. Keeping your shots on target is also made easier by the SMG’s fantastic iron sights, negating the need for an optic entirely. Best Superi 46 MW3 class: Perks & equipment Vest: Ninja Vest – Eliminates footstep sounds, immune to movement reduction effects, and resupply Throwing Stars and Knives. – Boots: Running Sneakers – Increases Tactical Sprint duration and reduces refresh time. Improves sprint to fire time after Tactical Sprint. – Gear: Ghost T/V Camo – While moving, blocks detection by UAVs, enemy radar sources, and Heartbeat Sensors. – Lethal: Throwing Knife – Retrievable throwing knife that is lethal on impact in core multiplayer. – Tactical: Battle Rage – Health regenerates quickly, enemy tactical equipment is resisted, and Tactical Sprint is constantly refreshed. – Field Upgrade: Med Box – A box of medical supplies for you and your teammates to reduce healing delay until death. – Since the Superi 46 is the king of mobility, it makes sense to pick perks that play to that strength. For this reason, it’s best to use the Ninja Vest which silences footsteps, letting you freely run around the map and flank enemies without being noticed. This pairs nicely with Ghost T/V Camo to complete the stealth setup. The other perk you’ll want to use is Running Sneakers. Running Sneakers partners great with such a mobile weapon, as they let you sprint around extremely quickly, making it possible to cross MW3’s map in no time at all. For an underrated option that works great with the Superi 46, try using the Med Box. This Field Upgrade can be deployed when you spawn in, granting rapid healing regeneration for that life. It’s basically an enhanced version of Compression Plate (formerly Quick Fix), but you don’t have to use a perk slot to gain the benefits. Keeping with the theme of fast healing, Battle Rage provides similar benefits, while also helping you resist the effects of enemy equipment. This can be used while waiting for Med Box to charge up, providing a practically infinite boost to health regeneration. Finally, a Throwing Knife is the best lethal as it works well with the Ninja Vest. How to unlock Superi 46 in Modern Warfare 3 The Superi 46 is unlocked by completing Sector 6 of the Season 4 Battle Pass. Doing so requires at least 20 Battle Pass Tokens, though less may be needed if you have already progressed through the Battle Pass. Best alternative to Superi 46 in Modern Warfare 3 The FJX Horus is another MW3 SMG that has a lot in common with the Superi 46. Both are highly mobile, accurate weapons that are great up close, but they also hold their own at medium range. They aren’t the only viable SMGs that currently feature in Modern Warfare 3’s meta. You can also use the RAM-9, Striker 9, Striker, and HRM-9, all of which are competitive.

Best Striker Warzone loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks The Striker is a formidable SMG excelling at both close and medium ranges. Conquer Urzikstan in Warzone with the best loadout to ensure dominance in Season 4 Reloaded. Long-term Call of Duty fans will have fond memories of the UMP-45. It dominated in the original Modern Warfare 2 and now returns in MW3 and Warzone as the Striker, an equally powerful weapon. The Striker is unique amongst SMGs as it is incredibly accurate but still offers a competitive TTK up close. It serves as a middle ground between the WSP 9 and Striker 9. In a battle royale like Warzone where versatility is key, that positions the Striker nicely. To help you get the most out of this SMG we’ve put together this meta loadout to use in Season 4 Reloaded. Contents Best Striker loadout – Striker loadout: Perks and equipment – How to unlock Striker in Warzone – Best alternative to Striker in Warzone – Best Striker Warzone loadout Muzzle: ZEHMN35 Compensated Flash Hider – Ammunition: .45 Auto High Grain Rounds – Stock: Lachmann Mk2 Light Stock – Magazine: 48 Round Mag – Underbarrel: DR-6 Handstop – The Striker is exceptionally accurate and forgiving regarding its recoil, and you’ll want to lean into that strength. The combo of the Lachmann Mk2 Light Stock and the meta ZEHMN35 Compensated Flash Hider effectively turns the SMG into a laser. With recoil under control, the underbarrel slot is home to the DR-6 Handstop. This attachment will help improve all the mobility-related stats, such as aim walking and overall movement speed of the Striker. However, it will reduce your ADS Speed slightly. We use the .45 Auto High Grain Rounds are going to give your Striker a decent buff to its damage range and bullet velocity so you can be effective from a greater distance. It will give you a little less control of your recoil, but this is worth what it gives you. Finally, the 48 Round Mag is an obvious choice as it drastically reduces how often you’ll need to reload. Larger magazines are a must in Warzone where the longer TTK will see you quickly burn through ammunition. Striker Warzone Loadout: Perks and Equipment Perk 1: Double Time Increases Tac Sprint duration – – Perk 2: Sleight of Hand Reload faster – – Perk 3: Stalker Increased strafe and aim down sight movement speed – – Perk 4: Resolute 5% speed boost when hit with an enemy bullet – – Lethal: Throwing Knife – Tactical: Stun Grenade – Despite its exceptional accuracy, the Striker is still an SMG at heart and therefore is best used with Perks that benefit an aggressive playstyle. For movement, the combination of Double Time in slot 1 and Stalker in slot 3 can’t be beat with these two Perks combining to make you much more mobile. Since the 60 Round Drum does slow down the Striker’s reload speed a lot, it’s good to use Sleight of Hand in Perk slot 2 to reload faster. This makes sense on an SMG as you’ll regularly be taking close-range gunfights where small margins like a faster reload can make all the difference. Resolute has already proven itself as a powerhouse Perk in slot 4, increasing your movement speed after taking damage. This is incredible on this loadout as the No Stock attachment stacks with Resolute letting you run very quickly. A Throwing Knife is a classic option for the lethal slot to finish off downed enemies without having to waste ammo. As for tactical, a Stun Grenade can provide a huge advantage in an otherwise tight gunfight. How to unlock Striker in Warzone The Striker is unlocked in Warzone by reaching Level 4 when you first get access to the Gunsmith. Alternatively, extracting the Striker in Zombies will also unlock the SMG. Best alternative to Striker in Warzone A great alternative to the Striker is the Rival-9 which trades range and versatility in favor of a more traditional SMG experience with the Rival having a rapid fire rate and dominating up close. SMGs are always in the meta for Warzone, so check out how to kit out other options like the Superi 46, WSP-9, and FJX Horus.

Best Striker 9 Warzone loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks ActivisionThe Striker 9 is an exceptional SMG and one that’ll work wonders in Warzone Season 4 Reloaded. While a little underwhelming compared to the assault rifles from MW3, the SMG class does have a few standouts. Fans have flocked to the Rival-9 and AMR 9, yet it’s the Striker 9 that grew in popularity after numerous buffs. Described by Sledgehammer Games as a “compact SMG that handles like a carbine,” the Striker 9 handles just like that at all ranges. Granted, you don’t want to be caught in the open with an SMG, but the following build may help you feel bold in your lobbies. Here are all the details you need to know on the best Striker 9 loadout in Warzone Season 4 Reloaded. Best Striker 9 Warzone loadout Muzzle: ZEHMN35 Compensated Flash Hider – Barrel: Striker Recon Long Barrel – Rear Grip: Sakin ZX Grip – Magazine: 50 Round Drum – Underbarrel: XRK Edge BW-4 Handstop – The ZEHMN35 Compensated Flash Hider is arguably one of the best attachments in the game, as it shortens radar pings, and boosts important attributes like vertical and horizontal recoil. It also gives a notable boost to firing aim stability, perfect for unloading full magazines on enemy players. Meanwhile, the Stirker Recon Long Barrel greatly improves bullet velocity and range, perfect for mid-range engagements. Since it’s an SMG, the Striker 9 does deal with an increased amount of recoil, however, the Sakin ZX Grip will help keep the gun’s recoil down. On the other hand, the XRK Edge BW-4 Handstop will help boost your movement speeds, keeping you mobile at all times. Finally, the default mag leaves room to be desired, and that’s where 50 Round Drum comes in. Having more bullets per clip will help you lay down suppressive fire and keep your enemies on their heels. Striker 9 Warzone Loadout: Perks and Equipment Perk Slot 1: Double Time Increases Tactical Sprint duration and reduces refresh time – – Perk 2: Sleight of Hand Reload faster – – Perk 3: Quick Fix Starts health regeneration when killing a player or inserting a plate – – Perk Slot 4: Resolute Gives you a speed boost when hit by enemy shots – – Lethal: Throwing Knife – Tactical: Smoke Grenade – Start out your Perk package with Double Time to give you faster speeds through increased Tac Sprint duration. This pairs well with Resolute in Perk Slot 4 so that you can get an overall boost of speed when being hit by enemy fire. Sleight of Hand works great to keep your weapon loaded at all times, and Quick Fix rounds it out through kickstarting your health regeneration for better survivability. The lethal and tactical slots are up to personal preference, but a Throwing Knife and Smoke Grenade are great options for finishing off squads and getting in and out of trouble. How to unlock the Striker 9 in Warzone Unlocking the Striker 9 requires you to complete the Armory unlock challenge for it. Once you hit level 25, you can complete daily challenges to unlock the SMG. The other option, and possibly less painful, is to play Zombies and extract with the Striker 9. Best Striker 9 alternative There are plenty of great SMGs to choose from, with the base Striker working wonders as a backup plan. The Striker 9 is just one SMG of many that make up a large chunk of the Warzone Season 4 Reloaded meta. Learn more about the others like the FJX Horus, Superi 46, Striker, and Renetti.

Best Striker 9 Modern Warfare 3 loadout: Class setup, attachments, perks ActivisionThe Striker 9 is a great SMG to use in Modern Warfare 3, offering quick movement while dealing plenty of damage. Of course, it always helps to know the loadout to bring the best out of it. The Striker 9 is one of MW3’s best SMGs, and its best attachments complement the playstyle most SMG users love: Staying quiet and mobile while taking out their opponent at close range. Here is the breakdown of how to best deck out your Striker 9 to make it the best it can be. Contents Best Striker 9 MW3 loadout – Best Striker 9 MW3 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the Striker 9 in Modern Warfare 3 – Best Striker 9 alternative in Modern Warfare 3 – Best Striker 9 MW3 loadout Attachments Muzzle: Shadowstrike Suppressor – Barrel: Striker Elite Long Barrel – Stock: Lachmann Recon Series Stock – Underbarrel: FTAC SP-10 Angled Grip – Magazine: 40 Round Mag – Much of MW3’s multiplayer matches will revolve around using short-range damage to carve out your spot on the map, and needing to take out enemies from afar occasionally. Because of this, this loadout for the Striker 9 is designed to give you the best chance at surviving a close-range fight, while also giving you the ability to shoot from a distance, if you need to. The Shadowstrike Suppressor is going to give the Striker 9 quieter shots to keep your position hidden while also allowing for greater mobility. It’s hard to think of two things you’d want more on an ideal SMG. Using the Striker Elite Long Barrel will give the gun longer damage range, while also reducing both vertical and horizontal recoil. It does slow your movement speed slightly, but this is overshadowed by the benefits to precision. The RB Crotalus Assault Stock will also improve the recoil on the Striker 9, though at the cost of a -9% to ADS speed. The FTAC SP-10 Angled Grip reduces the horizontal recoil significantly, while giving a slight bump to vertical recoil. But it’s not enough to be worried about. Finally, the 40 Round Mag gives you more shots to help keep you alive in a gunfight. Best Striker 9 MW3 class: Perks & equipment Modern Warfare 3 removes the traditional perk system in favor of using gear. Check out our complete guide if you need an explainer of what each gear item does. Given the gun’s excellent performance in close-range fights, you’ll want to gear up to complement those strengths. Vest: Infantry Vest will increase your Tac Sprint duration for better movement – – Gloves: Commando Gloves allows you to reload while sprinting so you don’t need to slow down – – Boots: Stalker Sneakers increases your strafe and ADS movement to compensate for the attachments that hurt these stats – – Gear: Bone Conduction Headset makes combat noise quieter so you can hear enemy players more easily – – Lethal: Frag Grenade – Tactical: Flash Grenade – Field Upgrade: DDOS – How to unlock the Striker 9 in Modern Warfare 3 The Striker 9 can be obtained after reaching level 4. If you need help ranking up, make sure to check out our guide on how to get higher levels faster. Best Striker 9 alternative in Modern Warfare 3 Look no further than the Rival 9. Early signs point toward the close-range beast as being the best SMG in Modern Warfare 3, and plenty of pros have also started using the weapon. That’s all for our Striker 9 loadout in Modern Warfare 3. For more MW3 coverage, check out these guides below: Best Modern Warfare 3 AR class loadouts | How to slide cancel in Modern Warfare 3 | Best controller settings in Modern Warfare 3 | All maps & modes | How to play Modern Warfare 3 at 120 FPS on PS5 |

Best Striker 45 loadouts for Call of Duty: Warzone Infinity WardThe Striker 45 has struggled to make an impact in Call of Duty: Modern Warfare but, with the right attachments, it can actually be fairly strong in Warzone. Here, we break down your best loadout options when using the Season 2 SMG. As far as DLC weapons go in Modern Warfare, none have come close to the Grau 5.56 in terms of impacting the Warzone meta. The AR has dominated Verdansk thanks to its minimal recoil and incredible range. However, the Striker 45 can be a trusty SMG in Warzone with the right attachments. It also boasts fairly useful iron sights, that can remain viable at nearly all ranges. Because of it’s slower fire rate, you’ll want to focus your Striker 45 usage on close to medium ranges so, in this vein, we’ve put together two classes for your perusal. Best Striker 45 loadout for medium ranges Monolithic Suppressor – 400m Stainless Steel barrel – FSS Guardian stock – Merc Foregrip – 45 round mags – The Monolithic Suppressor and 400m Stainless Steel barrel massively boost the Striker’s range, as well as stabilizing shots and keeping you off the radar. While ADS will be slowed slightly, it remains fairly fast as a result of its class as an SMG. Next up is the Merc Foregrip, which will stabilize shots and keep you in the fight at medium ranges. This will be complemented by the FSS Guardian, which aids aiming stability and speeds up your strafing while ADS. Finally, the 45 round mags will enable you to rip through multiple enemies without having the need to reload. In Warzone, this is absolutely essential, as having to break off gunfights to reload is a sure-fire way to die. Best Striker 45 loadout for closer ranges Monolithic Suppressor – 300m Poly Barrel – XRK Gen III Survivalist Series – Commando Foregrip – 45 round mags – Both the Monolithic Suppressor and 45 round mags remain, for the same reasons as stated above. On nearly every Warzone loadout, you should be looking to include the Monolithic Suppressor and expand your magazine capacity. However, we’ve swapped out the 400m Stainless Steel barrel for the lighter 300m Poly Barrel. This still boosts range and aids recoil, but doesn’t slow handling nearly as much. A similar change has been made to the Foregrip, as the Commando still aids recoil stabilization, but doesn’t incur the same handling penalties that the Merc does. Finally, the XRK Gen III Survivalist Series stock speeds up ADS, boosting your ability to snap aim for closer range engagements. This Striker class is better run with a Grau or M4A1 in your back pocket, while the first can be used alongside a sniper of your choice. Give them both a try, and be sure to tweet us @DexertoIntel with your feedback!

Best Streetsweeper alternatives in Warzone after shotgun nerf ActivisionThe Streetsweeper was nerfed at the start of Warzone Season 4 as community resentment towards it continually grew and, while it’s still a solid option in Verdansk, it may be headed for another nerf. Shotguns are incredibly powerful in Warzone, capable of taking down foes in just a few quick hits, wiping squads with relative ease if you’ve got any kind of aim. Since it was nerfed in the Season 4 update, the Streetsweeper isn’t quite as powerful, but still really packs a punch if you set it up properly. That said, another nerf for the gun seems almost inevitable: and that could spell disaster if you like rushing enemies with shotty in hand. Here are a few alternatives ahead of the inevitable nerf. Best JAK-12 loadout in Warzone Muzzle: FORGE TAC Marauder – Barrel: ZLR J-3600 TORRENT – Laser: 5mW Laser – Ammunition: 20 Rnd Drum Mags – Rear Grip: Stippled Grip Tape – The JAK-12 is undeniably the best option here. It’s fully automatic and, while it’s not quite as powerful as the Streetsweeper, will be the easiest to transition to. You won’t be killing enemies quite as fast, but it’s the closest you’ll get to Streetsweeper dominance. You could use the infamous Dragon’s Breath Rounds but, since they were nerfed, we actually think the 20 Round drum is a better option here. Best Gallo SA12 loadout in Warzone Barrel: 21.4” Reinforced Heavy – Muzzle: Duckbill Choke – Body: SWAT 5MW Laser Sight – Magazine: STANAG 12 Round Tube – Stock: Wire Stock – The Gallo SA12 is Cold War’s only addition to the Warzone shotgun class that is really worth using in Verdansk. The Hauer has decent damage stats but the time between shots is pretty slow, so if you’re not downing players in two shots max, you’ve probably lost the fight. The Gallo is easy to spam at your opponents, but the 12 Round Tube means you have to hit your shots. As long as you’re not shooting in circles, you could use this across most modes and be pretty comfortable. Best R9-0 loadout in Warzone Muzzle: Choke – Barrel: FORGE TAC Sentry – Laser: 5mW Laser – Underbarrel: Merc Foregrip – Ammunition: Dragon’s Breath Rounds – The R9-0 once wreaked havoc upon Verdansk and, while it’s not quite as potent now, it’s still pretty serious business. With the Dragon’s Breath Rounds in hand, this will definitely stun your enemies. We would advise only using this in Solo and maybe Duo modes, though. It won’t have the same effect as the shotguns above when you’re going up against more opponents and has to be concentrated more on singular gunfights. So, while it mostly comes down to personal preference, it’s well worth trying out these loadouts and seeing what works best for you. Some even argue that the JAK-12 is better than the Streetsweeper, but we can only hope not.

Best Stoner 63 Warzone class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Setup ActivisionLMGs aren’t exactly known for their mobility and are not used as much in the current Warzone meta — but with the right attachments, the Stoner 63 can be a real winner for you. The Stoner 63 has been a fan-favorite gun amongst LMG enthusiasts since it tore its way through the virtual battlefields of the original Black Ops. Fortunately, this hard-hitting LMG still packs a punch in Warzone, and is an underrated selection. Some issues such as poor damage range and slow mobility hinder the Stoner 63 from becoming a top-tier meta weapon, but it is always fun wielding a devastating LMG for a change from the current meta. The large magazine size of the Stoner 63 may actually come in handy after the recent health update, as part of the Season 3 Reloaded update. Contents Best Stoner 63 loadout for Warzone – Best Stoner 63 setup (Perks & equipment) – How to unlock the Stoner 63 in Warzone – Alternative Stoner 63 loadout – Best Stoner 63 loadout for Warzone Attachments Muzzle: Agency Suppressor – Barrel: 21.8″ Task Force – Optic: Axial Arms 3x – Underbarrel: Field Agent Grip – Rear Grip: Airborne Elastic Wrap – While the Stoner 63 has a fairly decent standard sight, the Axial Arms 3x remains a staple pick. It provides a clear picture of your surroundings. This will help you win any short to medium-range engagements with ease. Next up is the 21.8″ Task Force barrel and Field Agent Grip. These attachments make the Stoner 63’s vertical recoil a lot more manageable, while also increasing the gun’s overall firing movement speed. The Stoner 63 will still creep up the screen during prolonged engagements, but these attachments will enable you to kill your target before needing to make major adjustments. The Agency Suppressor increases the LMG’s damage range and sound suppression, enabling you to sit back and beam anyone that dares stray into your sights. When this is combined with the 3x magnification from the Axial Arms, you have a truly lethal combination. Lastly, it’s key you round off this powerful loadout with the Airborn Elastic Wrap which increases ADS speed, flinch resistance, at the cost of reduced sprint recover speed and movement speed while firing. Best Stoner 63 setup (Perks & equipment) Perk 1: Double Time – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Secondary: OTs 9 – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Heartbeat Sensor – Our Stoner 63 loadout uses Double Time and Amped to keep you mobile, while also enabling you to quickly swap weapons. These perks are important for most Warzone classes, but especially those that are a little slower in their overall mobility. The Overkill perk enables the use of any of the best SMG class loadouts as a secondary weapon. Not only does this enable you to remain competitive in close-quarter firefights, but it also allows for some incredibly mobile plays. Lastly, both the Semtex and Heartbeat Sensor enable you to seek out targets and obliterate any campers. Simply use your Heartbeat Sensor and creep up on your unsuspecting foes to get some quick kills. Don’t forget, you can switch out the Heartbeat Sensor for a Throwing Knife if you prefer to instantly kill downed enemies, but that completely depends on your playstyle. How to unlock the Stoner 63 in Warzone This beefy LMG is unlocked as soon as you reach level 4. This means you won’t need to do any pesky challenges in order to use it in Warzone. However, you’ll still need to grind the gun’s levels in Black Ops Cold War’s standard multiplayer or Warzone modes if you wish to get hold of the very best attachments. SMGS to pair with the Stoner 63 In order to use the Stoner 63 in either Caldera or Rebirth Island a sub-machine gun secondary is an absolute must. The Welgun is a fast firing SMG that can tear through enemies in close range egagments. If the Welgun doesn’t suit your fancy, then the Carl Gustaf (H4 Blixen) should be the next SMG that you’ll want to try. In fact, this hard-hitting SMG offers great mobility and accuracy across close to medium-range eggaements.